EVAL-ADE5169F62EBZ [ADI]
Single-Phase Energy Measurement IC with 8052 MCU, RTC, and LCD Driver; 单相电能计量IC，具有8052 MCU ，RTC和LCD驱动器
| 型号： | EVAL-ADE5169F62EBZ |
| 厂家： | 
ADI |
| 描述： | Single-Phase Energy Measurement IC with 8052 MCU, RTC, and LCD Driver |
| 文件： | 总148页 (文件大小：2641K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
Single-Phase Energy Measurement IC with
8052 MCU, RTC, and LCD Driver
ADE5166/ADE5169
GENERAL FEATURES
MICROPROCESSOR FEATURES
Wide supply voltage operation: 2.4 V to 3.7 V
8052-based core
Internal bipolar switch between regulated and battery inputs
Ultralow power operation with power saving modes (PSM)
Full operation: 4 mA to 1.6 mA (PLL clock dependent)
Battery mode: 3.2 mA to 400 μA (PLL clock dependent)
Sleep mode
Single-cycle 4 MIPS 8052 core
8052-compatible instruction set
32.768 kHz external crystal with on-chip PLL
2 external interrupt sources
External reset pin
Real-time clock (RTC) mode: 1.5 μA
Low power battery mode
RTC and LCD mode: 38 μA (LCD charge pump enabled)
Reference: 1.2 V 0.1% (10 ppm/°C drift)
64-lead RoHS package options
Wake-up from I/O, temperature change, alarm, and
universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART)
LCD driver operation with automatic scrolling
Temperature measurement
Low profile quad flat package (LQFP)
Operating temperature range: −40°C to +85°C
Real-time clock (RTC)
Counter for seconds, minutes, hours, days, months,
and years
Date counter, including leap year compensation
Automatic battery switchover for RTC backup
Operation down to 2.4 V
Ultralow battery supply current: 1.5 μA
Selectable output frequency: 1 Hz to 16 kHz
Embedded digital crystal frequency compensation for
calibration and temperature variation of 2 ppm resolution
Integrated LCD driver
ENERGY MEASUREMENT FEATURES
Proprietary analog-to-digital converters (ADCs) and digital
signal processing (DSP) provide high accuracy active
(watt), reactive (var), and apparent energy (volt-ampere
(VA)) measurement
<0.1% error on active energy over a dynamic range of
1000 to 1 @ 25°C
<0.5% error on reactive energy over a dynamic range of
1000 to 1 @ 25°C (ADE5169 only)
<0.5% error on root mean square (rms) measurements
over a dynamic range of 500 to 1 for current (Irms) and
100 to 1 for voltage (Vrms) @ 25°C
Supports IEC 62053-21, IEC 62053-22, IEC 62053-23,
EN 50470-3 Class A, Class B, and Class C, and ANSI C12-16
Differential input with programmable gain amplifiers (PGAs)
supports shunts, current transformers, and di/dt current
sensors
104-segment driver for the ADE5166 and ADE5169
2×, 3×, or 4× multiplexing
4 LCD memory banks for screen scrolling
LCD voltages generated internally or with external resistors
Internal adjustable drive voltages up to 5 V independent
of power supply level
On-chip peripherals
2 independent UART interfaces
SPI or I2C
2 current inputs for antitamper detection in the ADE5169
High frequency outputs proportional to Irms, active, reactive,
or apparent power (AP)
Watchdog timer
Power supply management with user-selectable levels
Memory: 62 kB flash memory, 2.256 kB RAM
Development tools
Single-pin emulation
IDE-based assembly and C-source debugging
Table 1. Features Available on Each Part
Feature
Part No.
Antitamper
WATT, VA, Irms, Vrms
VAR
ADE5166, ADE5169
ADE5166, ADE5169
ADE5169
di/dt Sensor
ADE5169
Rev. 0
Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other
rights of third parties that may result from its use. Specifications subject to change without notice. No
license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices.
Trademarks and registeredtrademarks arethe property of their respective owners.
One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A.
Tel: 781.329.4700
Fax: 781.461.3113
www.analog.com
©2008 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.
ADE5166/ADE5169
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Features ............................................................................... 1
di/dt Current Sensor and Digital Integrator (ADE5169).......... 47
Power Quality Measurements................................................... 48
Phase Compensation ................................................................. 50
RMS Calculation ........................................................................ 51
Active Power Calculation.......................................................... 53
Active Energy Calculation ........................................................ 55
Reactive Power Calculation (ADE5169)................................. 58
Reactive Energy Calculation (ADE5169)................................ 60
Apparent Power Calculation..................................................... 63
Apparent Energy Calculation ................................................... 63
Ampere-Hour Accumulation ................................................... 65
Energy-to-Frequency Conversion............................................ 66
Energy Register Scaling............................................................. 66
Energy Measurement Interrupts .............................................. 67
Temperature, Battery, and Supply Voltage Measurements........ 68
Temperature Measurement....................................................... 70
Battery Measurement................................................................. 70
External Voltage Measurement ................................................ 71
8052 MCU Core Architecture....................................................... 73
MCU Registers............................................................................ 73
Basic 8052 Registers................................................................... 75
Standard 8052 SFRs.................................................................... 77
Memory Overview ..................................................................... 77
Addressing Modes...................................................................... 78
Instruction Set ............................................................................ 80
Read-Modify-Write Instructions ............................................. 82
Instructions That Affect Flags .................................................. 82
Dual Data Pointers ......................................................................... 84
Interrupt System ............................................................................. 85
Standard 8052 Interrupt Architecture..................................... 85
Interrupt Architecture ............................................................... 85
Interrupt Registers...................................................................... 85
Interrupt Priority........................................................................ 86
Interrupt Flags ............................................................................ 87
Interrupt Vectors ........................................................................ 89
Interrupt Latency........................................................................ 89
Context Saving............................................................................ 89
Watchdog Timer............................................................................. 90
LCD Driver...................................................................................... 92
LCD Registers ............................................................................. 92
Energy Measurement Features........................................................ 1
Microprocessor Features.................................................................. 1
Revision History ............................................................................... 3
General Description......................................................................... 4
Functional Block Diagram .............................................................. 4
Specifications..................................................................................... 5
Energy Metering........................................................................... 5
Analog Peripherals ....................................................................... 6
Digital Interface............................................................................ 7
Timing Specifications .................................................................. 9
Absolute Maximum Ratings.......................................................... 14
Thermal Resistance .................................................................... 14
ESD Caution................................................................................ 14
Pin Configuration and Function Descriptions........................... 15
Typical Performance Characteristics ........................................... 17
Terminology .................................................................................... 21
Special Function Register (SFR) Mapping .................................. 22
Power Management........................................................................ 24
Power Management Register Details....................................... 24
Power Supply Architecture........................................................ 27
Battery Switchover...................................................................... 27
Power Supply Management (PSM) Interrupt ......................... 27
Using the Power Supply Features ............................................. 29
Operating Modes............................................................................ 32
PSM0 (Normal Mode) ............................................................... 32
PSM1 (Battery Mode) ................................................................ 32
PSM2 (Sleep Mode).................................................................... 32
3.3 V Peripherals and Wake-Up Events................................... 33
Transitioning Between Operating Modes ............................... 34
Using the Power Management Features .................................. 34
Energy Measurement ..................................................................... 35
Access to Energy Measurement SFRs...................................... 35
Access to Internal Energy Measurement Registers................ 35
Energy Measurement Registers ................................................ 37
Energy Measurement Internal Register Details..................... 38
Interrupt Status/Enable SFRs.................................................... 41
Analog Inputs.............................................................................. 42
Analog-to-Digital Conversion.................................................. 43
Fault Detection ........................................................................... 46
Rev. 0 | Page 2 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
LCD Setup....................................................................................95
LCD Timing and Waveforms ....................................................95
Blink Mode...................................................................................96
Scrolling Mode ............................................................................96
Display Element Control............................................................96
Voltage Generation .....................................................................97
LCD External Circuitry..............................................................97
LCD Function in PSM2..............................................................98
Flash Memory..................................................................................99
Flash Memory Overview............................................................99
Flash Memory Organization......................................................99
Using the Flash Memory......................................................... 100
Protecting the Flash Memory................................................. 103
In Circuit Programming ......................................................... 105
Timers............................................................................................ 106
Timer Registers......................................................................... 106
Timer 0 and Timer 1................................................................ 108
Timer 2 ...................................................................................... 109
PLL ................................................................................................. 111
PLL Registers ............................................................................ 111
Real-Time Clock (RTC) .............................................................. 112
Access to RTC SFRs ................................................................. 112
Access to Internal RTC Registers........................................... 112
RTC SFRs .................................................................................. 113
RTC Registers ........................................................................... 116
RTC Calendar........................................................................... 117
RTC Interrupts ......................................................................... 118
RTC Crystal Compensation.................................................... 119
UART Serial Interface.................................................................. 120
UART SFRs ............................................................................... 120
UART Operation Modes..........................................................123
UART Baud Rate Generation..................................................124
UART Additional Features ......................................................126
UART2 Serial Interface.................................................................127
UART2 SFRs ..............................................................................127
UART2 Operation Mode .........................................................129
UART2 Baud Rate Generation................................................129
UART2 Additional Features ....................................................130
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)..................................................131
SPI Registers ..............................................................................131
SPI Pins.......................................................................................134
SPI Master Operating Modes ..................................................135
SPI Interrupt and Status Flags.................................................136
I2C-Compatible Interface.............................................................137
Serial Clock Generation...........................................................137
Slave Addresses..........................................................................137
I2C Registers...............................................................................137
Read and Write Operations .....................................................138
I2C Receive and Transmit FIFOs.............................................139
I/O Ports.........................................................................................140
Parallel I/O.................................................................................140
I/O Registers ..............................................................................141
Port 0...........................................................................................144
Port 1...........................................................................................144
Port 2...........................................................................................144
Determining the Version of the ADE5166/ADE5169..............145
Outline Dimensions......................................................................146
Ordering Guide .........................................................................146
REVISION HISTORY
10/08—Revision 0: Initial Version
Rev. 0 | Page 3 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The ADE5166/ADE51691 integrate the Analog Devices, Inc.,
energy (ADE) metering IC analog front end and fixed function
DSP solution with an enhanced 8052 MCU core, a full RTC, an
LCD driver, and all the peripherals to make an electronic energy
meter with an LCD display in a single part.
The microprocessor functionality includes a single-cycle 8052 core,
a full RTC with a power supply backup pin, an SPI or I2C®
interface, and two independent UART interfaces. The ready-to-
use information from the ADE core reduces the requirement for
program memory size, making it easy to integrate complicated
design into 62 kB of flash memory.
The ADE measurement core includes active, reactive, and apparent
energy calculations, as well as voltage and current rms measure-
ments. This information is accessible for energy billing by using the
built-in energy scalars. Many power line supervisory features such
as SAG, peak, and zero crossing are included in the energy
measurement DSP to simplify energy meter design.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 include a 104-segment LCD driver with
the capability to store up to four LCD screens in memory. This
driver generates voltages capable of driving LCDs up to 5 V.
1 Patents pending.
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
57
43 42
38 39 40 41
39 38
7
6
45 11 43 42 41 40 39 38
37 36
5
6
7
8
9 10
12
13
14
44
P2.0/FP18
P2.1/FP17
2
SPI/I C
3 × 16-BIT
COUNTER
TIMERS
ADE5166/ADE5169
P2.2/FP16
SERIAL
INTERFACE
P2.3 (SDEN/P2.3/TxD2)
1.20V
REF
19 LCDVP1
16 LCDVP2
18 LCDVA
17 LCDVB
15 LCDVC
+
52
53
I
I
PA
PGA1
ADC
ADC
ADC
–
3V/5V LCD
CHARGE PUMP
I
N
+
ENERGY
PGA1
MEASUREMENT
DSP
4
COM0
...
COM3
–
55
PB
1
+
104-SEGMENT
LCD DRIVER
49
50
V
P
PGA2
FP0
...
35
–
V
N
SINGLE
CYCLE
8052
PROGRAM MEMORY
62kB FLASH
WATCHDOG
TIMER
20 FP15
14 FP16
13 FP17
12 FP18
11 FP19
10 FP20
63
54
DGND
AGND
MCU
USER RAM
256 BYTES
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
ADC
USER XRAM
2kB
UART2
TIMER
BATTERY
ADC
V
58
BAT
9
8
7
6
5
FP21
FP22
FP23
FP24
FP25
FP27
FP28
VSW
ADC
PLL
DOWNLOADER
DEBUGGER
POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL AND
MONITORING
UART2
SERIAL
PORT
POR
LDO
UART
SERIAL
PORT
UART
TIMER
RTC
OSC
LDO
1
2
64
60
61
62
59
56
51
37
44
38
47
46
48
45
36
Figure 1.
Rev. 0 | Page 4 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
SPECIFICATIONS
VDD = 3.3 V 5%, AGND = DGND = 0 V, on-chip reference XTALx = 32.768 kHz, TMIN to TMAX = −40°C to +85°C, unless otherwise noted.
ENERGY METERING
Table 2.
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions/Comments
MEASUREMENT ACCURACY1
Phase Error Between Channels
PF = 0.8 Capacitive
0.05
0.05
0.1
Degrees
Degrees
% of reading
Phase lead: 37°
Phase lag: 60°
Over a dynamic range of 1000 to 1 @ 25°C
VDD = 3.3 V + 100 mV rms/120 Hz
IPx = VP = 100 mV rms
PF = 0.5 Inductive
Active Energy Measurement Error2
AC Power Supply Rejection2
Output Frequency Variation
DC Power Supply Rejection2
Output Frequency Variation
Active Energy Measurement Bandwidth1
Reactive Energy Measurement Error2
Vrms Measurement Error2
Vrms Measurement Bandwidth1
Irms Measurement Error2
0.01
%
VDD = 3.3 V 117 mV dc
0.01
8
%
kHz
0.5
0.5
3.9
0.5
3.9
% of reading
% of reading
kHz
% of reading
kHz
Over a dynamic range of 1000 to 1 @ 25°C
Over a dynamic range of 100 to 1 @ 25°C
Over a dynamic range of 500 to 1 @ 25°C
Irms Measurement Bandwidth1
ANALOG INPUTS
Maximum Signal Levels
500
500
mV peak
mV peak
kΩ
VP − VN differential input
IPA − IN and IPB − IN differential inputs
Input Impedance (DC)
ADC Offset Error2
770
10
1
mV
mV
PGA1 = PGA2 = 1
PGA1 = 16
Gain Error2
Current Channel
Voltage Channel
Gain Error Match
3
3
0.2
%
%
%
IPA = IPB = 0.5 V dc
VP − VN = 0.5 V dc
CF1 AND CF2 PULSE OUTPUT
Maximum Output Frequency
Duty Cycle
Active High Pulse Width
FAULT DETECTION
21.6
50
90
kHz
%
ms
VP − VN = 500 mV peak, IPA − IN = 500 mV
If CF1 or CF2 frequency, >5.55 Hz
If CF1 or CF2 frequency, <5.55 Hz
Fault Detection Threshold
Inactive Input ≠ Active Input
Input Swap Threshold
Inactive Input > Active Input
Accuracy Fault Mode Operation
IPA Active, IPB = AGND
IPB Active, IPA = AGND
Fault Detection Delay
Swap Delay
6.25
6.25
%, of active
% of active
IPA or IPB active
IPA or IPB active
0.1
0.1
3
% of reading
% of reading
Seconds
Over a dynamic range of 500 to 1
Over a dynamic range of 500 to 1
3
Seconds
1 These specifications are not production tested but are guaranteed by design and/or characterization data on production release.
2 See the Terminology section for definition.
Rev. 0 | Page 5 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
ANALOG PERIPHERALS
Table 3.
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions/Comments
INTERNAL ADCs (BATTERY, TEMPERATURE, VDCIN
Power Supply Operating Range
No Missing Codes1
)
2.4
8
3.7
V
Bits
μs
Measured on VSWOUT
Conversion Delay2
38
ADC Gain
VDCIN Measurement
VBAT Measurement
Temperature Measurement
ADC Offset
15.3
14.6
0.83
mV/LSB
mV/LSB
°C/LSB
VDCIN Measurement at 3 V
VBAT Measurement at 3.7 V
Temperature Measurement at 25°C
VDCIN Analog Input
200
246
123
LSB
LSB
LSB
Maximum Signal Levels
Input Impedance (DC)
Low VDCIN Detection Threshold
POWER-ON RESET (POR)
VDD POR
0
1
1.09
3.3
V
MΩ
V
1.2
1.27
Detection Threshold
POR Active Timeout Period
VSWOUT POR
Detection Threshold
POR Active Timeout Period
VINTD POR
Detection Threshold
POR Active Timeout Period
VINTA POR
Detection Threshold
POR Active Timeout Period
BATTERY SWITCH OVER
2.5
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.95
2.2
V
ms
33
V
ms
20
2.25
2.25
V
ms
16
V
ms
120
Voltage Operating Range (VSWOUT
VDD to VBAT Switching
)
2.4
2.5
3.7
V
Switching Threshold (VDD
)
2.95
V
Switching Delay
10
30
ns
ms
When VDD to VBAT switch activated by VDD
When VDD to VBAT switch activated by VDCIN
VBAT to VDD Switching
Switching Threshold (VDD
Switching Delay
VSWOUT To VBAT Leakage Current
LCD, CHARGE PUMP ACTIVE
)
2.5
2.95
V
ms
nA
30
10
Based on VDD > 2.75 V
VBAT = 0 V, VSWOUT = 3.43 V, TA = 25°C
Charge Pump Capacitance Between
LCDVP1 and LCDVP2
100
nF
LCDVA, LCDVB, LCDVC Decoupling Capacitance 470
nF
V
LCDVA
0
1.9
LCDVB
0
3.8
V
1/3 bias mode
LCDVC
0
5.8
V
1/3 bias mode
V1 Segment Line Voltage
V2 Segment Line Voltage
V3 Segment Line Voltage
DC Voltage Across Segment and COMx Pin
LCDVA − 0.1
LCDVB − 0.1
LCDVC − 0.1
LCDVA
LCDVB
LCDVC
50
V
V
V
mV
Current on segment line = −2 μA
Current on segment line = −2 μA
Current on segment line = −2 μA
LCDVC − LCDVB, LCDVC − LCDVA, or
LCDVB − LCDVA
Rev. 0 | Page 6 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions/Comments
LCD, RESISTOR LADDER ACTIVE
Leakage Current
20
nA
V
V
1/2 and 1/3 bias modes, no load
Current on segment line = −2 μA
Current on segment line = −2 μA
Current on segment line = −2 μA
Nominal 1.2035 V
V1 Segment Line Voltage
V2 Segment Line Voltage
V3 Segment Line Voltage
ON-CHIP REFERENCE
Reference Error
LCDVA − 0.1
LCDVB − 0.1
LCDVC − 0.1
LCDVA
LCDVB
LCDVC
V
−2.2
+2.2
50
mV
dB
ppm/°C
TA = 25°C, Fcore = 1.024 MHz
Power Supply Rejection
Temperature Coefficient1
80
10
Fcore = 1.024 MHz
1 These specifications are not production tested but are guaranteed by design and/or characterization data on production release.
2 Delay between ADC conversion request and interrupt set.
DIGITAL INTERFACE
Table 4.
Parameter
LOGIC INPUTS1
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions/Comments
All Inputs Except XTAL1, XTAL2, BCTRL, INT0,
INT1, RESET
Input High Voltage, VINH
Input Low Voltage, VINL
BCTRL, INT0, INT1, RESET
Input High Voltage, VINH
Input Low Voltage, VINL
Input Currents
2.0
1.3
V
V
0.8
0.8
V
V
RESET
100
100
nA
nA
RESET = VSWOUT = 3.3 V
Port 0, Port 1, Port 2
Internal pull-up disabled, input = 0 V or
VSWOUT
−3.75
−8.5
μA
pF
Internal pull-up enabled, input = 0 V,
V
SWOUT = 3.3 V
Input Capacitance
FLASH MEMORY
10
All digital inputs
Endurance2
Data Retention3
20,000
20
Cycles
Years
TJ = 85°C
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR4
Crystal Equivalent Series Resistance
Crystal Frequency
XTAL1 Input Capacitance
XTAL2 Output Capacitance
30
32
50
kΩ
kHz
pF
32.768 33.5
12
12
pF
MCU CLOCK RATE (fCORE
)
4.096
32
MHz
kHz
Crystal = 32.768 kHz and CD[2:0] = 0
Crystal = 32.768 kHz and CD[2:0] = 0b111
LOGIC OUTPUTS
Output High Voltage, VOH
ISOURCE
Output Low Voltage, VOL
2.4
V
μA
V
VDD = 3.3 V 5%
VDD = 3.3 V 5%
80
0.4
2
5
ISINK
mA
START-UP TIME6
PSM0 Power-On Time
From Power Saving Mode 1 (PSM1)
PSM1 to PSM0
880
130
ms
ms
VDD at 2.75 V to PSM0 code execution
VDD at 2.75 V to PSM0 code execution
From Power Saving Mode 2 (PSM2)
PSM2 to PSM1
48
ms
ms
Wake-up event to PSM1 code execution
VDD at 2.75 V to PSM0 code execution
186
PSM2 to PSM0
Rev. 0 | Page 7 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions/Comments
POWER SUPPLY INPUTS
VDD
VBAT
3.13
2.4
3.3
3.3
3.46
3.7
V
V
INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY SWITCH (VSWOUT
VBAT to VSWOUT On Resistance
VDD to VSWOUT On Resistance
)
12
9
Ω
Ω
VBAT = 2.4 V
VDD = 3.13 V
40
18
ns
μs
mA
V
BAT to/from VDD Switching Open Time
BCTRL State Change and Switch Delay
VSWOUT Output Current Drive
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS
VINTA
6
2.3
2.3
2.70
2.70
V
V
VINTD
VINTA Power Supply Rejection
VINTD Power Supply Rejection
POWER SUPPLY CURRENTS
Current in Normal Mode (PSM0)
60
50
dB
dB
4.4
2.2
1.6
3
5.3
mA
mA
mA
mA
fCORE = 4.096 MHz, LCD and meter active
fCORE = 1.024 MHz, LCD and meter active
fCORE = 32.768 kHz, LCD and meter active
fCORE = 4.096 MHz, metering ADC and DSP
powered down
3.9
Current in PSM1
Current in PSM2
3.3
1
38
5.05
mA
mA
μA
fCORE = 4.096 MHz, LCD active, VBAT = 3.7 V
fCORE = 1.024 MHz, LCD active
LCD active with charge pump at 3.3 V + RTC,
VBAT = 3.3 V
1.7
μA
RTC only, TA = 25°C, VBAT = 3.3 V
1 Specifications guaranteed by design.
2 Endurance is qualified as per JEDEC Standard 22 Method A117 and measured at −40°C, +25°C, +85°C, and +125°C.
3 Retention lifetime equivalent at junction temperature (TJ) = 85°C as per JEDEC Standard 22 Method A117. Retention lifetime derates with junction temperature.
4 Recommended crystal specifications.
5 Test carried out with all the I/Os set to a low output level.
6 Delay between power supply valid and execution of first instruction by 8052 core.
Rev. 0 | Page 8 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
For timing purposes, a port pin is no longer floating when a
100 mV change from load voltage occurs. A port pin begins to
float when a 100 mV change from the loaded VOH/VOL level
occurs, as shown in Figure 2.
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
AC inputs during testing were driven at VSWOUT − 0.5 V for Logic 1
and at 0.45 V for Logic 0. Timing measurements were made at VIH
minimum for Logic 1 and at VIL maximum for Logic 0, as shown in
Figure 2.
CLOAD for all outputs = 80 pF, unless otherwise noted. VDD = 2.7 V
to 3.6 V; all specifications TMIN to TMAX, unless otherwise noted.
V
– 0.5V
0.45V
SWOUT
V
– 0.1V
+ 0.1V
V
– 0.1V
– 0.1V
LOAD
LOAD
0.2V
+ 0.9V
SWOUT
TEST POINTS
0.2V – 0.1V
TIMING
REFERENCE
POINTS
V
V
LOAD
LOAD
SWOUT
V
V
LOAD
LOAD
Figure 2. Timing Waveform Characteristics
Table 5. Clock Input (External Clock Driven XTAL1) Parameter
32.768 kHz External Crystal
Parameter
tCK
tCKL
tCKH
tCKR
Description
Min
Typ
30.52
6.26
6.26
9
Max
Unit
μs
μs
μs
ns
XTAL1 period
XTAL1 width low
XTAL1 width high
XTAL1 rise time
XTAL1 fall time
Core clock frequency1
tCKF
1/tCORE
9
ns
MHz
1.024
1 The ADE5166/ADE5169 internal PLL locks onto a multiple (512×) of the 32.768 kHz external crystal frequency to provide a stable 4.096 MHz internal clock for the
system. The core can operate at this frequency or at a binary submultiple defined by the CD[2:0] bits of the POWCON SFR, Address 0xC5 (see Table 25).
Table 6. I2C-Compatible Interface Timing Parameters (400 kHz)
Parameter
Description
Typ
1.3
Unit
μs
μs
μs
μs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tBUF
tL
tH
tSHD
tDSU
tDHD
tRSU
tPSU
tR
Bus-free time between stop condition and start condition
SCLK low pulse width
SCLK high pulse width
Start condition hold time
Data setup time
Data hold time
Setup time for repeated start
Stop condition setup time
Rise time of both SCLK and SDATA
Fall time of both SCLK and SDATA
Pulse width of spike suppressed
1.36
1.14
251.35
740
400
12.5
400
200
300
50
tF
tSUP
1
1 Input filtering on both the SCLK and SDATA inputs suppresses noise spikes of <50 ns.
tBUF
tSUP
tR
SDATA (I/O)
MSB
LSB
ACK
MSB
tF
tDSU
tDSU
tDHD
tDHD
tR
tRSU
tH
tPSU
SCLK (I)
tSHD
1
8
9
1
2 TO 7
tSUP
tL
S(R)
PS
tF
STOP
START
REPEATED
START
CONDITION CONDITION
Figure 3. I2C-Compatible Interface Timing
Rev. 0 | Page 9 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 7. SPI Master Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 1) Parameters
Parameter
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
2SPIR × tCORE
1
1
tSL
tSH
SCLK low pulse width
SCLK high pulse width
Data output valid after SCLK edge
Data input setup time before SCLK edge
Data input hold time after SCLK edge
Data output fall time
Data output rise time
SCLK rise time
SCLK fall time
2SPIR × tCORE
1
tDAV
tDSU
tDHD
tDF
tDR
tSR
3 × tCORE
0
tCORE
1
19
19
19
19
ns
ns
ns
ns
tSF
1 tCORE depends on the clock divider or CD[2:0] bits of the POWCON SFR, Address 0xC5 (see Table 25); tCORE = 2CD/4.096 MHz.
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 0)
tSH
tSL
tSR
tSF
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 1)
tDAV
tDF
tDR
MOSI
MISO
MSB
BITS [6:1]
LSB
LSB IN
MSB IN
BITS [6:1]
tDSU
tDHD
Figure 4. SPI Master Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 1)
Rev. 0 | Page 10 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 8. SPI Master Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 0) Parameters
Parameter
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
2SPIR × tCORE
(SPIR + 1) × tCORE
(SPIR + 1) × tCORE
1
1
1
tSL
tSH
SCLK low pulse width
SCLK high pulse width
2SPIR × tCORE
1
1
tDAV
tDOSU
tDSU
tDHD
tDF
tDR
tSR
tSF
Data output valid after SCLK edge
Data output setup before SCLK edge
Data input setup time before SCLK edge
Data input hold time after SCLK edge
Data output fall time
Data output rise time
SCLK rise time
SCLK fall time
3 × tCORE
75
0
tCORE
1
19
19
19
19
1 tCORE depends on the clock divider or CD[2:0] bits of the POWCON SFR, Address 0xC5 (see Table 25); tCORE = 2CD/4.096 MHz.
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 0)
tSH
tSL
tSR
tSF
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 1)
tDAV
tDOSU
tDF
tDR
MOSI
MISO
MSB
BITS [6:1]
LSB
LSB IN
MSB IN
BITS [6:1]
tDSU tDHD
Figure 5. SPI Master Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 0)
Rev. 0 | Page 11 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 9. SPI Slave Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 1) Parameters
Parameter
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
tSS
SS to SCLK edge
145
ns
1
1
tSL
tSH
SCLK low pulse width
SCLK high pulse width
Data output valid after SCLK edge
Data input setup time before SCLK edge
Data input hold time after SCLK edge
Data output fall time
Data output rise time
SCLK rise time
SCLK fall time
SS high after SCLK edge
6 × tCORE
6 × tCORE
ns
ns
ns
ns
μs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tDAV
tDSU
tDHD
tDF
tDR
tSR
25
0
2 × tCORE1 + 0.5 μs
19
19
19
19
tSF
tSFS
0
1 tCORE depends on the clock divider or CD[2:0] bits of the POWCON SFR, Address 0xC5 (see Table 25); tCORE = 2CD/4.096 MHz.
SS
tSFS
tSS
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 0)
tSH
tSL
tSR
tSF
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 1)
tDAV
tDF
tDR
MSB
LSB
BITS [6:1]
MISO
MOSI
MSB IN
BITS [6:1]
LSB IN
tDSU
tDHD
Figure 6. SPI Slave Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 1)
Rev. 0 | Page 12 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 10. SPI Slave Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 0) Parameters
Parameter
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
tSS
SS to SCLK edge
145
ns
1
1
tSL
tSH
tDAV
tDSU
tDHD
tDF
tDR
tSR
tSF
tDOSS
tSFS
SCLK low pulse width
SCLK high pulse width
Data output valid after SCLK edge
Data input setup time before SCLK edge
Data input hold time after SCLK edge
Data output fall time
Data output rise time
SCLK rise time
SCLK fall time
Data output valid after SS edge
SS high after SCLK edge
6 × tCORE
6 × tCORE
ns
ns
ns
ns
μs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
25
0
2 × tCORE1+ 0.5 μs
19
19
19
19
0
0
1 tCORE depends on the clock divider or CD[2:0] bits of the POWCON SFR, Address 0xC5 (see Table 25); tCORE = 2CD/4.096 MHz.
SS
tSFS
tSS
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 0)
tSH
tSL
tSR
tSF
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 1)
tDAV
tDOSS
tDF
tDR
MSB
BITS [6:1]
LSB
MISO
MOSI
BITS [6:1]
LSB IN
MSB IN
tDSU
tDHD
Figure 7. SPI Slave Mode Timing (SPICPHA = 0)
Rev. 0 | Page 13 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
TA = 25°C, unless otherwise noted.
Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings
may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress
rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any
other conditions above those indicated in the operational
section of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Table 11.
Parameter
Rating
VDD to DGND
VBAT to DGND
VDCIN to DGND
Input LCD Voltage to AGND, LCDVA,
LCDVB, LCDVC1
−0.3 V to +3.7 V
−0.3 V to +3.7 V
−0.3 V to VSWOUT + 0.3 V
−0.3 V to VSWOUT + 0.3 V
THERMAL RESISTANCE
Analog Input Voltage to AGND, VP, VN, IPA, −2 V to +2 V
and IN
θJA is specified for the worst-case conditions, that is, a device
soldered in a circuit board for surface-mount packages.
Digital Input Voltage to DGND
−0.3 V to VSWOUT + 0.3 V
Table 12. Thermal Resistance
Package Type
64-Lead LQFP
Digital Output Voltage to DGND
Operating Temperature Range (Industrial)
Storage Temperature Range
−0.3V to VSWOUT + 0.3 V
−40°C to +85°C
−65°C to +150°C
θJA
θJC
Unit
60
20.5
°C/W
64-Lead LQFP, Power Dissipation
Lead Temperature (Soldering, 30 sec)
1 When used with external resistor divider.
300°C
ESD CAUTION
Rev. 0 | Page 14 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
1
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
COM3/FP27
INT0
PIN 1
2
3
COM2/FP28
COM1
XTAL1
XTAL2
4
COM0
BCTRL/INT1/P0.0
SDEN/P2.3/TxD2
P0.2/CF1/RTCCAL
P0.3/CF2
5
P1.2/FP25/ZX
P1.3/T2EX/FP24
P1.4/T2/FP23
P1.5/FP22
P1.6/FP21
P1.7/FP20
P0.1/FP19
P2.0/FP18
P2.1/FP17
P2.2/FP16
LCDVC
6
7
ADE5166/ADE5169
8
P0.4/MOSI/SDATA
P0.5/MISO/ZX
P0.6/SCLK/T0
P0.7/SS/T1/RxD2
P1.0/RxD
TOP VIEW
(Not to Scale)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P1.1/TxD
FP0
FP1
LCDVP2
FP2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Figure 8. Pin Configuration
Table 13. Pin Function Descriptions
Pin No. Mnemonic Description
1
2
3
COM3/FP27
COM2/FP28
COM1
Common Output 3/LCD Segment Output 27. COM3 is used for the LCD backplane.
Common Output 2/LCD Segment Output 28. COM2 is used for the LCD backplane.
Common Output 1. COM1 is used for the LCD backplane.
4
COM0
Common Output 0. COM0 is used for the LCD backplane.
5
6
7
8
P1.2/FP25/ZX
P1.3/T2EX/FP24
P1.4/T2/FP23
P1.5/FP22
P1.6/FP21
P1.7/FP20
P0.1/FP19
P2.0/FP18
P2.1/FP17
P2.2/FP16
LCDVC
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.2/LCD Segment Output 25/ZX Output.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.3/Timer 2 Control Input/LCD Segment Output 24.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.4/Timer 2 Input/LCD Segment Output 23.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.5/LCD Segment Output 22.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.6/LCD Segment Output 21.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.7/LCD Segment Output 20.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.1/LCD Segment Output 19.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 2.0/LCD Segment Output 18.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 2.1/LCD Segment Output 17.
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 2.2/LCD Segment Output 16.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Output Port for LCD Levels. This pin should be decoupled with a 470 nF capacitor.
Analog Output. A 100 nF capacitor should be connected between this pin and LCDVP1 for the internal LCD
charge pump device.
LCDVP2
17, 18
19
LCDVB, LCDVA
LCDVP1
Output Port for LCD Levels. These pins should be decoupled with a 470 nF capacitor.
Analog Output. A 100 nF capacitor should be connected between this pin and LCDVP2 for the internal LCD
charge pump device.
20 to 35 FP15 to FP0
LCD Segment Output 0 to LCD Segment Output 15.
36
37
38
P1.1/TxD
P1.0/RxD
P0.7/SS/T1/RxD2
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.1/Transmitter Data Output (Asynchronous).
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 1.0/Receiver Data Input (Asynchronous).
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.7/Slave Select When SPI Is in Slave Mode/Timer 1 Input/Receive Data
Input 2 (Asynchronous).
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.6/Clock Output for I2C or SPI Port/Timer 0 Input.
39
40
41
P0.6/SCLK/T0
P0.5/MISO/ZX
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.5/Data Input for SPI Port/ZX Output.
P0.4/MOSI/SDATA General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.4/Data Output for SPI Port/I2C-Compatible Data Line.
Rev. 0 | Page 15 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Pin No. Mnemonic
Description
42
P0.3/CF2
General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.3/Calibration Frequency Logic Output 2. The CF2 logic output gives
instantaneous active, reactive, Irms, or apparent power information.
43
P0.2/CF1/RTCCAL General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.2/Calibration Frequency Logic Output 1/RTC Calibration Frequency Logic
Output. The CF1 logic output gives instantaneous active, reactive, or apparent power or Irms, information. The
RTCCAL logic output gives access to the calibrated RTC output.
44
SDEN/P2.3/TxD2
Serial Download Mode Enable/General-Purpose Digital Output Port P2.3/Transmitter Data Output 2
(Asynchronous). This pin is used to enable serial download mode through a resistor when pulled low on
power-up or reset. On reset, this pin momentarily becomes an input, and the status of the pin is sampled. If
there is no pull-down resistor in place, the pin momentarily goes high and then user code is executed. If the
pin is pulled down on reset, the embedded serial download/debug kernel executes, and this pin remains
low during the internal program execution. After reset, this pin can be used as a digital output port pin (P2.3)
or as Transmitter Data Output 2 (asynchronous).
45
46
47
BCTRL/INT1/P0.0
XTAL2
Digital Input for Battery Control/External Interrupt Input 1/General-Purpose Digital I/O Port 0.0. This logic
input connects VDD or VBAT to VSWOUT internally when set to logic high or logic low, respectively. When left
open, the connection between VDD or VBAT and VSWOUT is selected internally.
A crystal can be connected across this pin and XTAL1 (see XTAL1 pin description) to provide a clock source
for the ADE5166/ADE5169. The XTAL2 pin can drive one CMOS load when an external clock is supplied at
XTAL1 or by the gate oscillator circuit. An internal 6 pF capacitor is connected to this pin.
An external clock can be provided at this logic input. Alternatively, a tuning fork crystal can be connected
across XTAL1 and XTAL2 to provide a clock source for the ADE5166/ADE5169. The clock frequency for
specified operation is 32.768 kHz. An internal 6 pF capacitor is connected to this pin.
XTAL1
48
INT0
External Interrupt Input 0.
49, 50
VP, VN
Analog Inputs for Voltage Channel. These inputs are fully differential voltage inputs with a maximum
differential level of 400 mV for specified operation. This channel also has an internal PGA.
51
EA
This pin is used as an input for emulation. When held high, this input enables the device to fetch code from
internal program memory locations. The ADE5169 does not support external code memory. This pin should
not be left floating.
52, 53
IPA, IN
Analog Inputs for Current Channel. These inputs are fully differential voltage inputs with a maximum
differential level of 400 mV for specified operation. This channel also has an internal PGA.
54
55
AGND
IPB
This pin provides the ground reference for the analog circuitry.
Analog Input for Second Current Channel. This input is fully differential with a maximum differential level of
400 mV, referred to IN for specified operation. This channel also has an internal PGA.
56
57
RESET
Reset Input, Active Low.
REFIN/OUT
This pin provides access to the on-chip voltage reference. The on-chip reference has a nominal value of
1.2 V 0.1% and a typical temperature coefficient of 50 ppm/°C maximum. This pin should be decoupled
with a 1 μF capacitor in parallel with a ceramic 100 nF capacitor.
58
59
60
VBAT
VINTA
VDD
Power Supply Input from the Battery with a 2.4 V to 3.7 V Range. This pin is connected internally to VDD when
the battery is selected as the power supply for the ADE5166/ADE5169.
This pin provides access to the on-chip 2.5 V analog LDO. No external active circuitry should be connected to
this pin. This pin should be decoupled with a 10 μF capacitor in parallel with a ceramic 100 nF capacitor.
3.3 V Power Supply Input from the Regulator. This pin is connected internally to VSWOUT when the regulator is
selected as the power supply for the ADE5166/ADE5169. This pin should be decoupled with a 10 μF
capacitor in parallel with a ceramic 100 nF capacitor.
61
62
VSWOUT
3.3 V Power Supply Output. This pin provides the supply voltage for the LDOs and internal circuitry of the
ADE5166/ADE5169. This pin should be decoupled with a 10 μF capacitor in parallel with a ceramic 100 nF
capacitor.
This pin provides access to the on-chip 2.5 V digital LDO. No external active circuitry should be connected to
this pin. This pin should be decoupled with a 10 μF capacitor in parallel with a ceramic 100 nF capacitor.
VINTD
63
64
DGND
VDCIN
This pin provides the ground reference for the digital circuitry.
Analog Input for DC Voltage Monitoring. The maximum input voltage on this pin is VSWOUT with respect to
AGND. This pin is used to monitor the preregulated dc voltage.
Rev. 0 | Page 16 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
2.0
2.0
1.5
GAIN = 1
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
MID CLASS C
GAIN = 1
1.5
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
+85°C; PF = 0
–40°C; PF = 0.866
+25°C; PF = 1
+85°C; PF = 1
+25°C; PF = 0
0
0
–40°C ; PF = 1
–0.5
–40°C; PF = 0
+25°C; PF = 0.866
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
–1.0
–1.5
MID CLASS C
–2.0
0.1
1
10
100
0.1
1
10
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 9. Active Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1) over
Temperature with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 12. Reactive Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
1.5
2.0
GAIN = 1
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
MID CLASS C
GAIN = 1
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.5
1.0
1.0
MID CLASS C
–40°C; PF = 0.5
0.5
+85°C; PF = 1
0.5
0
+85°C; PF = 0.5
–40°C; PF = 1
+85°C; PF = 1
–40°C; PF = 1
0
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
+25°C; PF = 1
+25°C; PF = 0.5
+25°C; PF = 1
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
MID CLASS C
MID CLASS C
10
0.1
1
10
100
0.1
1
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 10. Active Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 13. Current RMS Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1) over
Temperature with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
2.0
2.0
GAIN = 1
MID CLASS C
GAIN = 1
INTEGRATOR OFF
1.5
1.5
1.0
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.0
–40°C; PF = 0.5
0.5
0.5
+85°C; PF = 1
+85°C; PF = 0
+25°C; PF = 0
–40°C; PF = 1
+85°C; PF = 0.5
0
0
+25°C; PF = 0.5
–40°C; PF = 0
–0.5
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
+25°C; PF = 1
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
MID CLASS C
10
0.1
1
10
100
0.1
1
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 11. Reactive Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1) over
Temperature with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 14. Current RMS Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Rev. 0 | Page 17 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
0.5
1.5
1.0
GAIN = 8
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
GAIN = 1
INTEGRATOR OFF
0.4
0.3
INTERNAL REFERENCE
MID CLASS C
0.2
V
; 3.3V
0.5
RMS
I
; 3.13V
RMS
V
; 3.43V
; 3.13V
RMS
RMS
PF = +1
0.1
I
; 3.3V
RMS
0
0
V
PF = +0.5
–0.1
–0.2
–0.3
–0.4
–0.5
I
; 3.43V
PF = –0.5
RMS
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
MID CLASS C
0.1
1
10
100
0.1
1
10
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 15. Voltage and Current RMS Error as a Percentage of Reading
(Gain = 1) over Power Supply with Internal Reference
Figure 18. Active Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 8) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
1.0
1.0
GAIN = 1
GAIN = 8
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTEGRATOR OFF
0.8
0.8
INTERNAL REFERENCE
INTERNAL REFERENCE
0.6
0.6
0.4
MID CLASS B
0.4
PF = 1
0.2
0.2
0
PF = +0.866
PF = 0
PF = 0.5
0
–0.2
–0.4
–0.2
–0.4
–0.6
–0.8
–1.0
PF = –0.866
MID CLASS B
–0.6
–0.8
–1.0
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
0.1
1
10
100
LINE FREQUENCY (Hz)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 16. Active Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1) over
Frequency with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 19. Reactive Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 8) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
0.5
1.5
GAIN = 1
GAIN = 8
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
INTEGRATOR OFF
0.4
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.0
0.3
0.2
MID CLASS C
0.5
VAR; 3.43V
W; 3.13V
W; 3.43V
VAR; 3.13V
PF = +0.5
PF = 1
0.1
0
0
VAR; 3.3V
W; 3.3V
–0.1
–0.2
–0.3
–0.4
–0.5
PF = –0.5
–0.5
MID CLASS C
–1.0
–1.5
0.1
1
10
100
0.1
1
10
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 17. Active and Reactive Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 1)
over Power Supply with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 20. Current RMS Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 8) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Rev. 0 | Page 18 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.8
GAIN = 16
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
MID CLASS C
GAIN = 16
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
0.6
+85°C; PF = 0.866
+85°C; PF = 0
–40°C; PF = 0.866
–40°C; PF = 0
1.0
0.4
0.5
+85°C; PF = 1
+25°C; PF = 1
0.2
0
0
+25°C; PF = 0.866
+25°C; PF = 0
–0.2
–0.4
–0.6
–0.8
–1.0
–40°C; PF = 1
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
MID CLASS C
10
0.1
1
100
0.1
1
10
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 21. Active Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Temperature with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 24. Reactive Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
2.0
2.0
MID CLASS C
GAIN = 16
MID CLASS C
GAIN = 16
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTEGRATOR OFF
1.5
1.5
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.0
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.0
+25°C
;
PF = 1
+85°C; PF = 1
0.5
0
–40°C; PF = 0.5
0.5
+85°C
; PF = 1
0
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
–40°C
;
PF = 1
+85°C
–40°C
;
PF = 1
+25°C; PF = 0.5
;
PF = 0.5
+25°C PF = 1
;
MID CLASS C
10
MID CLASS C
0.1
1
100
0.1
1
10
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 22. Active Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 25. Current RMS Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Temperature with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
1.0
2.0
GAIN = 16
MID CLASS C
INTEGRATOR OFF
GAIN = 16
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
0.8
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.5
1.0
0.6
+85°C
;
PF = 1
+25°C
–40°C; PF = 0
0.4
0.2
+85°C; PF = 0
0.5
;
PF = 0.5
+85°C; PF = 0.5
0
0
+25°C; PF = 0
–0.2
–0.4
–0.6
–0.8
–1.0
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
–40°C
+25°C PF = 1
; PF = 0.5
; PF = 1
;
–40°C
MID CLASS C
10
0.1
1
10
100
0.1
1
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 23. Reactive Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Temperature with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Figure 26. Current RMS Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator Off
Rev. 0 | Page 19 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
2.0
2.0
1.5
MID CLASS C
MID CLASS C
GAIN = 16
GAIN = 16
INTEGRATOR OFF
INTERNAL REFERENCE
INTEGRATOR OFF
1.5
INTERNAL REFERENCE
1.0
1.0
–40°C
;
PF = 1
PF = 1
0.5
0
0.5
+85°C
;
+85°C; PF = 0.5
+85°C; PF = 1
0
–40°C; PF = 0.5
–40°C; PF = 0.5
–40°C; PF = 1
+25°C; PF = 0.5
+25°C; PF = 1
+85°C; PF = 0.5
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
+25°C; PF = 1
+25°C; PF = 0.5
MID CLASS C
10
MID CLASS C
10
0.1
1
100
0.1
1
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 27. Active Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator On
Figure 29. Current RMS Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator On
1.0
GAIN = 16
INTEGRATOR OFF
0.8
INTERNAL REFERENCE
0.6
+85°C; PF = 0.866
0.4
+85°C; PF = 0
–40°C; PF = 0
0.2
0
+25°C; PF = 0
–40°C; PF = 0.866
–0.2
–0.4
–0.6
–0.8
–1.0
+25°C; PF = 0.866
0.1
1
10
100
CURRENT CHANNEL (% of Full Scale)
Figure 28. Reactive Energy Error as a Percentage of Reading (Gain = 16) over
Power Factor with Internal Reference, Integrator On
Rev. 0 | Page 20 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
TERMINOLOGY
levels when an ac (100 mV rms/120 Hz) signal is introduced onto
the supplies. Any error introduced by this ac signal is expressed
as a percentage of reading (see the Measurement Error definition).
Measurement Error
The error associated with the energy measurement made by the
ADE5166/ADE5169 is defined by the following formula:
For the dc PSR measurement, a reading at nominal supplies
(3.3 V) is taken. A second reading is obtained with the same
input signal levels when the supplies are varied 5%. Any error
introduced is again expressed as a percentage of the reading.
Percentage Errror =
⎛
⎜
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
Energy Register −True Energy
×100%
True Energy
ADC Offset Error
Phase Error Between Channels
ADC offset error is the dc offset associated with the analog
inputs to the ADCs. It means that, with the analog inputs
connected to AGND, the ADCs still see a dc analog input
signal. The magnitude of the offset depends on the gain and
input range selection. However, when HPF1 is switched on,
the offset is removed from the current channel, and the power
calculation is not affected by this offset. The offsets can be
removed by performing an offset calibration (see the Analog
Inputs section).
The digital integrator and the high-pass filter (HPF) in the
current channel have a nonideal phase response. To offset this
phase response and equalize the phase response between
channels, two phase correction networks are placed in the
current channel: one for the digital integrator and the other for
the HPF. The phase correction networks correct the phase
response of the corresponding component and ensure a phase
match between current channel and voltage channel to within
0.1° over a range of 45 Hz to 65 Hz with the digital integrator
off. With the digital integrator on, the phase is corrected to
within 0.4° over a range of 45 Hz to 65 Hz.
Gain Error
Gain error is the difference between the measured ADC output
code (minus the offset) and the ideal output code (see the
Current Channel ADC section and the Voltage Channel ADC
section). It is measured for each of the gain settings on the
current channel (1, 2, 4, 8, and 16). The difference is expressed
as a percentage of the ideal code.
Power Supply Rejection (PSR)
PSR quantifies the ADE5166/ADE5169 measurement error as a
percentage of reading when the power supplies are varied. For
the ac PSR measurement, a reading at nominal supplies (3.3 V)
is taken. A second reading is obtained with the same input signal
Rev. 0 | Page 21 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER (SFR) MAPPING
Table 14. SFR Mapping
Mnemonic Address Description
Mnemonic Address Description
INTPR
0xFF
Interrupt pins configuration SFR (see
Table 16).
Scratch Pad 4 (see Table 24).
Scratch Pad 3 (see Table 23).
Scratch Pad 2 (see Table 22).
Scratch Pad 1 (see Table 21).
Battery detection threshold (see
Table 52).
Peripheral ADC strobe period (see
Table 49).
Power management interrupt flag (see
Table 17).
RTC temperature compensation (see
Table 132).
RTC nominal compensation (see
Table 131).
Battery switchover configuration (see
Table 18).
MIRQENL
ADCGO
TEMPADC
IRMSH
0xD9
0xD8
0xD7
0xD6
0xD5
Interrupt Enable 1 (see Table 43).
Start ADC measurement (see Table 51).
Temperature ADC value (see Table 55).
Irms measurement MSB (see Table 30).
Irms measurement middle byte (see
Table 30).
Irms measurement LSB (see Table 30).
Vrms measurement MSB (see Table 30).
Vrms measurement middle byte (see
Table 30).
Vrms measurement LSB (see Table 30).
Program status word (see Table 57).
Timer 2 high byte (see Table 119).
Timer 2 low byte (see Table 120).
Timer 2 reload/capture high byte (see
Table 121).
SCRATCH4
SCRATCH3
SCRATCH2
SCRATCH1
BATVTH
0xFE
0xFD
0xFC
0xFB
0xFA
IRMSM
IRMSL
VRMSH
VRMSM
0xD4
0xD3
0xD2
STRBPER
IPSMF
0xF9
0xF8
0xF7
0xF6
0xF5
0xF4
0xF3
0xF0
VRMSL
PSW
TH2
TL2
RCAP2H
0xD1
0xD0
0xCD
0xCC
0xCB
TEMPCAL
RTCCOMP
BATPR
RCAP2L
0xCA
Timer 2 reload/capture low byte (see
Table 122).
PERIPH
DIFFPROG
B
VDCINADC 0xEF
SBAUD2
Peripheral configuration (see Table 19).
T2CON
EADRH
EADRL
POWCON
KYREG
WDCON
STCON
EDATA
PROTKY
FLSHKY
ECON
0xC8
0xC7
0xC6
0xC5
0xC1
0xC0
0xBF
0xBC
0xBB
0xBA
0xB9
0xB8
0xB7
0xB4
Timer/Counter 2 control (see Table 114).
Flash high byte address (see Table 109).
Flash low byte address (see Table 108).
Power control (see Table 25).
Key (see Table 125).
Watchdog timer (see Table 87).
Stack boundary (see Table 64).
Flash data (see Table 107).
Flash protection key (see Table 106).
Flash key (see Table 105).
Flash control (see Table 104).
Interrupt priority (see Table 81).
Stack pointer high (see Table 63).
Port 2 weak pull-up enable (see
Table 164).
Port 1 weak pull-up enable (see
Table 163).
Port 0 weak pull-up enable (see
Table 162).
LCD Configuration Y (see Table 93).
Configuration (see Table 65).
LCD data (see Table 99).
Temperature and supply delta (see
Table 50).
Auxiliary math (see Table 56).
VDCIN ADC value (see Table 53).
Enhanced Serial Baud Rate Control 2
(see Table 148).
LCD Segment Enable 2 (see Table 100).
0xEE
LCDSEGE2
IPSME
0xED
0xEC
Power management interrupt enable
(see Table 20).
SBUF2
0xEB
0xEA
0xEA
0xE9
0xE9
0xE8
0xE8
0xE7
0xE6
Serial Port 2 buffer (see Table 147).
SPI interrupt status (see Table 155).
I2C interrupt status (see Table 159).
SPI Configuration SFR 2 (see Table 154).
I2C slave address (see Table 158).
SPI Configuration SFR 1 (see Table 153).
I2C mode (see Table 157).
Selection 2 sample MSB (see Table 30).
Selection 2 sample middle byte (see
Table 30).
Selection 2 sample LSB (see Table 30).
Selection 1 sample MSB (see Table 30).
Selection 1 sample middle byte (see
Table 30).
SPISTAT
SPI2CSTAT
SPIMOD2
I2CADR
SPIMOD1
I2CMOD
WAV2H
IP
SPH
PINMAP2
PINMAP1
PINMAP0
0xB3
0xB2
WAV2M
LCDCONY
CFG
LCDDAT
LCDPTR
IEIP2
0xB1
0xAF
0xAE
0xAC
0xA9
WAV2L
WAV1H
WAV1M
0xE5
0xE4
0xE3
LCD pointer (see Table 98).
Interrupt enable and Priority 2 (see
Table 82).
WAV1L
SCON2
0xE2
0xE1
Selection 1 sample LSB (see Table 30).
Serial communications control (see
Table 146).
IE
0xA8
0xA7
0xA4
0xA3
Interrupt enable (see Table 80).
Data pointer control (see Table 78).
RTC pointer data (see Table 130).
RTC pointer address (see Table 129).
RTC Configuration 2 (see Table 128).
RTC configuration (see Table 127).
Port 2 (see Table 167).
DPCON
RTCDAT
RTCPTR
TIMECON2 0xA2
TIMECON
P2
ACC
0xE0
0xDF
0xDE
0xDD
0xDC
0xDB
0xDA
Accumulator (see Table 56).
BATADC
MIRQSTH
MIRQSTM
MIRQSTL
MIRQENH
MIRQENM
Battery ADC value (see Table 54).
Interrupt Status 3 (see Table 42).
Interrupt Status 2 (see Table 41).
Interrupt Status 1 (see Table 40).
Interrupt Enable 3 (see Table 45).
Interrupt Enable 2 (see Table 44).
0xA1
0xA0
0x9F
EPCFG
Extended port configuration (see
Table 161).
Rev. 0 | Page 22 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Mnemonic Address Description
Mnemonic Address Description
SBAUDT
0x9E
Enhanced serial baud rate control (see
Table 142).
MADDPT
0x91
Energy measurement pointer address
(see Table 29).
SBAUDF
0x9D
UART timer fractional divider (see
Table 143).
LCD Configuration X (see Table 91).
SPI/I2C receive buffer (see Table 152).
SPI/I2C transmit buffer (see Table 151).
Serial port buffer (see Table 141).
Serial communications control (see
Table 140).
LCD segment enable (see Table 97).
LCD clock (see Table 94).
LCD configuration (see Table 90).
Energy measurement pointer data MSB
(see Table 30).
Energy measurement pointer data
middle byte (see Table 30).
Energy measurement pointer data LSB
(see Table 30).
P1
0x90
0x8D
0x8C
0x8B
0x8A
0x89
Port 1 (see Table 166).
TH1
TH0
TL1
TL0
TMOD
Timer 1 high byte (see Table 117).
Timer 0 high byte (see Table 115).
Timer 1 low byte (see Table 118).
Timer 0 low byte (see Table 116).
Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1
mode (see Table 112).
LCDCONX
SPI2CRx
SPI2CTx
SBUF
0x9C
0x9B
0x9A
0x99
0x98
SCON
TCON
0x88
Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1
control (see Table 113).
LCDSEGE
LCDCLK
LCDCON
MDATH
0x97
0x96
0x95
0x94
PCON
DPH
DPL
SP
0x87
0x83
0x82
0x81
0x80
Program control (see Table 58).
Data pointer high (see Table 60).
Data pointer low (see Table 59).
Stack pointer (see Table 62).
Port 0 (see Table 165).
MDATM
MDATL
0x93
0x92
P0
Rev. 0 | Page 23 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
POWER MANAGEMENT
The ADE5166/ADE5169 have elaborate power management
circuitry that manages the regular power supply to battery
switchover and power supply failures.
The power management functionalities can be accessed directly
through the 8052 SFRs (see Table 15).
Table 15. Power Management SFRs
SFR Address
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Mnemonic
Description
0xEC
0xF5
0xF8
0xFF
0xF4
0xC5
0xFB
0xFC
IPSME
BATPR
IPSMF
INTPR
Power management interrupt enable (see Table 20).
Battery switchover configuration (see Table 18).
Power management interrupt flag (see Table 17).
Interrupt pins configuration (see Table 16).
Peripheral configuration (see Table 19).
Power control (see Table 25).
Scratch Pad 1 (see Table 21).
Scratch Pad 2 (see Table 22).
Scratch Pad 3 (see Table 23).
Scratch Pad 4 (see Table 24).
PERIPH
POWCON
SCRATCH1
SCRATCH2
SCRATCH3
SCRATCH4
0xFD
0xFE
POWER MANAGEMENT REGISTER DETAILS
Table 16. Interrupt Pins Configuration SFR (INTPR, Address 0xFF)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
RTCCAL
0
Controls RTC calibration output. When set, the RTC calibration frequency selected by FSEL[1:0] is
output on the P0.2/CF1/RTCCAL pin.
[6:5]
FSEL
00
Sets RTC calibration output frequency and calibration window.
FSEL
00
Result (Calibration Window, Frequency)
30.5 sec, 1 Hz
01
30.5 sec, 512 Hz
10
0.244 sec, 500 Hz
11
0.244 sec, 16 kHz
4
Reserved
INT1PRG
N/A
000
[3:1]
Controls the function of INT1.
INT1PRG
X00
X01
Result
GPIO enabled
BCTRL enabled
INT1 input disabled
INT1 input enabled
01X
11X
0
INT0PRG
0
Controls the function of INT0.
INT0PRG
Result
0
1
INT0 input disabled
INT0 input enabled
Writing to the Interrupt Pins Configuration SFR (INTPR, Address 0xFF)
To protect the RTC from runaway code, a key must be written to the key SFR (KYREG, Address 0xC1) to obtain write access to INTPR.
KYREG (see Table 125) should be set to 0xEA to unlock this SFR and reset to 0 after a timekeeping register is written to. The RTC registers
can be written using the following 8052 assembly code:
MOV
MOV
KYREG, #0EAh
INTPR, #080h
Rev. 0 | Page 24 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 17. Power Management Interrupt Flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8)
Bit
Bit Address Mnemonic Default
Description
Power supply restored interrupt flag. Set when the VDD power supply has been restored.
This occurs when the source of VSWOUT changes from VBAT to VDD
7
0xFF
FPSR
0
.
6
5
4
3
0xFE
0xFD
0xFC
0xFB
FPSM
FSAG
Reserved
FVADC
0
0
0
0
PSM interrupt flag. Set when an enabled PSM interrupt condition occurs.
Voltage SAG interrupt flag. Set when an ADE energy measurement SAG condition occurs.
This bit must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
VDCINADC monitor interrupt flag. Set when VDCIN changes by VDCIN_DIFF or when VDCIN
measurement is ready.
2
0xFA
FBAT
0
VBAT monitor interrupt flag. Set when VBAT falls below BATVTH or when VBAT measurement is
ready.
1
0
0xF9
0xF8
FBSO
FVDCIN
0
0
Battery switchover interrupt flag. Set when VSWOUT switches from VDD to VBAT
VDCIN monitor interrupt flag. Set when VDCIN falls below 1.2 V.
.
Table 18. Battery Switchover Configuration SFR (BATPR, Address 0xF5)
Bit
Mnemonic
Reserved
BATPRG
Default
Description
[7:2]
[1:0]
0
0
These bits must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
Control bits for battery switchover.
BATPRG
Result
00
01
1X
Battery switchover enabled on low VDD
Battery switchover enabled on low VDD and low VDCIN
Battery switchover disabled
Table 19. Peripheral Configuration SFR (PERIPH, Address 0xF4)
Bit
Mnemonic
RX2FLAG
VSWSOURCE
VDD_OK
Default
Description
7
0
1
1
0
If set, indicates that an RxD2 edge event triggered wake-up from PSM2.
6
Indicates the power supply that is internally connected to VSWOUT (0 VSWOUT = VBAT, 1 VSWOUT = VDD).
If set, indicates that VDD power supply is ready for operation.
5
4
PLL_FLT
If set, indicates that a PLL fault occurred where the PLL lost lock. Set the PLLACK bit (see Table 51) in
the start ADC measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8) to acknowledge the fault and clear the
PLL_FLT bit.
3
REF_BAT_EN
0
Set this bit to enable internal voltage reference in PSM2 mode. This bit should be set if LCD is on in
PSM1 and PSM2 mode.
2
Reserved
RXPROG
0
0
This bit must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
Controls the function of the P0.7/SS/T1/RxD2 pin.
[1:0]
RXPROG
Result
00
01
11
GPIO
RxD2 with wake-up disabled
RxD2 with wake-up enabled
Table 20. Power Management Interrupt Enable SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EPSR
Reserved
ESAG
Reserved
EVADC
EBAT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Enables a PSM interrupt when the power supply restored interrupt flag (FPSR) is set.
Reserved.
Enables a PSM interrupt when the voltage SAG interrupt flag (FSAG) is set.
This bit must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
Enables a PSM interrupt when the VDCINADC monitor interrupt flag (FVADC) is set.
Enables a PSM interrupt when the VBAT monitor interrupt flag (FBAT) is set.
Enables a PSM interrupt when the battery switchover interrupt flag (FBSO) is set.
Enables a PSM interrupt when the VDCIN monitor interrupt flag (FVDCIN) is set.
EBSO
EVDCIN
Table 21. Scratch Pad 1 SFR (SCRATCH1, Address 0xFB)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7 to 0 SCRATCH1
0
Value can be written/read in this register. This value is maintained in all the power saving modes.
Rev. 0 | Page 25 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 22. Scratch Pad 2 SFR (SCRATCH2, Address 0xFC)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0]
SCRATCH2 Value can be written/read in this register. This value is maintained in all the power saving modes.
0
Table 23. Scratch Pad 3 SFR (SCRATCH3, Address 0xFD)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0]
SCRATCH3 Value can be written/read in this register. This value is maintained in all the power saving modes.
0
Table 24. Scratch Pad 4 SFR (SCRATCH4, Address 0xFE)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0]
SCRATCH4 Value can be written/read in this register. This value is maintained in all the power saving modes.
0
Clearing the Scratch Pad Registers (SCRATCH1, Address 0xFB to SCRATCH4, Address 0xFE)
Note that these scratch pad registers are cleared only when the part loses VDD and VBAT
.
Table 25. Power Control SFR (POWCON, Address 0xC5)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
7
Reserved
1
0
Reserved.
6
METER_OF
F
Set this bit to turn off the modulators and energy metering DSP circuitry to reduce power if metering
functions are not needed in PSM0.
5
Reserved
COREOFF
Reserved
CD
0
This bit should be kept at 0 for proper operation.
4
0
Set this bit to shut down the core and enter PSM2 mode if in the PSM1 operating mode.
3
0
Reserved.
[2:0]
010
Controls the core clock frequency, fCORE. fCORE = 4.096 MHz/2CD
.
CD
Result (fCORE in MHz)
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
4.096
2.048
1.024
0.512
0.256
0.128
0.064
0.032
Writing to the Power Control SFR (POWCON, Address 0xC5)
Writing data to the POWCON SFR involves writing 0xA7 into the key SFR (KYREG, Address 0xC1), which is described in Table 125,
followed by a write to the POWCON SFR. For example,
MOV KYREG,#0A7h
MOV POWCON,#10h
;Write KYREG to 0xA7 to get write access to the POWCON SFR
;Shutdown the core
Rev. 0 | Page 26 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
is above 2.75 V. It allows continuous code execution even while
the internal power supply is switching from VDD to VBAT and back.
Note that the energy metering ADCs are not available when
POWER SUPPLY ARCHITECTURE
The ADE5166/ADE5169 have two power supply inputs, VDD and
VBAT, and they require only a single 3.3 V power supply at VDD for
full operation. A battery backup, or secondary power supply, with
a maximum of 3.7 V can be connected to the VBAT input. Internally,
the ADE5166/ADE5169 connect VDD or VBAT to VSWOUT, which is
used to derive power for the ADE5166/ADE5169 circuitry. The
VBAT is being used for VSWOUT.
Power supply management (PSM) interrupts can be enabled to
indicate when battery switchover occurs and when the VDD
power supply is restored (see the Power Supply Management
(PSM) Interrupt section.)
VSWOUT output pin reflects the voltage at the internal power supply
(VSWOUT) and has a maximum output current of 6 mA. This pin
can also be used to power a limited number of peripheral compo-
nents. The 2.5 V analog supply (VINTA) and the 2.5 V supply for
the core logic (VINTD) are derived by on-chip linear regulators from
VDD to VBAT
The following three events switch the internal power supply
(VSWOUT) from VDD to VBAT
:
•
VDCIN < 1.2 V. When VDCIN falls below 1.2 V, VSWOUT switches
VSWOUT. Figure 30 shows the ADE5166/ADE5169 power supply
from VDD to VBAT. This event is enabled when the
BATPRG[1:0] bits in the battery switchover configuration
SFR (BATPR, Address 0xF5) = 0b01.
VDD < 2.75 V. When VDD falls below 2.75 V, VSWOUT switches
from VDD to VBAT. This event is enabled when BATPRG[1:0] in
the BATPR SFR are cleared.
Falling edge on BCTRL. When the battery control pin,
BCTRL, goes low, VSWOUT switches from VDD to VBAT. This
external switchover signal can trigger a switchover to VBAT
at any time. Setting the INT1PRG bits to 0bx01 in the inter-
rupt pins configuration SFR (INTPR, Address 0xFF) enables
the battery control pin (see Table 16).
architecture.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide automatic battery switchover
between VDD and VBAT based on the voltage level detected at VDD
or VDCIN. In addition, the BCTRL input can be used to trigger a
battery switchover. The conditions for switching VSWOUT from VDD
to VBAT and back to VDD are described in the Battery Switchover
section. VDCIN is an input pin that can be connected to a 0 V to
3.3 V dc signal. This input is intended for power supply super-
visory purposes and does not provide power to the ADE5166/
ADE5169 circuitry (see the Battery Switchover section).
•
•
V
V
V
V
DCIN
DD
BAT
SWOUT
MCU
ADE
ADC
Switching from VBAT to VDD
V
INTD
LDO
LDO
To switch VSWOUT from VBAT to VDD, all of the following events
must be true:
POWER SUPPLY
MANAGEMENT
V
BCTRL
SW
V
INTA
•
VDD > 2.75 V. VSWOUT switches back to VDD after VDD remains
above 2.75 V.
VDCIN > 1.2 V and VDD > 2.75 V. If the low VDCIN condition
is enabled, VSWOUT switches to VDD after VDCIN remains
above 1.2 V and VDD remains above 2.75 V.
Rising edge on BCTRL. If the battery control pin is enabled,
ADC
LCD
2
SPI/I C
SCRATCH PAD
RTC
•
UART
2.5V
TEMPERATURE ADC
3.3V
•
Figure 30. Power Supply Architecture
V
SWOUT switches back to VDD after BCTRL is high, and the
BATTERY SWITCHOVER
first or second bullet point is satisfied.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 monitor VDD, VBAT, and VDCIN. Auto-
matic battery switchover from VDD to VBAT can be configured
based on the status of the VDD, the VDCIN, or the BCTRL pin. Battery
switchover is enabled by default. Setting Bit 1 in the battery
switchover configuration SFR (BATPR, Address 0xF5) disables
battery switchover so that VDD is always connected to VSWOUT (see
Table 18). The source of VSWOUT is indicated by Bit 6 in the
peripheral configuration SFR (PERIPH, Address 0xF4), which is
described in Table 19. Bit 6 is set when VSWOUT is connected to
POWER SUPPLY MANAGEMENT (PSM) INTERRUPT
The power supply management (PSM) interrupt alerts the 8052
core of power supply events. The PSM interrupt is disabled by
default. Setting the EPSM bit in the interrupt enable and Priority 2
SFR (IEIP2, Address 0xA9) enables the PSM interrupt (see
Table 82).
The power management interrupt enable SFR (IPSME,
Address 0xEC) controls the events that result in a PSM interrupt
(see Table 20).
VDD and cleared when VSWOUT is connected to VBAT
.
The battery switchover functionality provided by the ADE5166/
ADE5169 allows a seamless transition from VDD to VBAT. An auto-
matic battery switchover option ensures a stable power supply to
the ADE5166/ADE5169, as long as the external battery voltage
Figure 31 illustrates how the PSM interrupt vector is shared among
the PSM interrupt sources. The PSM interrupt flags are latched
and must be cleared by writing to the IPSMF power management
interrupt flag SFR, Address 0xF8 (see Table 17).
Rev. 0 | Page 27 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
EPSR
FPSR
ESAG
FSAG
EVADC
FVADC
FPSM
EPSM
PENDING PSM
INTERRUPT
TRUE?
EBAT
FBAT
EBSO
FBSO
EVDCIN
FVDCIN
IPSME ADDR. 0xEC
IPSMF ADDR. 0xF8
IEIP2 ADDR. 0xA9
EPSR
FPSR
PS2
RESERVED
FPSM
ESAG
RESERVED
RESERVED
PSI
EVADC
FVADC
EADE
EBAT
FBAT
ETI
EBSO
FBSO
EPSM
EVDCIN
FVDCIN
ESI
FSAG
ES2
PTI
NOT INVOLVED IN PSM INTERRUPT SIGNAL CHAIN
Figure 31. Power Supply Management Interrupt Sources
The VDCIN voltage is measured using a dedicated ADC. These
measurements take place in the background at intervals to check
the change in VDCIN. Conversions can also be initiated by writing to
the start ADC measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8), as
described in Table 51. The FVADC flag indicates when a VDCIN
measurement is ready. See the External Voltage Measurement
section for details on how VDCIN is measured.
Battery Switchover and Power Supply Restored
PSM Interrupt
The ADE5166/ADE5169 can be configured to generate a PSM
interrupt when the source of VSWOUT changes from VDD to VBAT
indicating battery switchover. Setting the EBSO bit in the power
management interrupt enable SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC) enables
this event to generate a PSM interrupt (see Table 20).
,
VBAT Monitor PSM Interrupt
The ADE5166/ADE5169 can also be configured to generate an
interrupt when the source of VSWOUT changes from VBAT to VDD,
indicating that the VDD power supply has been restored. Setting
the EPSR bit in the power management interrupt enable SFR
(IPSME, Address 0xEC) enables this event to generate a PSM
interrupt.
The VBAT voltage is measured using a dedicated ADC. These
measurements take place in the background at intervals to check
the change in VBAT. The FBAT bit is set when the battery level is
lower than the threshold set in the battery detection threshold
SFR (BATVTH, Address 0xFA), described in Table 52; or when a
new measurement is ready in the battery ADC value SFR
(BATADC, Address 0xDF), described in Table 54. See the
Battery Measurement section for more information. Setting the
EBAT bit in the power management interrupt enable SFR (IPSME,
Address 0xEC) enables this event to generate a PSM interrupt.
The flags in the IPSMF SFR for these interrupts, FBSO and
FPSR, are set regardless of whether the respective enable bits
have been set. The battery switchover and power supply restore
event flags, FBSO and FPSR, are latched. These events must be
cleared by writing a 0 to these bits. Bit 6 in the peripheral config-
uration SFR (PERIPH, Address 0xF4), VSWSOURCE, tracks
the source of VSWOUT. The bit is set when VSWOUT is connected to
VDCIN Monitor PSM Interrupt
The VDCIN voltage is monitored by a comparator. The FVDCIN
bit in the power management interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF,
Address 0xF8) is set when the VDCIN input level is lower than 1.2 V.
Setting the EVDCIN bit in the IPSME SFR enables this event to
generate a PSM interrupt. This event, which is associated with
the SAG monitoring, can be used to detect that a power supply
(VDD) is compromised and to trigger further actions prior to
VDD and cleared when VSWOUT is connected to VBAT
.
VDCIN ADC PSM Interrupt
The ADE5166/ADE5169 can be configured to generate a PSM
interrupt when VDCIN changes magnitude by more than a config-
urable threshold. This threshold is set in the temperature and
supply delta SFR (DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3), which is described
in Table 50. See the External Voltage Measurement section for
more information. Setting the EVADC bit in the power manage-
ment interrupt enable SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC) enables this
event to generate a PSM interrupt.
initiating a switch from VDD to VBAT
.
Rev. 0 | Page 28 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
SAG Monitor PSM Interrupt
Figure 32 shows how the ADE5166/ADE5169 power supply
inputs are set up in this application.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 energy measurement DSP monitors
the ac voltage input at the VP and VN input pins. The SAGLVL
register (Address 0x14) is used to set the threshold for a line
voltage SAG event. The FSAG bit in the power management
interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8) is set if the line voltage
stays below the level set in the SAGLVL register for the number
of line cycles set in the SAGCYC register (Address 0x13). See
the Line Voltage SAG Detection section for more information.
Setting the ESAG bit in the power management interrupt enable
SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC) enables this event to generate a
PSM interrupt.
Figure 33 shows the sequence of events that occurs if the main
power supply generated by the PSU starts to fail in the power
meter application shown in Figure 32. The SAG detection can
provide the earliest warning of a potential problem on VDD.
When a SAG event occurs, user code can be configured to back
up data and prepare for battery switchover, if desired. The rela-
tive spacing of these interrupts depends on the design of the
power supply.
Figure 34 shows the sequence of events that occurs if the main
power supply starts to fail in the power meter application shown
in Figure 32, with battery switchover on low VDCIN or low VDD
enabled.
USING THE POWER SUPPLY FEATURES
In an energy meter application, the 3.3 V power supply (VDD)
is typically generated from the ac line voltage and regulated to
3.3 V by a voltage regulator IC. The preregulated dc voltage,
typically 5 V to 12 V, can be connected to VDCIN through a
Finally, the transition between VDD and VBAT and the different
power supply modes (see the Operating Modes section) are
represented in Figure 35 and Figure 36.
resistor divider. A 3.6 V battery can be connected to VBAT
.
45
49
BCTRL
V
(240V, 220V, 110V TYPICAL)
AC INPUT
P
SAG
DETECTION
V
N
50
5V TO 12V DC
V
DCIN
VOLTAGE
SUPERVISORY
64
VOLTAGE
SUPERVISORY
POWER SUPPLY
MANAGEMENT
IPSMF SFR
(ADDR. 0xF8)
V
DD
3.3V
PSU
60
REGULATOR
V
SW
61
58
V
SWOUT
V
BAT
Figure 32. Power Supply Management for Energy Meter Application
Table 26. Power Supply Event Timing Operating Modes
Parameter Time Description
Time between when VDCIN goes below 1.2 V and when FVDCIN is raised.
Time between when VDD falls below 2.75 V and when battery switchover occurs.
t1
t2
t3
10 ns min
10 ns min
30 ms typ
Time between when VDCIN falls below 1.2 V and when battery switchover occurs if VDCIN is enabled to cause
battery switchover.
t4
130 ms typ
Time between when power supply restore conditions are met (VDCIN above 1.2 V and VDD above 2.75 V if
BATPR[1:0] = 0b01 or VDD above 2.75 V if BATPR[1:0] = 0b00) and when VSWOUT switches to VDD
.
Rev. 0 | Page 29 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
V
– V
N
P
SAG LEVEL TRIP POINT
SAGCYC = 1
V
DCIN
1.2V
t1
V
DD
2.75V
t2
SAG EVENT
(FSAG = 1)
V
EVENT
IF SWITCHOVER ON LOW V IS ENABLED,
DD
AUTOMATIC BATTERY SWITCHOVER OCCURS.
DCIN
(FVDCIN = 1)
V
IS CONNECTED TO V
.
SWOUT
BAT
BSO EVENT
(FBSO = 1)
Figure 33. Power Supply Management Interrupts and Battery Switchover with Only VDD Enabled for Battery Switchover
V
– V
N
P
SAG LEVEL TRIP POINT
SAGCYC = 1
V
DCIN
1.2V
t3
t1
V
DD
2.75V
SAG EVENT
(FSAG = 1)
V
EVENT
IF SWITCHOVER ON LOW V
DCIN
ENABLED, AUTOMATIC BATTERY
IS
DCIN
(FVDCIN = 1)
SWITCHOVER OCCURS. V
SWOUT
IS CONNECTED TO V
.
BAT
BSO EVENT
(FBSO = 1)
Figure 34. Power Supply Management Interrupts and Battery Switchover with VDD or VDCIN Enabled for Battery Switchover
Rev. 0 | Page 30 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
V
− V
N
P
SAG LEVEL
TRIP POINT
V
EVENT
SAG EVENT
DCIN
V
EVENT
DCIN
V
DCIN
1.2V
130ms MIN.
30ms MIN.
V
BAT
V
DD
2.75V
V
SW
PSM0
PSM0
PSM0
BATTERY SWITCH
ENABLED ON
PSM1 OR PSM2
LOW V
DCIN
V
SW
PSM0
BATTERY SWITCH
ENABLED ON
LOW V
DD
PSM1 OR PSM2
Figure 35. Power Supply Management Transitions Between Modes
Rev. 0 | Page 31 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
OPERATING MODES
•
•
The RAM in the MCU is no longer valid.
PSM0 (NORMAL MODE)
The program counter for the 8052, also held in volatile
memory, becomes invalid when the 2.5 V supply is shut
down. Therefore, the program does not resume from where
it left off but always starts from the power-on reset vector
when the ADE5166/ADE5169 exit PSM2.
In PSM0, or normal operating mode, VSWOUT is connected to VDD.
All of the analog circuitry and digital circuitry powered by
VINTD and VINTA are enabled by default. In normal mode, the
default clock frequency, fCORE, which is established during a
power-on reset or software reset, is 1.024 MHz.
The 3.3 V peripherals (temperature ADC, VDCIN ADC, RTC,
and LCD) are active in PSM2. They can be enabled or disabled
to reduce power consumption and are configured for PSM2
operation when the MCU core is active (see Table 28 for more
information about the individual peripherals and their PSM2
configuration). The ADE5166/ADE5169 remain in PSM2 until
an event occurs to wake them up.
PSM1 (BATTERY MODE)
In PSM1, or battery mode, VSWOUT is connected to VBAT. In this
operating mode, the 8052 core and all of the digital circuitry are
enabled by default. The analog circuitry for the ADE energy
metering DSP powered by VINTA is disabled. This analog circuitry
automatically restarts, and the switch to the VDD power supply
occurs when the VDD supply is >2.75 V and the PWRDN bit in
the MODE1 register (Address 0x0B) is cleared (see Table 32). The
default fCORE for PSM1, established during a power-on reset or
software reset, is 1.024 MHz.
In PSM2, the ADE5166/ADE5169 provide four scratch pad
RAM SFRs that are maintained during this mode. These SFRs
can be used to save data from PSM0 or PSM1 mode when
entering PSM2 mode (see Table 21 to Table 24).
PSM2 (SLEEP MODE)
In PSM2 mode, the ADE5166/ADE5169 maintain some SFRs
(see Table 27). The SFRs that are not listed in this table should
be restored when the part enters PSM0 or PSM1 mode from
PSM2 mode.
PSM2 is a low power consumption sleep mode for use in battery
operation. In this mode, VSWOUT is connected to VBAT. All of the
2.5 V digital and analog circuitry powered through VINTA and VINTD
isdisabled, including the MCU core, resulting in the following:
Table 27. SFRs Maintained in PSM2
I/O Configuration
Power Supply Management
RTC Peripherals
LCD Peripherals
Interrupt pins configuration SFR
(INTPR, Address 0xFF); see
Table 16.
Battery detection threshold SFR
(BATVTH, Address 0xFA); see
Table 52.
RTC nominal compensation SFR
(RTCCOMP, Address 0xF6); see Table 131.
LCD Segment Enable 2 SFR
(LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED); see
Table 100.
Peripheral configuration SFR
(PERIPH, Address 0xF4); see
Table 19.
Battery switchover configuration
SFR (BATPR, Address 0xF5); see
Table 18.
RTC temperature compensation SFR
(TEMPCAL, Address 0xF7); see Table 132. (LCDCONY, Address 0xB1); see
Table 93.
LCD Configuration Y SFR
Port 0 weak pull-up enable SFR
(PINMAP0, Address 0xB2); see
Table 162.
Battery ADC value SFR (BATADC,
Address 0xDF); see Table 54.
RTC configuration SFR (TIMECON, Address LCD Configuration X SFR
0xA1); see Table 127.
(LCDCONX, Address 0x9C); see
Table 91.
Port 1 weak pull-up enable SFR
(PINMAP1, Address 0xB3); see
Table 163.
Peripheral ADC strobe period SFR RTC Configuration 2 SFR (TIMECON2,
LCD configuration SFR
(LCDCON, Address 0x95); see
Table 90.
(STRBPER, Address 0xF9); see
Address 0xA2); see Table 128.
Table 49.
Port 2 weak pull-up enable SFR
(PINMAP2, Address 0xB4); see
Table 164.
Temperature and supply delta
SFR (DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3);
see Table 50.
All indirectly accessible registers defined
in the RTC register list; see Table 134.
LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK,
Address 0x96); see Table 94.
Scratch Pad 1 SFR (SCRATCH1,
Address 0xFB); see Table 21.
VDCIN ADC value SFR (VDCINADC,
Address 0xEF); see Table 53.
LCD segment enable SFR
(LCDSEGE, Address 0x97); see
Table 97.
Scratch Pad 2 SFR (SCRATCH2,
Address 0xFC); see Table 22.
Temperature ADC value SFR
(TEMPADC, Address 0xD7); see
Table 55.
LCD Pointer SFR (LCDPTR,
Address 0xAC); see Table 98.
Scratch Pad 3 SFR (SCRATCH3,
Address 0xFD); see Table 23.
LCD data SFR (LCDDAT,
Address 0xAE); see Table 99.
Scratch Pad 4 SFR (SCRATCH4,
Address 0xFE); see Table 24.
Rev. 0 | Page 32 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
3.3 V PERIPHERALS AND WAKE-UP EVENTS
Some of the 3.3 V peripherals are capable of waking the ADE5166/
ADE5169 from PSM2 mode. The events that can cause the
ADE5166/ADE5169 to wake up from PSM2 mode are listed
in the Wake-Up Event column in Table 28. The interrupt flag
associated with these events must be cleared prior to executing
instructions that put the ADE5166/ADE5169 in PSM2 mode
after wake-up.
Table 28. 3.3 V Peripherals and Wake-Up Events
3.3 V
Peripheral
Wake-Up Wake-Up
Interrupt
Vector
Event
Enable Bits
Flag
Comments
Temperature
ADC
∆T
Maskable
The temperature ADC can wake up the ADE5166/ADE5169.
A pending interrupt is generated according to the description
in the Temperature Measurement section. This wake-up event
can be disabled by disabling temperature measurements in the
temperature and supply delta SFR (DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3)
in PSM2 mode. The temperature interrupt needs to be
serviced and acknowledged prior to entering PSM2 mode.
VDCIN ADC
ΔV
Maskable
FVADC
PSR
IPSM
IPSM
The VDCIN measurement can wake up the ADE5166/ADE5169.
FVADC is set according to the description in the External
Voltage Measurement section. This wake-up event can be
disabled by clearing EVADC in the power management
interrupt enable SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC); see Table 20. The
FVADC flag needs to be cleared prior to entering PSM2 mode.
Power Supply
Management
PSR
Nonmaskable
The ADE5166/ADE5169 wake up if the power supply is restored
(if VSWOUT switches to be connected to VDD). The VSWSOURCE
flag, Bit 6 of the peripheral configuration SFR (PERIPH,
Address 0xF4), is set to indicate that VSWOUT is connected to VDD
.
RTC
Interval
Alarm
Maskable
Maskable
ITFLAG
Alarm
IRTC
IRTC
The ADE5166/ADE5169 wake up after the programmable
time interval has elapsed. The RTC interrupt needs to be
serviced and acknowledged prior to entering PSM2 mode.
An alarm can be set to wake the ADE5166/ADE5169 after the
desired amount of time. The RTC alarm is enabled by setting
the ALxx_EN bits in the RTC Configuration 2 SFR (TIMECON2,
Address 0xA2). The RTC interrupt needs to be serviced and
acknowledged prior to entering PSM2 mode.
I/O Ports1
INT0
INT1
INT0PRG = 1
IE0
IE1
The edge of the interrupt is selected by the IT0 bit in the TCON
SFR (TCON, Address 0x88). The IE0 flag bit in the TCON SFR is
not affected. The Interrupt 0 interrupt needs to be serviced
and acknowledged prior to entering PSM2 mode.
INT1PRG = 11x
The edge of the interrupt is selected by the IT1 bit in the TCON
SFR (TCON, Address 0x88). The IE1 flag bit in the TCON SFR is
not affected. The Interrupt 1 interrupt needs to be serviced
and acknowledged prior to entering PSM2 mode.
Rx2 Edge RXPROG[1:0] = 11 PERIPH[7]
(RX2FG)
An Rx edge event occurs if a rising or falling edge is detected
on the RxD2 line. The UART2 RxD flag needs to be cleared
prior to entering PSM2 mode.
External Reset
LCD
RESET
Nonmaskable
If the RESET pin is brought low while the ADE5166/ADE5169
are in PSM2 mode, they wake up to PSM1 mode.
The LCD can be enabled/disabled in PSM2 mode. The LCD
data memory remains intact.
Scratch Pad
The four SCRATCHx registers remain intact in PSM2 mode.
1 All I/O pins are treated as inputs. The weak pull-up on each I/O pin can be disabled individually in the Port 0 weak pull-up enable SFR (PINMAP0, Address 0xB2), Port 1
weak pull-up enable SFR (PINMAP1, Address 0xB3), and Port 2 weak pull-up enable SFR (PINMAP2, Address 0xB4) to decrease current consumption. The interrupts can
be enabled or disabled.
Rev. 0 | Page 33 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Automatic Switch to VDD (PSM1 to PSM0)
TRANSITIONING BETWEEN OPERATING MODES
If the conditions to switch VSWOUT from VBAT to VDD occur (see
the Battery Switchover section), the operating mode switches
to PSM0. When this switch occurs, the analog circuitry used in
the ADE energy measurement DSP automatically restarts. Note
that code execution continues normally. A software reset can
be performed to start PSM0 code execution at the power-on
reset vector.
The operating mode of the ADE5166/ADE5169 is determined
by the power supply connected to VSWOUT. Therefore, changes in
the power supply, such as when VSWOUT switches from VDD to
VBAT or when VSWOUT switches to VDD, alter the operating mode.
This section describes events that change the operating mode.
Automatic Battery Switchover (PSM0 to PSM1)
If any of the enabled battery switchover events occur (see the
Battery Switchover section), VSWOUT switches to VBAT. This switch-
over results in a transition from PSM0 to PSM1 operating mode.
When battery switchover occurs, the analog circuitry used in
the ADE energy measurement DSP is disabled. To reduce power
consumption, the user code can initiate a transition to PSM2.
USING THE POWER MANAGEMENT FEATURES
Because program flow is different for each operating mode, the
status of VSWOUT must be known at all times. The VSWSOURCE
bit in the peripheral configuration SFR (PERIPH, Address 0xF4)
indicates the power supply to which VSWOUT is connected (see
Table 19). This bit can be used to control program flow on wake-
up. Because code execution always starts at the power-on reset
vector, Bit 6 of the PERIPH SRF can be tested to determine which
power supply is being used and to branch to normal code execution
or to wake up event code execution. Power supply events can
also occur when the MCU core is active. To be aware of the
events that change what VSWOUT is connected to, use the
following guidelines:
Entering Sleep Mode (PSM1 to PSM2)
To reduce power consumption when VSWOUT is connected to
VBAT, user code can initiate sleep mode, PSM2, by setting Bit 4
in the power control SFR (POWCON, Address 0xC5) to shut
down the MCU core. Events capable of waking the MCU can be
enabled (see the 3.3 V Peripherals and Wake-Up Events section).
Servicing Wake-Up Events (PSM2 to PSM1)
The ADE5166/ADE5169 may need to wake up from PSM2 to
service wake-up events (see the 3.3 V Peripherals and Wake-Up
Events section). PSM1 code execution begins at the power-on
reset vector. After servicing the wake-up event, the ADE5166/
ADE5169 can return to PSM2 by setting Bit 4 in the power control
SFR (POWCON, Address 0xC5) to shut down the MCU core.
•
Enable the battery switchover interrupt (EBSO)
if VSWOUT = VDD at power-up.
Enable the power supply restored interrupt (EPSR)
if VSWOUT = VBAT at power-up.
•
An early warning that battery switchover is about to occur is
provided by SAG detection and, possibly. by low VDCIN detection
(see the Battery Switchover section).
Automatic Switch to VDD (PSM2 to PSM0)
If the conditions to switch VSWOUT from VBAT to VDD occur (see
the Battery Switchover section), the operating mode switches to
PSM0. When this switch occurs, the MCU core and the analog
circuitry used in the ADE energy measurement DSP automatically
restart. PSM0 code execution begins at the power-on reset vector.
For a user-controlled battery switchover, enable automatic battery
switchover on low VDD only. Next, enable the low VDCIN event to
generate the PSM interrupt. When a low VDCIN event occurs, start
data backup. Upon completion of the data backup, enable battery
switchover on low VDCIN. Battery switchover occurs 30 ms later.
POWER SUPPLY
RESTORED
AUTOMATIC BATTERY
SWITCHOVER
PSM0
NORMAL MODE
IS CONNECTED TO V
PSM1
BATTERY MODE
V
V
IS CONNECTED TO V
SWOUT
DD
SWOUT BAT
POWER SUPPLY
RESTORED
WAKE-UP
EVENT
USER CODE DIRECTS MCU
TO SHUT DOWN CORE AFTER
SERVICING A WAKE-UP EVENT
PSM2
SLEEP MODE
IS CONNECTED TO V
V
SWOUT
BAT
Figure 36. Transitioning Between Operating Modes
Rev. 0 | Page 34 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
ENERGY MEASUREMENT
The ADE5166/ADE5169 offer a fixed function, energy measure-
ment, digital processing core that provides all the information
needed to measure energy in single-phase energy meters. The
part provides two ways to access the energy measurements:
direct access through SFRs for time sensitive information and
indirect access through address and data SFRs for the majority
of energy measurements. The Irms, Vrms, interrupts, and waveform
registers are readily available through the SFRs, as shown in
Table 30. Other energy measurement information is mapped
to a page of memory that is accessed indirectly through the
MADDPT, MDATL, MDATM, and MDATH SFRs. The address
and data SFRs act as pointers to the energy measurement
internal registers.
internal energy measurement register designated by the address
in the MADDPT SFR. If the internal register is one byte long,
only the MDATL SFR content is copied to the internal register,
while the MDATM SFR and MDATH SFR contents are ignored.
The energy measurement core functions with an internal clock of
4.096 MHz∕5 or 819.2 kHz. Because the 8052 core functions with
another clock, 4.096MHz∕2CD, synchronization between the two
clock environments when CD = 0 or 1 is an issue. When data is
written to the internal energy measurement registers, a small
wait period needs to be implemented before another read or
write to these registers can take place.
Sample code to write 0x0155 to the 2-byte SAGLVL register
located at 0x14 in the energy measurement memory space is as
follows:
ACCESS TO ENERGY MEASUREMENT SFRs
Access to the energy measurement SFRs is achieved by reading
or writing to the SFR addresses detailed in Table 30. The internal
data for the MIRQx SFRs is latched byte by byte into the SFR
when the SFR is read.
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
DJNZ
MDATM,#01h
MDATL,#55h
MADDPT,#SAGLVL_W (Address 0x94)
A,#05h
ACC,$
The WAV1x, WAV2x, VRMSx, and IRMSx registers are all 3-byte
SFRs. The 24-bit data is latched into these SFRs when the high
byte is read. Reading the low or medium byte before the high
byte results in reading the data from the previous latched sample.
;Next write or read to energy
measurement SFR can be done after
this.
Sample code to read the VRMSx register is as follows:
Reading the Internal Energy Measurement Registers
MOV
R1, VRMSH
//latches data in VRMSH,
VRMSM, and VRMSL SFRs
When Bit 7 of energy measurement pointer address SFR
(MADDPT, Address 0x91) is cleared, the content of the internal
energy measurement register designated by the address in
MADDPT is transferred to the MDATx SFRs. If the internal
register is one byte long, only the MDATL SFR content is updated
with a new value, and the MDATM SFR and MDATH SFR
contents are reset to 0x00.
MOV
MOV
R2, VRMSM
R3, VRMSL
ACCESS TO INTERNAL ENERGY MEASUREMENT
REGISTERS
Access to the internal energy measurement registers is achieved
by writing to the energy measurement pointer address SFR
(MADDPT, Address 0x91). This SFR selects the energy measure-
ment register to be accessed and determines if a read or a write
is performed (see Table 29).
The energy measurement core functions with an internal clock
of 4.096 MHz∕5 or 819.2 kHz. Because the 8052 core functions
with another clock, 4.096MHz∕2CD, synchronization between the
two clock environments when CD = 0 or 1 is an issue. When data
is read from the internal energy measurement registers, a small
wait period needs to be implemented before the MDATx SFRs
are transferred to another SFR.
Table 29. Energy Measurement Pointer Address SFR
(MADDPT, Address 0x91)
Bit
Description
Sample code to read the peak voltage in the 2-byte VPKLVL
register located at 0x16 into the data pointer is as follows:
7
1 = write, 0 = read
[6:0]
Energy measurement internal register address
MOV
MOV
DJNZ
MOV
MOV
MADDPT,#VPKLVL_R (Address 0x16)
Writing to the Internal Energy Measurement Registers
A,#05h
When Bit 7 of the energy measurement pointer address SFR
(MADDPT, Address 0x91) is set, the content of the MDATx
SFRs (MDATL, MDATM, and MDATH) is transferred to the
ACC,$
DPH,MDATM
DPL,MDATL
Rev. 0 | Page 35 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 30. Energy Measurement SFRs
Address
0x91
0x92
0x93
0x94
0xD1
0xD2
0xD3
0xD4
0xD5
0xD6
0xD9
0xDA
0xDB
0xDC
0xDD
0xDE
0xE2
0xE3
0xE4
0xE5
0xE6
0xE7
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Mnemonic
MADDPT
MDATL
MDATM
MDATH
VRMSL
VRMSM
VRMSH
IRMSL
Description
Energy measurement pointer address.
Energy measurement pointer data LSB.
Energy measurement pointer data middle byte.
Energy measurement pointer data MSB.
Vrms measurement LSB.
Vrms measurement middle byte.
Vrms measurement MSB.
Irms measurement LSB.
IRMSM
IRMSH
Irms measurement middle byte.
Irms measurement MSB.
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
MIRQENL
MIRQENM
MIRQENH
MIRQSTL
MIRQSTM
MIRQSTH
WAV1L
WAV1M
WAV1H
WAV2L
Energy measurement interrupt enable LSB.
Energy measurement interrupt enable middle byte.
Energy measurement interrupt enable MSB.
Energy measurement interrupt status LSB.
Energy measurement interrupt status middle byte.
Energy measurement interrupt status MSB.
Selection 1 sample LSB.
Selection 1 sample middle byte.
Selection 1 sample MSB.
Selection 2 sample LSB.
WAV2M
WAV2H
Selection 2 sample middle byte.
Selection 2 sample MSB.
R
×1, ×2, ×4,
×8, ×16
{GAIN[2:0]}
I
PA
INTEGRATOR
dt
WGAIN[11:0]
MULTIPLIER
PGA1
I
ADC
ADC
HPF
I
N
LPF2
PGA1
CF1NUM[15:0]
HPF
WATTOS[15:0]
I
π
VARGAIN[11:0]
BP
IBGAIN[11:0]
2
CF1
DFC
Ф
LPF2
CF1DEN[15:0]
CF2NUM[15:0]
VAROS[15:0]
VAGAIN[11:0]
IRMSOS[11:0]
2
x
CF2
DFC
LPF
VRMSOS[11:0]
VARDIV[7:0]
V
P
CF2DEN[15:0]
2
PGA2
ADC
VADIV[7:0]
%
%
x
%
WDIV[7:0]
LPF
V
HPF
N
METERING SFRs
Figure 37. Energy Metering Block Diagram
Rev. 0 | Page 36 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
ENERGY MEASUREMENT REGISTERS
Table 31. Energy Measurement Register List
Address
Length Signed/
MADDPT[6:0] Mnemonic R/W (Bits)
Unsigned Default Description
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
WATTHR
RWATTHR
LWATTHR
VARHR1
RVARHR1
LVARHR1
VAHR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reads Wh accumulator without reset.
Reads Wh accumulator with reset.
Reads Wh accumulator synchronous to line cycle.
Reads VARh accumulator without reset.
Reads VARh accumulator with reset.
Reads VARh accumulator synchronous to line cycle.
Reads VAh accumulator without reset. If the VARMSCFCON bit in the
MODE2 register (Address 0x0C) is set, this register accumulates Irms
.
0x08
0x09
RVAHR
LVAHR
R
R
24
24
S
S
0
0
Reads VAh accumulator with reset. If the VARMSCFCON bit in the
MODE2 register (Address 0x0C) is set, this register accumulates Irms
Reads VAh accumulator synchronous to line cycle. If the VARMSCFCON
bit in the MODE2 register (Address 0x0C) is set, this register accumulates
.
Irms
.
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
PER_FREQ
MODE1
MODE2
R
R/W
R/W
16
8
8
U
U
U
U
0
Reads line period or frequency register depending on Mode2 register.
Sets basic configuration of energy measurement (see Table 32).
Sets basic configuration of energy measurement (see Table 33).
Sets configuration of Waveform Sample 1 and Waveform Sample 2
(see Table 34).
0x06
0x40
0
WAVMODE R/W
8
0x0E
0x0F
NLMODE
ACCMODE R/W
R/W
8
8
U
U
0
0
Sets level of energy no load thresholds (see Table 35).
Sets configuration of watt and var accumulation and various tamper
alarms (see Table 36).
0x10
0x11
PHCAL
ZXTOUT
R/W
R/W 12
8
S
0x40
Sets phase calibration register (see the Phase Compensation section).
0x0FFF Sets timeout for zero-crossing timeout detection (see the Zero-
Crossing Timeout section).
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
LINCYC
SAGCYC
SAGLVL
IPKLVL
R/W 16
U
U
U
U
U
0xFFFF Sets number of half-line cycles for LWATTHR, LVARHR, and LVAHR
accumulators.
R/W
8
0xFF
Sets number of half-line cycles for SAG detection (see the Line
Voltage SAG Detection section).
R/W 16
R/W 16
R/W 16
0
Sets detection level for SAG detection (see the Line Voltage SAG
Detection section).
0xFFFF Sets peak detection level for current peak detection (see the Peak
Detection section).
0xFFFF Sets peak detection level for voltage peak detection (see the Peak
Detection section).
VPKLVL
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
IPEAK
RSTIPEAK
VPEAK
RSTVPEAK
GAIN
R
R
R
R
24
24
24
24
8
U
U
U
U
U
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
U
U
U
U
U
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reads current peak level without reset (see the Peak Detection section).
Reads current peak level with reset (see the Peak Detection section).
Reads voltage peak level without reset (see the Peak Detection section).
Reads voltage peak level with reset (see the Peak Detection section).
Sets PGA gain of analog inputs (see Table 37).
Sets matching gain for IPB current input.
Sets watt gain register.
Sets var gain register.
Sets VA gain register.
Sets watt offset register.
Sets var offset register.
Sets current rms offset register.
Sets voltage rms offset register.
Sets watt energy scaling register.
Sets var energy scaling register.
Sets VA energy scaling register.
Sets CF1 numerator register.
R/W
IBGAIN
WGAIN
VARGAIN1
VAGAIN
WATTOS
VAROS1
IRMSOS
VRMSOS
WDIV
VARDIV
VADIV
CF1NUM
CF1DEN
R/W 12
R/W 12
R/W 12
R/W 12
R/W 16
R/W 16
R/W 12
R/W 12
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W 16
R/W 16
8
8
8
0x003F Sets CF1 denominator register.
Rev. 0 | Page 37 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Address
Length Signed/
Unsigned Default Description
MADDPT[6:0] Mnemonic R/W (Bits)
0x29
0x2A
0x2B
0x3B
0x3C
0x3D
0x3E
0x3F
CF2NUM
CF2DEN
MODE3
Reserved
Reserved
CALMODE
Reserved
Reserved
R/W 16
R/W 16
U
U
U
0
Sets CF2 numerator register.
0x003F Sets CF2 denominator register.
0
0
R/W
8
Enables zero crossing outputs (see Table 38).
This register must be set to its default value for proper operation.
0x0300 This register must be set to its default value for proper operation.
R/W
8
U
0
0
0
Sets calibration mode (see Table 39).
This register must be set to its default value for proper operation.
This register must be set to its default value for proper operation.
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
ENERGY MEASUREMENT INTERNAL REGISTER DETAILS
Table 32. Mode 1 Register (MODE1, Address 0x0B)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
DISZXLPF
INTE
SWAPBITS
PWRDN
DISCF2
DISCF1
DISHPF
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Setting this bit resets all of the energy measurement registers to their default values.
Setting this bit disables the zero-crossing low-pass filter.
Setting this bit enables the digital integrator for use with a di/dt sensor.
Setting this bit swaps CH1 ADC and CH2 ADC.
Setting this bit powers down voltage and current ADCs.
Setting this bit disables Frequency Output CF2.
Setting this bit disables Frequency Output CF1.
Setting this bit disables the HPFs in voltage and current channels.
Table 33. Mode 2 Register (MODE2, Address 0x0C)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:6]
CF2SEL
01
Configuration bits for CF2 output.
CF2SEL
00
Result
CF2 frequency is proportional to active power.
CF2 frequency is proportional to reactive power.1
CF2 frequency is proportional to apparent power or Irms
01
1X
.
[5:4]
CF1SEL
00
0
Configuration bits for CF1 output.
CF1SEL
00
01
Result
CF1 frequency is proportional to active power.
CF1 frequency is proportional to reactive power.1
CF1 frequency is proportional to apparent power or Irms
1X
.
3
VARMSCFCON
Configuration bits for apparent power or Irms for CF1, CF2 outputs, and VA accumulation registers
(VAHR, RVAHR, and LVAHR). Note that CF1 cannot be proportional to VA if CF2 is proportional to
Irms and vice versa.
VARMSCFCON Result
0
1
If CF1SEL[1:0] = 1X, CF1 is proportional to VA
If CF2SEL[1:0] = 1X, CF2 is proportional to VA
If CF1SEL[1:0] = 1X, CF1 is proportional to Irms
If CF2SEL[1:0] = 1X, CF2 is proportional to Irms
2
1
ZXRMS
0
0
Logic 1 enables update of rms values synchronously to Voltage ZX.
FREQSEL
Configuration bits to select period or frequency measurement for PER_FREQ register
(Address 0x0A).
FREQSEL
Result
0
1
PER_FREQ register holds a period measurement
PER_FREQ register holds a frequency measurement
0
WAVEN
0
When this bit is set, waveform sampling mode is enabled.
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Rev. 0 | Page 38 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 34. Waveform Mode Register (WAVMODE, Address 0x0D)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:5]
WAV2SEL
000
Waveform Sample 2 selection for samples mode.
WAV2SEL
000
Source
Current
001
Voltage
010
011
100
101
Active power multiplier output
Reactive power multiplier output1
VA multiplier output
Irms LPF output
Others
Reserved
[4:2]
WAV1SEL
000
Waveform Sample 1 selection for samples mode.
WAV1SEL
000
Source
Current
001
Voltage
010
011
100
101
Active power multiplier output
Reactive power multiplier output1
VA multiplier output
Irms LPF output (low 24-bit)
Reserved
Others
[1:0]
DTRT
00
Waveform samples output data rate.
DTRT
00
01
10
11
Update Rate (Clock = fCORE/5 = 819.2 kHz)
25.6 kSPS (clock/32)
12.8 kSPS (clock/64)
6.4 kSPS (clock/128)
3.2 kSPS (clock/256)
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Table 35. No Load Configuration Register (NLMODE, Address 0x0E)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
DISVARCMP1
0
0
Setting this bit disables fundamental var gain compensation over line frequency.
6
IRMSNOLOAD
Logic 1 enables Irms no load threshold detection. The level is defined by the setting of the
VANOLOAD bits.
[5:4]
[3:2]
[1:0]
VANOLOAD
VARNOLOAD1
APNOLOAD
00
00
00
Apparent power no load threshold.
VANOLOAD
Result
00
01
10
11
No load detection disabled
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.030% of full scale
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.015% of full scale
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.0075% of full scale
Reactive power no load threshold.
VARNOLOAD
Result
00
01
10
11
No load detection disabled
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.015% of full scale
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.0075% of full scale
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.0037% of full scale
Active power no load threshold.
APNOLOAD
Result
00
01
10
11
No load detection disabled
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.015% of full scale
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.0075% of full scale
No load detection enabled with threshold = 0.0037% of full scale
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Rev. 0 | Page 39 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 36. Accumulation Mode Register (ACCMODE, Address 0x0F)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
ICHANNEL
0
This bit indicates the current channel used to measure energy in antitampering mode.
0 = Channel A (IPA).
1 = Channel B (IPB).
6
FAULTSIGN
0
Configuration bit to select the event that triggers a fault interrupt.
0 = a FAULTSIGN interrupt occurs when the part enters fault mode.
1 = a FAULTSIGN interrupt occurs when the part enters normal mode.
5
4
VARSIGN1
APSIGN
0
0
Configuration bit to select the event that triggers a reactive power sign interrupt. If cleared to 0,
a VARSIGN interrupt occurs when reactive power changes from positive to negative. If set to 1,
a VARSIGN interrupt occurs when reactive power changes from negative to positive.
Configuration bit to select event that triggers an active power sign interrupt. If cleared to 0,
an APSIGN interrupt occurs when active power changes from positive to negative. If set to 1,
an APSIGN interrupt occurs when active power changes from negative to positive.
3
2
ABSVARM1
SAVARM1
0
0
Logic 1 enables absolute value accumulation of reactive power in energy register and pulse output.
Logic 1 enables reactive power accumulation depending on the sign of the active power. If
active power is positive, var is accumulated as it is. If active power is negative, the sign of the var
is reversed for the accumulation. This accumulation mode affects both the var registers (VARHR,
RVARHR, LVARHR) and the pulse output when connected to VAR.1
1
0
POAM
ABSAM
0
0
Logic 1 enables positive-only accumulation of active power in energy register and pulse output.
Logic 1 enables absolute value accumulation of active power in energy register and pulse output.
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Table 37. Gain Register (GAIN, Address 0x1B)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:5]
PGA2
000
These bits define the voltage channel input gain.
PGA2
000
001
010
011
Result
Gain = 1
Gain = 2
Gain = 4
Gain = 8
Gain = 16
100
4
3
Reserved
0
0
Reserved.
CFSIGN_OPT
This bit defines where the CF change of sign detection (APSIGN or VARSIGN) is implemented.
CFSIGN_OPT
Result
0
1
Filtered power signal
On a per CF pulse basis
[2:0]
PGA1
000
These bits define the current channel input gain.
PGA1
000
001
010
011
Result
Gain = 1
Gain = 2
Gain = 4
Gain = 8
Gain = 16
100
Table 38. Mode 3 Register (MODE3 Address 0x2B)
Bit
[7:2]
1
Mnemonic
Reserved
ZX1
Default
Description
0
0
0
Reserved.
Setting this bit enables the zero crossing output signal on P1.2.
Setting this bit enables the zero crossing output signal on P0.5.
0
ZX2
Rev. 0 | Page 40 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 39. Calibration Mode Register (CALMODE, Address 0x3D)
Bit
Mnemonic
Reserved
SEL_I_CH
Default
Description
[7:6]
[5:4]
0
0
These bits must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
These bits define the current channel used for energy measurements.
SEL_I_CH
Result
00
01
10
11
Current channel automatically selected by the tampering condition
Current channel connected to IPA
Current channel connected to IPB
Current channel automatically selected by the tampering condition
3
V_CH_SHORT
I_CH_SHORT
Reserved
0
0
0
Logic 1 shorts the voltage channel to ground.
Logic 1 shorts the voltage channel to ground.
These bits must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
2
[1:0]
INTERRUPT STATUS/ENABLE SFRS
Table 40. Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC)
Bit
Interrupt Flag
Description
7
ADEIRQFLAG
This bit is set if any of the ADE status flags that are enabled to generate an ADE interrupt is set. This bit is
automatically cleared when all of the enabled ADE status flags are cleared.
6
5
4
3
2
Reserved
FAULTSIGN
VARSIGN1
APSIGN
Reserved.
Logic 1 indicates that the fault mode has changed according to the configuration of the ACCMODE register.
Logic 1 indicates that the reactive power sign has changed according to the configuration of the ACCMODE register.
Logic 1 indicates that the active power sign has changed according to the configuration of the ACCMODE register.
Logic 1 indicates that an interrupt has been caused by apparent power no load detection. This interrupt is also
used to reflect that the part is entering the Irms no load mode.
VANOLOAD
1
0
RNOLOAD1
APNOLOAD
Logic 1 indicates that an interrupt has been caused by reactive power no load detection.
Logic 1 indicates that an interrupt has been caused by active power no load detection.
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Table 41. Interrupt Status 2 SFR (MIRQSTM, Address 0xDD)
Bit
Interrupt Flag
Description
7
CF2
Logic 1 indicates that a pulse on CF2 has been issued. The flag is set even if the CF2 pulse output is not
enabled by clearing Bit 2 of the MODE1 register.
6
CF1
Logic 1 indicates that a pulse on CF1 has been issued. The flag is set even if the CF1 pulse output is not
enabled by clearing Bit 1 of the MODE1 register.
5
4
3
2
1
0
VAEOF
REOF1
AEOF
VAEHF
REHF1
AEHF
Logic 1 indicates that the VAHR register has overflowed.
Logic 1 indicates that the VARHR register has overflowed.
Logic 1 indicates that the WATTHR register has overflowed.
Logic 1 indicates that the VAHR register is half full.
Logic 1 indicates that the VARHR register is half full.
Logic 1 indicates that the WATTHR register is half full.
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Table 42. Interrupt Status 3 SFR (MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE)
Bit
Interrupt Flag
RESET
Reserved
WFSM
PKI
PKV
CYCEND
ZXTO
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Indicates the end of a reset (for both software and hardware reset).
Reserved.
Logic 1 indicates that new data is present in the waveform registers (Address 0xE2 to Address 0xE7).
Logic 1 indicates that the current channel has exceeded the IPKLVL value
Logic 1 indicates that the voltage channel has exceeded the VPKLVL value.
Logic 1 indicates the end of the energy accumulation over an integer number of half-line cycles.
Logic 1 indicates that no zero crossing on the line voltage happened for the last ZXTOUT half-line cycles.
Logic 1 indicates detection of a zero crossing in the voltage channel.
ZX
Rev. 0 | Page 41 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 43. Interrupt Enable 1 SFR (MIRQENL, Address 0xD9)
Bit
Interrupt Enable Bit
Description
7 to 6
Reserved
Reserved.
5
4
3
2
1
0
FAULTSIGN
VARSIGN1
APSIGN
VANOLOAD
RNOLOAD1
APNOLOAD
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the FAULTSIGN bit set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the VARSIGN flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the APSIGN flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the VANOLOAD flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the RNOLOAD flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the APNOLOAD flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Table 44. Interrupt Enable 2 SFR (MIRQENM, Address 0xDA)
Bit
Interrupt Enable Bit
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CF2
CF1
When this bit is set to Logic 1, a CF2 pulse creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, a CF1 pulse creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the VAEOF flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the REOF flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the AEOF flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the VAEHF flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the REHF flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the AEHF flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
VAEOF
REOF1
AEOF
VAEHF
REHF1
AEHF
1 This function is not available in the ADE5166.
Table 45. Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH, Address 0xDB)
Bit
[7:6]
5
4
3
2
1
0
Interrupt Enable Bit
Description
Reserved
WFSM
PKI
Reserved.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the WFSM flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the PKI flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the PKV flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the CYCEND flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the ZXTO flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the ZX flag set creates a pending ADE interrupt to the 8052 core.
PKV
CYCEND
ZXTO
ZX
Bit 2 to Bit 0 select the gain for the PGA in the current channel,
and Bit 7 to Bit 5 select the gain for the PGA in the voltage
channel. Figure 39 shows how a gain selection for the current
channel is made using the gain register.
GAIN[7:0]
ANALOG INPUTS
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 has two fully differential voltage input
channels. The maximum differential input voltage for the
VP/VN, and IPB/IN input pairs is 0.5 V.
Each analog input channel has a programmable gain amplifier
(PGA) with possible gain selections of 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16. The gain
selections are made by writing to the GAIN register (see Table 37
and Figure 38).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GAIN (K)
SELECTION
GAIN REGISTER*
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CHANNELS PGA CONTROL
I
P
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
ADDR:
0x1B
K × V
IN
V
IN
PGA2 GAIN SELECT
000 = ×1
PGA1 GAIN SELECT
000 = ×1
001 = ×2
001 = ×2
I
N
010 = ×4
010 = ×4
011 = ×8
011 = ×8
Figure 39. PGA in Current Channel
100 = ×16
100 = ×16
CFSIGN_OPT
RESERVED
*REGISTER CONTENTS SHOW POWER-ON DEFAULTS.
Figure 38. Analog Gain Register
Rev. 0 | Page 42 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
is 40 Hz to 2 kHz. Oversampling has the effect of spreading the
quantization noise (noise due to sampling) over a wider band-
width. With the noise spread more thinly over a wider bandwidth,
the quantization noise in the band of interest is lowered (see
Figure 40).
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERSION
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 has two Σ-Δ analog-to digital converters
(ADCs). The outputs of these ADCs are mapped directly to wave-
form sampling SFRs (Address 0xE2 to Address 0xE7) and are used
for energy measurement internal digital signal processing. In PSM1
(battery) mode and PSM2 (sleep) mode, the ADCs are powered
down to minimize power consumption.
ANTIALIAS
FILTER (RC)
DIGITAL
FILTER
SAMPLING
FREQUENCY
SIGNAL
SHAPED
NOISE
For simplicity, the block diagram in Figure 41 shows a first-order
Σ-ꢀ ADC. The converter is made up of the Σ-ꢀ modulator and
the digital low-pass filter (LPF).
NOISE
0
2
409.6
FREQUENCY (kHz)
819.2
A Σ-ꢀ modulator converts the input signal into a continuous
serial stream of 1s and 0s at a rate determined by the sampling
clock. In the ADE5166/ADE5169, the sampling clock is equal to
4.096 MHz/5. The 1-bit DAC in the feedback loop is driven by
the serial data stream. The DAC output is subtracted from the
input signal. If the loop gain is high enough, the average value of
the DAC output (and, therefore, the bit stream) can approach
that of the input signal level.
HIGH RESOLUTION
SIGNAL
OUTPUT FROM DIGITAL
LPF
NOISE
0
2
409.6
FREQUENCY (kHz)
819.2
For any given input value in a single sampling interval, the data
from the 1-bit ADC is virtually meaningless. Only when a large
number of samples are averaged is a meaningful result obtained.
This averaging is carried into the second part of the ADC, the
digital LPF. By averaging a large number of bits from the mod-
ulator, the low-pass filter can produce 24-bit data-words that are
proportional to the input signal level.
Figure 40. Noise Reduction Due to Oversampling and
Noise Shaping in the Analog Modulator
However, oversampling alone is not efficient enough to improve
the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) in the band of interest. For example,
an oversampling ratio of four is required to increase the SNR by
only 6 dB (1 bit). To keep the oversampling ratio at a reasonable
level, it is possible to shape the quantization noise so that the
majority of the noise lies at the higher frequencies. In the Σ-ꢀ
modulator, the noise is shaped by the integrator, which has a
high-pass-type response for the quantization noise. The result
is that most of the noise is at the higher frequencies where it can
be removed by the digital LPF. This noise shaping is shown in
Figure 40.
The Σ-ꢀ converter uses two techniques to achieve high resolution
from what is essentially a 1-bit conversion technique. The first
is oversampling. Oversampling means that the signal is sampled
at a rate (frequency) that is many times higher than the bandwidth
of interest. For example, the sampling rate in the ADE5166/
ADE5169 is 4.096 MHz/5 (819.2 kHz), and the band of interest
MCLK/5
ANALOG
LOW-PASS FILTER
DIGITAL
INTEGRATOR
LOW-PASS
LATCHED
COMPARATOR
FILTER
+
R
–
C
24
V
REF
... 10100101 ...
1-BIT DAC
Figure 41. First-Order Σ-∆ ADC
Rev. 0 | Page 43 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Antialiasing Filter
For conventional current sensors, a simple RC filter (single-pole
LPF) with a corner frequency of 10 kHz produces an attenuation
of approximately 40 dB at 819.2 kHz (see Figure 42). The 20 dB
per decade attenuation is usually sufficient to eliminate the effects
of aliasing for conventional current sensors. However, for a di/dt
sensor such as a Rogowski coil, the sensor has a 20 dB per decade
gain. This neutralizes the −20 dB per decade attenuation produced
by one simple LPF. Therefore, when using a di/dt sensor, care
should be taken to offset the 20 dB per decade gain. One simple
approach is to cascade two RC filters to produce the −40 dB per
decade attenuation needed.
Figure 41 also shows an analog LPF (RC) on the input to the
modulator. This filter is present to prevent aliasing, an artifact
of all sampled systems. Aliasing means that frequency components
in the input signal to the ADC, which are higher than half the
sampling rate of the ADC, appear in the sampled signal at a fre-
quency below half the sampling rate. Figure 42 illustrates the effect.
Frequency components (the black arrows) above half the sampling
frequency (also known as the Nyquist frequency, that is, 409.6 kHz)
are imaged or folded back down below 409.6 kHz. This happens
with all ADCs, regardless of the architecture. In Figure 42, only
frequencies near the sampling frequency (819.2 kHz) move into
the band of interest for metering (40 Hz to 2 kHz). This allows
the use of a very simple LPF to attenuate high frequency (at
approximately 819.2 kHz) noise and prevents distortion in the
band of interest.
ADC Transfer Function
Both ADCs in the ADE5166/ADE5169 are designed to produce
the same output code for the same input signal level. With a
full-scale signal on the input of 0.5 V and an internal reference
of 1.2 V, the ADC output code is nominally 2,147,483 or 0x20C49B.
The maximum code from the ADC is 4,194,304; this is equiva-
lent to an input signal level of 0.794 V. However, for specified
performance, it is recommended that the full-scale input signal
level of 0.5 V not be exceeded.
ALIASING EFFECTS
SAMPLING
FREQUENCY
IMAGE
FREQUENCIES
Current Channel ADC
Figure 43 shows the ADC and signal processing chain for the
current channel. In waveform sampling mode, the ADC outputs
a signed, twos complement, 24-bit data-word at a maximum of
25.6 kSPS (4.096 MHz/160).
0
2
409.6
819.2
FREQUENCY (kHz)
Figure 42. ADC and Signal Processing in Current Channel Outline Dimensions
×1, ×2, ×4,
×8, ×16
{GAIN[2:0]}
I
PA
INTEGRATOR
WGAIN[11:0]
PGA1
PGA1
I
ADC
ADC
MULTIPLIER
HPF
HPF
I
N
dt
LPF2
CF1NUM[15:0]
WATTOS[15:0]
I
π
2
VARGAIN[11:0]
BP
IBGAIN[11:0]
CF1
DFC
Ф
LPF2
CF1DEN[15:0]
CF2NUM[15:0]
VAROS[15:0]
VAGAIN[11:0]
IRMSOS[11:0]
2
2
x
x
CF2
DFC
LPF
VRMSOS[11:0]
VARDIV[7:0]
V
P
CF2DEN[15:0]
PGA2
ADC
VADIV[7:0]
%
%
%
WDIV[7:0]
LPF
V
N
HPF
METERING SFRs
Figure 43. ADC and Signal Processing in Current Channel with PGA1 = 2, 4, 8, or 16
Rev. 0 | Page 44 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Voltage Channel ADC
When in waveform sampling mode, one of four output sample
rates can be chosen by using the DTRT[1:0] bits of the WAVMODE
register (see Table 34). The output sample rate can be 25.6 kSPS,
12.8 kSPS, 6.4 kSPS, or 3.2 kSPS. If the WFSM enable bit is set
in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH, Address 0xDB), the
8052 core has a pending ADE interrupt. The sampled signals
selected in the WAVMODE register are latched into the waveform
SFRs when the waveform high byte (WAV1H or WAV2H) is read.
Figure 44 shows the ADC and signal processing chain for the
voltage channel. In waveform sampling mode, the ADC outputs
a signed, twos complement, 24-bit data-word at a maximum
of 25.6 kSPS (MCLK/160). The ADC produces an output code
that is approximately between 0x28F5 (+10,485d) and 0xD70B
(−10,485d).
Channel Sampling
The ADE interrupt stays active until the WFSM status bit is
cleared (see the Energy Measurement Interrupts section).
The waveform samples of the current ADC and voltage ADC
can also be routed to the waveform registers to be read by the
MCU core. The active, reactive, and apparent power and energy
calculation remain uninterrupted during waveform sampling.
ACTIVE AND REACTIVE
POWER CALCULATION
×1, ×2, ×4,
×8, ×16
{GAIN[7:5]}
REFERENCE
ADC
VOLTAGE RMS (V
)
rms
V
V
P
CALCULATION
HPF
WAVEFORM SAMPLE
REGISTER
PGA2
V2
VOLTAGE PEAK DETECT
N
V2
0.5V, 0.25V,
0.125V, 62.5mV,
31.3mV
ZX DETECTION
LPF1
f–3dB = 63.7Hz
0V
VOLTAGE CHANNEL
WAVEFORM
DATA RANGE
ZX SIGNAL
DATA RANGE FOR 60Hz SIGNAL
0x1DD0
ANALOG
MODE1[6]
0x28F5
INPUT
RANGE
0x0000
0xE230
0x0000
0xD70B
ZX SIGNAL
DATA RANGE FOR 50Hz SIGNAL
0x2037
0x0000
0xDFC9
Figure 44. ADC and Signal Processing in Voltage Channel
Rev. 0 | Page 45 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Fault with Active Input Greater Than Inactive Input
FAULT DETECTION
If IPA is the active current input (that is, being used for billing),
and the voltage signal on IPB (inactive input) falls below 93.75%
of IPA, and the FAULTSIGN bit (Bit 6) of the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is cleared, the FAULTSIGN flag (Bit 5) in the
Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set. Both
analog inputs are filtered and averaged to prevent false
triggering of this logic output. As a consequence of the filtering,
there is a time delay of approximately 3 sec on the logic output
after the fault event. The FAULTSIGN flag is independent of
any activity. Because IPA is the active input and it is still greater
than IPB, billing is maintained on IPA; that is, no swap to the IPB
input occurs. IPA remains the active input.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 incorporate a fault detection scheme
that warns of fault conditions and allows accurate measurement
to continue during a fault event. The ADE5166/ADE5169 do
this by continuously monitoring both current inputs (IPA and IPB).
For ease of understanding, these currents are referred to as phase
and neutral (return) currents. In the ADE5166/ADE5169, a fault
condition is defined when the difference between IPA and IPB is
greater than 6.25% of the active channel. If a fault condition is
detected and the inactive channel is larger than the active channel,
the ADE5166/ADE5169 automatically switch current measure-
ment to the inactive channel. During a fault, the active, reactive,
and apparent power and the Irms are generated using the larger of
the two currents. On power-up, IPA is the current input selected
for active, reactive, and apparent power and IRMS calculations.
Fault with Inactive Input Greater Than Active Input
If the difference between IPB, the inactive input, and IPA, the active
input (that is, being used for billing), becomes greater than 6.25%
of IPB, and the FAULTSIGN bit (Bit 6) of the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is cleared, the FAULTSIGN flag (Bit 5)in the
Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set. The
IPB analog input becomes the active input. Again, a time constant
of about 3 sec is associated with this swap. IPA does not swap back
to the active channel until IPA is greater than IPB and the difference
between IPA and IPB, in this order, becomes greater than 6.25% of
IPB. However, if the FAULTSIGN bit (Bit 6) of the ACCMODE
register (Address 0x0F) is set, the FAULTSIGN flag (Bit 5) in the
Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set as soon
as IPA is within 6.25% of IPB. This threshold eliminates concerns
about potential chatter between IPA and IPB calibration.
To prevent a false alarm, averaging is done for the fault detection,
and a fault condition is detected approximately one second after
the event. The fault detection is automatically disabled when the
voltage signal is less than 0.3% of the full-scale input range. This
eliminates false detection of a fault due to noise at light loads.
Because the ADE5166/ADE5169 look for a difference between
the voltage signals on IPA and IPB, it is important that both current
transducers be closely matched.
Channel Selection Indication
The current channel selected for measurement is indicated by
Bit 7 (ICHANNEL) in the ACCMODE register (Address 0x0F).
When this bit is cleared, IPA is selected and, when it is set, IPB is
selected. The ADE5166/ADE5169 automatically switch from one
channel to the other and report the channel configuration in the
ACCMODE register.
Typically, when a meter is calibrated, the voltage and current
circuits are separated, as shown in Figure 45. Current passes
through only the phase circuit or the neutral circuit. Figure 45
shows current being passed through the phase circuit. This is the
preferred option because the ADE5166/ADE5169 start billing on
the IPA input on power-up. The phase circuit CT is connected to
The current channel selected for measurement can also be forced.
Setting the SEL_I_CH[5:4] bits in the CALMODE register
(Address 0x3D) selects IPA and IPB, respectively. When both bits
are cleared or set, the current channel used for measurement is
selected automatically based on the fault detection.
IPA in the diagram. Because the current sensors are not perfectly
matched, it is important to match current inputs. The ADE5166/
ADE5169 provide a gain calibration register for IPB, IBGAIN
(Address 0x1C). IBGAIN is a 12-bit, signed, twos complement
register that provides a gain resolution of 0.0244%/LSB.
Fault Indication
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide an indication of the part going
in or out of a fault condition. The new fault condition is indicated
by the FAULTSIGN flag (Bit 5) in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR
(MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC).
I
R
F
PA
I
CT
PB
0
R
B
C
C
V
F
F
A
When the FAULTSIGN bit (Bit 6) of the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is cleared, the FAULTSIGN flag in the Interrupt
Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set when the part is
entering a fault condition or a normal condition.
AGND
I
I
N
B
0V
R
B
TEST
CURRENT
CT
When the FAULTSIGN bit (Bit 5) is set in the Interrupt Enable 1
SFR (MIRQENL, Address 0xD9), and the FAULTSIGN flag
(Bit 5) in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC)
is set, the 8052 core has a pending ADE interrupt.
R
F
R
A
V
P
C
R
F
F
V
N
R
C
F
T
V
240V rms
Figure 45. Fault Conditions for Inactive Input Greater Than Active Input
Rev. 0 | Page 46 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
10
0
For calibration, a first measurement should be done on IPA by
setting the SEL_I_CH bits to 0b01 in the CALMODE register
(Address 0x3D). This measurement should be compared to the
measurement on IPB. Measuring IPB can be forced by setting the
SEL_I_CH bits to 0b10 in the CALMODE register (Address 0x3D).
The gain error between these two measurements can be evaluated
using the following equation:
–10
–20
–30
Measurement
(
IB
)
− Measurement
IA
IA
Error(%) =
Measurement
(
)
The two channels, IPA and IPB, can then be matched by writing
–Error(%)/(1 + Error(%)) × 212 to the IBGAIN register
(Address 0x1C). This matching adjustment is valid for all
energy measurements made by the ADE5166/ADE5169,
including active power, reactive power (the ADE5169 only),
–40
–50
100
1000
FREQUENCY (Hz)
Figure 47. Combined Gain Response of the Digital Integrator and
Phase Compensator
apparent power, and Irms
.
–88.0
di/dt CURRENT SENSOR AND DIGITAL INTEGRATOR
(ADE5169)
A di/dt sensor, a feature available for the ADE5169, detects changes
in the magnetic field caused by ac currents. Figure 46 shows the
principle of a di/dt current sensor.
–88.5
–89.0
–89.5
–90.0
–90.5
MAGNETIC FIELD CREATED BY CURRENT
(DIRECTLY PROPORTIONAL TO CURRENT)
+
–
EMF (ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE)
2
3
10
INDUCED BY CHANGES IN
10
MAGNETIC FLUX DENSITY (di/dt)
FREQUENCY (Hz)
Figure 46. Principle of a di/dt Current Sensor
Figure 48. Combined Phase Response of the Digital Integrator and
Phase Compensator
The flux density of a magnetic field induced by a current is directly
proportional to the magnitude of the current. The changes in the
magnetic flux density passing through a conductor loop generate
an electromotive force (EMF) between the two ends of the loop.
The EMF is a voltage signal that is proportional to the di/dt of the
current. The voltage output from the di/dt current sensor is deter-
mined by the mutual inductance between the current-carrying
conductor and the di/dt sensor. The current signal needs to be
recovered from the di/dt signal before it can be used. An integrator
is, therefore, necessary to restore the signal to its original form.
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
–2.5
–3.0
–3.5
–4.0
–4.5
–5.0
–5.5
–6.0
The ADE5169 has a built-in digital integrator to recover the
current signal from the di/dt sensor. The digital integrator on
the current channel is switched off by default when the ADE5169
is powered up. Setting the INTE bit (Bit 5) in the MODE1 register
(Address 0x0B) turns on the integrator. Figure 47 to Figure 50
show the gain and phase response of the digital integrator.
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
FREQUENCY (Hz)
Figure 49. Combined Gain Response of the Digital Integrator and
Phase Compensator (40 Hz to 70 Hz)
Rev. 0 | Page 47 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
–89.70
–89.75
–89.80
–89.85
–89.90
–89.95
–90.00
the analog input signal V2 and the output of LPF1. The phase
lag response of LPF1 results in a time delay of approximately
2 ms (@ 60 Hz) between the zero crossing on the analog inputs
of the voltage channel and ZX detection.
×1, ×2, ×4,
×8, ×16
REFERENCE
V
{GAIN[7:5]}
PGA2
P
N
HPF
ADC 2
V2
V
ZERO
CROSSING
ZX
LPF1
f–3dB = 63.7Hz
–90.05
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
FREQUENCY (Hz)
MODE1[6]
Figure 50. Combined Phase Response of the Digital Integrator and
Phase Compensator (40 Hz to 70 Hz)
43.24° @ 60Hz
1.0
0.73
ZX
Note that the integrator has a −20 dB/dec attenuation and an
approximately −90° phase shift. When combined with a di/dt
sensor, the resulting magnitude and phase response should be
a flat gain over the frequency band of interest. The di/dt sensor
has a 20 dB/dec gain associated with it. It also generates significant
high frequency noise. Therefore, a more effective antialiasing
filter is needed to avoid noise due to aliasing (see the Antialiasing
Filter section).
LPF1
V2
Figure 51. Zero-Crossing Detection on the Voltage Channel
The zero-crossing detection also drives the ZX flag in the
Interrupt Status 3 SFR (MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE). If the ZX
bit in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH, Address 0xDB)
is set, the 8052 core has a pending ADE interrupt. The ADE
interrupt stays active until the ZX status bit is cleared (see the
Energy Measurement Interrupts section).
When the digital integrator is switched off, the ADE5169 can be
used directly with a conventional current sensor, such as a current
transformer (CT), or with a low resistance current shunt.
Zero-Crossing Timeout
POWER QUALITY MEASUREMENTS
The zero-crossing detection also has an associated timeout
register, ZXTOUT. This unsigned, 12-bit register is decremented
(1 LSB) every 160/MCLK seconds. The register is reset to its
user programmed, full-scale value every time a zero crossing is
Zero-Crossing Detection
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 has a zero-crossing detection circuit
on the voltage channel. This external zero-crossing signal can be
output on P0.5 and P1.2 (see Table 38). It is also used in calibra-
tion mode.
detected on the voltage channel. The default power-on value in
this register is 0xFFF. If the internal register decrements to 0
before a zero crossing is detected in the Interrupt Status 3 SFR
(MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE), and the ZXTO bit (Bit 1) in the
Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH, Address 0xDB) is set, the
8052 core has a pending ADE interrupt.
The zero crossing is generated by default from the output of LPF1.
This filter has a low cutoff frequency and is intended for 50 Hz
and 60 Hz systems. If needed, this filter can be disabled to allow
a higher frequency signal to be detected or to limit the group delay
of the detection. If the voltage input fundamental frequency is
below 60 Hz, and a time delay in ZX detection is acceptable, it
is recommended that LPF1 be enabled. Enabling LPF1 limits the
variability in the ZX detection by eliminating the high frequency
components. Figure 51 shows how the zero-crossing signal is
generated.
The ADE interrupt stays active until the ZXTO status bit is
cleared (see the Energy Measurement Interrupts section). The
ZXTOUT register (Address 0x11) can be written to or read by
the user (see the Energy Measurement Registers section). The
resolution of the register is 160/MCLK seconds per LSB. Thus,
the maximum delay for an interrupt is 0.16 seconds (1/MCLK ×
212) when MCLK = 4.096 MHz.
The zero-crossing signal, ZX, is generated from the output of
LPF1 (bypassed or not). LPF1 has a single pole at 63.7 Hz (at
MCLK = 4.096 MHz). As a result, there is a phase lag between
Rev. 0 | Page 48 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Figure 52 shows the mechanism of the zero-crossing timeout
detection when the line voltage stays at a fixed dc level for more
than MCLK/160 × ZXTOUT seconds.
VOLTAGE CHANNEL
FULL SCALE
SAGLVL[15:0]
12-BIT INTERNAL
REGISTER VALUE
ZXTOUT
SAG IS RESET LOW
WHEN VOLTAGE
CHANNEL EXCEEDS
SAGLVL[15:0] AND
SAG FLAG IS RESET
SAGCYC[7:0] = 0x04
3 LINE CYCLES
SAG FLAG
VOLTAGE
CHANNEL
Figure 53. SAG Detection
Figure 53 shows the line voltage falling below a threshold that
is set in the SAG level register (SAGLVL[15:0], Address 0x14)
for three line cycles. The quantities 0 and 1 are not valid for the
SAGCYC register, and the contents represent one more than the
desired number of full line cycles. For example, when the SAG
cycle (SAGCYC[7:0], Address 0x13) contains 0x04, FSAG (Bit 5) in
the power management interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8)
is set at the end of the third line cycle after the line voltage falls
below the threshold. If the SAG enable bit (ESAG, Bit 5) in the
power management interrupt enable SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC)
is set, the 8052 core has a pending power supply management
interrupt. The PSM interrupt stays active until the ESAG bit is
cleared (see the Power Supply Management (PSM) Interrupt
section).
ZXTO
FLAG
BIT
Figure 52. Zero-Crossing Timeout Detection
Period or Frequency Measurements
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide the period or frequency measure-
ment of the line. The period or frequency measurement is selected
by clearing or setting the FREQSEL bit (Bit 1) in the MODE2 reg-
ister (Address 0x0C). The period/frequency register, PER_FREQ
(Address 0x0A), is an unsigned 16-bit register that is updated
every period. If LPF1 is enabled, a settling time of 1.8 sec is
associated with this filter before the measurement is stable.
When the period measurement is selected, the measurement has a
2.44 μs/LSB (4.096 MHz/10) resolution, which represents 0.014%
when the line frequency is 60 Hz. When the line frequency is
60 Hz, the value of the period register is approximately 0d6827.
The length of the register enables the measurement of line fre-
quencies as low as 12.5 Hz. The period register is stable at 1 LSB
when the line is established, and the measurement does not change.
In Figure 53, the SAG flag (FSAG) is set on the fifth line cycle
after the signal on the voltage channel first dropped below the
threshold level.
SAG Level Set
The 2-byte contents of the SAG level register (SAGLVL,
Address 0x14) are compared to the absolute value of the output
from LPF1. Therefore, when LPF1 is enabled, writing 0x2038 to the
SAG level register puts the SAG detection level at full scale (see
Figure 53). Writing 0x00 or 0x01 puts the SAG detection level
at 0. The SAG level register is compared to the input of the ZX
detection, and detection is made when the ZX input falls below the
contents of the SAG level register.
When the frequency measurement is selected, the measurement
has a 0.0625 Hz/LSB resolution when MCLK = 4.096 MHz, which
represents 0.104% when the line frequency is 60 Hz. When the
line frequency is 60 Hz, the value of the frequency register is 0d960.
The frequency register is stable at 4 LSB when the line is estab-
lished, and the measurement does not change.
Line Voltage SAG Detection
In addition to detection of the loss of the line voltage signal
(zero crossing), the ADE5166/ADE5169 can also be programmed
to detect when the absolute value of the line voltage drops
below a certain peak value for a number of line cycles. This
condition is illustrated in Figure 53.
Rev. 0 | Page 49 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Peak Detection
from the corresponding channel is above the value stored in the
IPEAK or VPEAK register. The contents of the VPEAK register
correspond to the maximum absolute value observed on the
voltage channel input. The contents of IPEAK and VPEAK
represent the maximum absolute value observed on the current
and voltage input, respectively. Reading the RSTIPEAK
(Address 0x18) and RSTVPEAK (Address 0x17) registers clears
their respective contents after the read operation.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 can also be programmed to detect when
the absolute value of the voltage or current channel exceeds a
specified peak value. Figure 54 illustrates the behavior of the
peak detection for the voltage channel. Both voltage and current
channels are monitored at the same time.
V
2
VPKLVL[15:0]
PHASE COMPENSATION
The ADE5166/ADE5169 must work with transducers that can
have inherent phase errors. For example, a phase error of 0.1° to
0.3° is not uncommon for a current transformer (CT). These phase
errors can vary from part to part, and they must be corrected to
perform accurate power calculations. The errors associated with
phase mismatch are particularly noticeable at low power factors.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide a means of digitally calibrating
these small phase errors. The part allows a small time delay or
time advance to be introduced into the signal processing chain
to compensate for small phase errors. Because the compensation
is in time, this technique should be used only for small phase
errors in the range of 0.1° to 0.5°. Correcting large phase errors
using a time shift technique can introduce significant phase errors
at higher harmonics.
PKV RESET
LOW WHEN
MIRQSTH SFR
IS READ
PKV INTERRUPT
FLAG
RESET BIT PKV
IN MIRQSTH SFR
Figure 54. Peak Level Detection
Figure 54 shows a line voltage exceeding a threshold that is set
in the voltage peak register (VPKLVL[15:0], Address 0x16). The
voltage peak event is recorded by setting the PKV flag in the
Interrupt Status 3 SFR (MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE). If the PKV
enable bit (Bit 3) is set in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH,
Address 0xDB), the 8052 core has a pending ADE interrupt.
Similarly, the current peak event is recorded by setting the PKI flag
(Bit 4) in Interrupt Status 3 SFR (MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE). The
ADE interrupt stays active until the PKV or PKI status bit is cleared
(see the Energy Measurement Interrupts section).
The phase calibration register (PHCAL[7:0], Address 0x10) is a
twos complement, signed, single-byte register that has values
ranging from 0x82 (−126d) to 0x68 (+104d).
The PHCAL register is centered at 0x40, meaning that writing
0x40 to the register gives 0 delay. By changing this register, the
time delay in the voltage channel signal path can change from
−231.93 μs to +48.83 μs (MCLK = 4.096 MHz). One LSB is equiv-
alent to a 1.22 μs (4.096 MHz/5) time delay or advance. A line
frequency of 60 Hz gives a phase resolution of 0.026° at the
fundamental (that is, 360° × 1.22 μs × 60 Hz).
Peak Level Set
The contents of the VPKLVL (Address 0x16) and IPKLVL
(Address 0x15) registers are compared to the absolute value of the
voltage and 2 MSBs of the current channel, respectively. Thus,
for example, the nominal maximum code from the current channel
ADC with a full-scale signal is 0x28F5C2 (see the Current Channel
ADC section). Therefore, writing 0x28F5 to the IPKLVL register
puts the current channel, peak detection level at full scale and
sets the current peak detection to its least sensitive value. Writing
0x00 puts the current channel detection level at 0. The detection
is done by comparing the contents of the IPKLVL register to the
incoming current channel sample. The PKI flag indicates that
the peak level is exceeded. If the PKI or PKV bit is set in the
Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH, Address 0xDB), the 8052
core has a pending ADE interrupt.
Figure 55 illustrates how the phase compensation is used to
remove a 0.1° phase lead in the current channel due to the
external transducer. To cancel the lead (0.1°) in the current
channel, a phase lead must also be introduced into the voltage
channel. The resolution of the phase adjustment allows the
introduction of a phase lead in increments of 0.026°. The phase
lead is achieved by introducing a time advance into the voltage
channel. A time advance of 4.88 μs is made by writing −4 (0x3C)
to the time delay block, thus reducing the amount of time delay
by 4.88 μs, or equivalently, a phase lead of approximately 0.1° at a
line frequency of 60 Hz (0x3C represents −4 because the register is
centered with 0 at 0x40).
Peak Level Record
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 records the maximum absolute value
reached by the current and voltage channels in two different
registers, IPEAK (Address 0x17) and VPEAK (Address 0x19),
respectively. Each register is a 24-bit unsigned register that is
updated each time the absolute value of the waveform sample
Rev. 0 | Page 50 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
I
/I
PA
HPF
P
This LPF has a −3 dB cutoff frequency of 2 Hz when MCLK =
4.096 MHz.
24
PGA1
ADC 1
I
I
N
LPF2
24
V
(
t
)
=
2 ×V sin(ωt)
where V is the rms voltage.
V 2 (t) =V 2 −V 2 cos
2ωt
(2)
(3)
V
P
CHANNEL 2 DELAY
REDUCED BY 4.48µs
(0.1°LEAD AT 60Hz)
0x0B IN PHCAL[7:0]
1
DELAY BLOCK
1.22µs/LSB
PGA2
V
V
ADC 2
0.1°
(
)
V
N
7
1
0
When this signal goes through LPF3, the cos(2ωt) term is attenu-
ated and only the dc term, Vrms2 (shown as V2 in Figure 56), goes
through.
V
I
0
0 1 0 1 1 1
PHCAL[7:0]
–231.93µs TO +48.83µs
I
2
2
2
V
(t) = V – V cos(2ωt)
60Hz
V(t) = √2 × V sin(ωt)
60Hz
LPF3
Figure 55. Phase Calibration
INPUT
V
RMS CALCULATION
The root mean square (rms) value of a continuous signal V(t) is
defined as
2
2
(t) = V
V
Figure 56. RMS Signal Processing
T
The Irms signal can be read from the waveform register by set-
ting the WAVMODE register (Address 0x0D) and setting the
WFSM bit (Bit 5) in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH,
Address 0xDB). Like the current and voltage channels waveform
sampling modes, the waveform data is available at sample rates of
25.6 kSPS, 12.8 kSPS, 6.4 kSPS, and 3.2 kSPS.
1
Vrms
=
× V 2 (t)dt
(1)
∫
T
0
For time sampling signals, rms calculation involves squaring the
signal, taking the average, and obtaining the square root. The
ADE5166/ADE5169 implement this method by serially squaring
the input, averaging them, and then taking the square root of
the average. The averaging part of this signal processing is done
by implementing a low-pass filter (LPF3 in Figure 56, Figure 57,
and Figure 58).
It is important to note that when the current input is larger than
40% of full scale, the Irms waveform sample register does not
represent the true processed rms value. The rms value processed
with this level of input is larger than the 24-bit read by the wave-
form register, making the value read truncated on the high end.
Rev. 0 | Page 51 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Current Channel RMS Calculation
accurate to within 0.5% for signal inputs between full scale and
full scale/500. The conversion from the register value to amps
must be done externally in the microprocessor using an amps/LSB
constant.
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 simultaneously calculates the rms values
for the current and voltage channels in different registers. Figure 57
shows the detail of the signal processing chain for the rms calcula-
tion on the current channel. The current channel rms value is
processed from the samples used in the current channel waveform
sampling mode and is stored in an unsigned 24-bit register (Irms).
One LSB of the current channel rms register is equivalent to 1 LSB
of a current channel waveform sample.
Current Channel RMS Offset Compensation
The ADE5166/ADE5169 incorporate a current channel rms offset
compensation register (IRMSOS). This is a 12-bit signed register
that can be used to remove offset in the current channel rms
calculation. An offset can exist in the rms calculation due to
input noises that are integrated into the dc component of V2(t).
The update rate of the current channel rms measurement is
4.096 MHz/5. To minimize noise in the reading of the register, the
Irms register can also be configured to update only with the zero
crossing of the voltage input. This configuration is done by setting
the ZXRMS bit (Bit 2) in the MODE2 register (Address 0x0C).
One LSB of the current channel rms offset is equivalent to
16,384 LSBs of the square of the current channel rms register.
Assuming that the maximum value from the current channel
rms calculation is 0d1,898,124 with full-scale ac inputs, then
1 LSB of the current channel rms offset represents 0.23% of
measurement error at −60 dB down from full scale.
With the different specified full-scale analog input values, the ADC
produces an output code that is approximately 0d2,684,354 (see
the Current Channel ADC section). Similarly, the equivalent rms
value of a full-scale ac signal is 0d1,898,124 (0x1CF68C). The cur-
rent rms measurement provided in the ADE5166/ ADE5169 is
2
(4)
Irms
=
Irms + IRMSOS ×32,768
0
where Irms0 is the rms measurement without offset correction.
CURRENT CHANNEL
WAVEFORM
60Hz
DATA RANGE WITH
INTEGRATOR ON (60Hz)
0x2B7850
0x000000
0xD487B0
IRMSOS[11:0]
25 26 27 18 17 16
I
(t)
rms
MODE1[5]
sgn 2
2
2
2
2
2
HPF
I
I
0x00
DIGITAL
INTEGRATOR*
PA
PB
HPF1
LPF3
+
24
24
I
[23:0]
rms
dt
HPF
CURRENT CHANNEL
IBGAIN
WAVEFORM
DATA RANGE WITH
INTEGRATOR OFF
0x28F5C2
0x000000
0xD70A3E
NOTES:
1. WHEN DIGITAL INTEGRATOR IS ENABLED, FULL-SCALE OUTPUT DATA IS ATTENUATED DEPENDING ON THE SIGNAL
FREQUENCY BECAUSE THE INTEGRATOR HAS A –20dB/DECADE FREQUENCY RESPONSE. WHEN DISABLED, THE
OUTPUT IS NOT FURTHER ATTENUATED.
Figure 57. Current Channel RMS Signal Processing with PGA1 = 2, 4, 8, or 16
VOLTAGE SIGNAL (V(t))
VRMSOS[11:0]
0x28F5
0x0
16 15
8
7
6
2
sgn 2
2
2
2
V
(t)
rmsx
0xD70B
0x28F5C2
0x00
LPF3
LPF1
+
+
|
|
X
VOLTAGE CHANNEL
V
[23:0]
rmsx
Figure 58. Voltage Channel RMS Signal Processing
Rev. 0 | Page 52 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
The average power over an integral number of line cycles (n) is
given by the expression in Equation 9.
Voltage Channel RMS Calculation
Figure 58 shows details of the signal processing chain for the
rms calculation on the voltage channel. This voltage rms esti-
mation is done in the ADE5166/ADE5169 using the mean
absolute value calculation, as shown in Figure 58. The voltage
channel rms value is processed from the samples used in the
voltage channel waveform sampling mode and is stored in the
unsigned 24-bit Vrms register.
1
nT
P =
nT p(t)dt = VI
(9)
∫
0
where:
T is the line cycle period.
P is referred to as the active or real power.
Note that the active power is equal to the dc component of the
instantaneous power signal p(t) in Equation 9, that is, VI. This
is the relationship used to calculate active power in the ADE5166/
ADE5169. The instantaneous power signal p(t) is generated by
multiplying the current and voltage signals. The dc component of
the instantaneous power signal is then extracted by LPF2 (low-pass
filter) to obtain the active power information (see Figure 59).
INSTANTANEOUS
The update rate of the voltage channel rms measurement is
MCLK/5. To minimize noise in the reading of the register, the
Vrms register can also be configured to update only with the zero
crossing of the voltage input. This configuration is done by setting
the ZXRMS bit (Bit 2) in the MODE2 register (Address 0x0C).
With the specified full-scale ac analog input signal of 0.5 V, the
output from the LPF1 in Figure 58 swings between 0x28F5 and
0xD70B at 60 Hz (see the Voltage Channel ADC section). The
equivalent rms value of this full-scale ac signal is approximately
0d1,898,124 (0x1CF68C) in the Vrms register. The voltage rms
measurement provided in the ADE5166/ADE5169 is accurate to
within 0.5ꢀ for signal input between full scale and full scale/20.
The conversion from the register value to volts must be done
externally in the microprocessor using a V/LSB constant.
p(t) = v × i – v × i × cos(2ωt)
POWER SIGNAL
0x19999A
ACTIVE REAL POWER
SIGNAL = v × i
VI
0xCCCCD
Voltage Channel RMS Offset Compensation
0x00000
The ADE5166/ADE5169 incorporate a voltage channel rms
offset compensation register (VRMSOS). This is a 12-bit signed
register that can be used to remove offset in the voltage channel
rms calculation. An offset can exist in the rms calculation due
to input noises and dc offset in the input samples. One LSB of
the voltage channel rms offset is equivalent to 64 LSBs of the
rms register. Assuming that the maximum value from the
voltage channel rms calculation is 0d1,898,124 with full-scale ac
inputs, then 1 LSB of the voltage channel rms offset represents
3.37ꢀ of measurement error at −60 dB down of full scale.
CURRENT
i(t) = √2 × i × sin(ωt)
VOLTAGE
v(t) = √2 × v × sin(ωt)
Figure 59. Active Power Calculation
Because LPF2 does not have an ideal brick wall frequency response
(see Figure 60), the active power signal has some ripple due to
the instantaneous power signal. This ripple is sinusoidal and has
a frequency equal to twice the line frequency. Because of its
sinusoidal nature, the ripple is removed when the active power
signal is integrated to calculate energy (see the Active Energy
Calculation section).
V
rms = Vrms0 + 64 × VRMSOS
(5)
where Vrms0 is the rms measurement without offset correction.
0
ACTIVE POWER CALCULATION
Active power is defined as the rate of energy flow from source
to load. It is the product of the voltage and current waveforms.
The resulting waveform is called the instantaneous power signal
and is equal to the rate of energy flow at every instant of time.
The unit of power is the watt or joules/second. Equation 8 gives an
expression for the instantaneous power signal in an ac system.
–4
–8
–12
–16
–20
v
(
t
)
=
2 ×V sin(ωt)
(6)
(7)
i t = 2 × I sin(ωt)
( )
where:
v is the rms voltage.
i is the rms current.
–24
1
3
10
30
100
FREQUENCY (Hz)
Figure 60. Frequency Response of LPF2
p(t) = v(t)× i(t)
p(t) = VI −VI cos(2ωt)
(8)
Rev. 0 | Page 53 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Active Power Gain Calibration
Active Power Sign Detection
Figure 61 shows the signal processing chain for the active power
calculation in the ADE5166/ADE5169. As explained previously,
the active power is calculated by filtering the output of the multi-
plier with a low-pass filter. Note that, when reading the waveform
samples from the output of LPF2, the gain of the active energy
can be adjusted by using the multiplier and watt gain register
(WGAIN[11:0], Address 0x1D). The gain is adjusted by writing
a twos complement 12-bit word to the watt gain register.
Equation 10 shows how the gain adjustment is related to the
contents of the watt gain register.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 can detect a change of sign in the active
power. The APSIGN flag (Bit 3) in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR
(MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) records when a change of sign has
occurred according to the APSIGN bit (Bit 4) in the ACCMODE
register (Address 0x0F). If the APSIGN flag (Bit 3)is set in the
Interrupt Enable 1 SFR (MIRQENL, Address 0xD9), the 8052 core
has a pending ADE interrupt. The ADE interrupt stays active until
the APSIGN status bit is cleared (see the Energy Measurement
Interrupts section).
When APSIGN (Bit 4) in the ACCMODE register (Address 0x0F)
is cleared (default), the APSIGN flag (Bit 3) in the Interrupt
Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set when a transition
from positive to negative active power occurs.
⎛
⎞
WGAIN
212
⎧
⎫
⎬
⎭
⎜
⎟
⎟
Output WGAIN = Active Power × 1+
(10)
⎨
⎜
⎩
⎝
⎠
For example, when 0x7FF is written to the watt gain register, the
power output is scaled up by 50% (0x7FF = 2047d, 2047/212 = 0.5).
Similarly, 0x800 = −2048d (signed, twos complement) and power
output is scaled by –50%. Each LSB scales the power output by
0.0244%. The minimum output range is given when the watt gain
register contents are equal to 0x800, and the maximum range is
given by writing 0x7FF to the watt gain register. This can be used
to calibrate the active power (or energy) calculation in the
ADE5166/ADE5169.
When the APSIGN bit (Bit 4) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is set, the APSIGN flag (Bit 3) in the MIRQSTL
SFR (Address 0xDC) is set when a transition from negative to
positive active power occurs.
Active Power No Load Detection
The ADE5166/ADE5169 include a no load threshold feature on
the active energy that eliminates any creep effects in the meter.
The part accomplishes this by not accumulating energy if the
multiplier output is below the no load threshold. When the active
power is below the no load threshold, the APNOLOAD flag (Bit 0)
in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set.
If the APNOLOAD bit (Bit 0) is set in the Interrupt Enable 1 SFR
(MIRQENL, Address 0xD9), the 8052 core has a pending ADE
interrupt. The ADE interrupt stays active until the APNOLOAD
status bit is cleared (see the Energy Measurement Interrupts
section).
Active Power Offset Calibration
The ADE5166/ADE5169 also incorporate an active power offset
register (WATTOS[15:0], Address 0x20). It is a signed, twos com-
plement, 16-bit register that can be used to remove offsets in the
active power calculation (see Figure 59). An offset can exist in the
power calculation due to crosstalk between channels on the PCB
or in the IC itself. The offset calibration allows the contents of the
active power register to be maintained at 0 when no power is being
consumed.
The no load threshold level is selectable by setting the
APNOLOAD bits (Bits[1:0]) in the NLMODE register
(Address 0x0E). Setting these bits to 0b00 disables the no load
detection, and setting them to 0b01, 0b10, or 0b11 sets the no load
detection threshold to 0.015%, 0.0075%, or 0.0037% of the multi-
plier full-scale output frequency, respectively. The IEC 62053-21
specification states that the meter must start up with a load of
≤0.4% IPB, which translates to 0.0167% of the full-scale output
frequency of the multiplier.
The 256 LSBs (WATTOS = 0x0100) written to the active power
offset register are equivalent to 1 LSB in the waveform sample
register. Assuming the average value, output from LPF2 is
0xCCCCD (838,861d) when inputs on the voltage and current
channels are both at full scale. At −60 dB down on the current
channel (1/1000 of the current channel full-scale input), the
average word value output from LPF2 is 838.861 (838,861/1000).
One LSB in the LPF2 output has a measurement error of
1/838.861 × 100% = 0.119% of the average value. The active
power offset register has a resolution equal to 1/256 LSB of
the waveform register. Therefore, the power offset correction
resolution is 0.000464%/LSB (0.119%/256) at −60 dB.
Rev. 0 | Page 54 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
The active energy accumulation depends on the setting of
POAM (Bit 1) and ABSAM (Bit 0) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F). When both bits are cleared, the addition is signed
and, therefore, negative energy is subtracted from the active
energy contents. When both bits are set, the ADE5166/ADE5169
are set to be in the more restrictive mode, the positive-only
accumulation mode.
ACTIVE ENERGY CALCULATION
As stated in the Active Power Calculation section, power is
defined as the rate of energy flow. This relationship can be
expressed mathematically, as shown in Equation 11.
dE
P =
(11)
(12)
dt
where:
P is power.
E is energy.
When POAM (Bit 1) in the ACCMODE register (Address 0x0F)
is set, only positive power contributes to the active energy accumu-
lation. When ABSAM (Bit 0) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is set, the absolute active power is used for the
active energy accumulation (see the Watt-Absolute Accumulation
Mode section).
Conversely, energy is given as the integral of power.
E = P(t)dt
∫
The ADE5166/ADE5169 achieve the integration of the active
power signal by continuously accumulating the active power signal
in an internal, nonreadable, 49-bit energy register. The register
(WATTHR[23:0], Address 0x01) represents the upper 24 bits
of this internal register. This discrete time accumulation or
summation is equivalent to integration in continuous time.
Equation 13 expresses the relationship.
The output of the multiplier is divided by the value in the WDIV
register (Address 0x24). If the value in the WDIV register is equal
to 0, the internal active energy register is divided by 1. WDIV is an
8-bit, unsigned register. After dividing by WDIV, the active energy
is accumulated in a 49-bit internal energy accumulation register.
The upper 24 bits of this register are accessible through a read
to the active energy register (WATTHR[23:0], Address 0x01).
A read to the RWATTHR register (Address 0x02) returns the
contents of the WATTHR register, and the upper 24 bits of the
internal register are cleared. As shown in Figure 61, the active
power signal is accumulated in an internal 49-bit signed register.
The active power signal can be read from the waveform register
by setting the WAVMODE register (Address 0x0D) and setting
the WFSM bit (Bit 5) in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH,
Address 0xDB). Like the current and voltage channels waveform
sampling modes, the waveform data is available at sample rates of
25.6 kSPS, 12.8 kSPS, 6.4 kSPS, and 3.2 kSPS.
∞
⎧
⎫
⎬
⎭
(13)
E = p(t)dt = lim
p(nT)×T
t→0 ⎨∑
∫
n=1
⎩
where:
n is the discrete time sample number.
T is the sample period.
The discrete time sample period (T) for the accumulation
register in the ADE5166/ADE5169 is 1.22 μs (5/MCLK). In
addition to calculating the energy, this integration removes any
sinusoidal components that may be in the active power signal.
Figure 61 shows this discrete time integration or accumulation.
The active power signal in the waveform register is continuously
added to the internal active energy register.
UPPER 24 BITS ARE
ACCESSIBLE THROUGH
WATTHR[23:0] REGISTER
FOR WAVEFORM
SAMPLING
WATTHR[23:0]
23
0
WATTOS[15:0]
6
5
–6 –7 –8
2 2 2
sgn
2
2
WDIV[7:0]
CURRENT
CHANNEL
LPF2
48
0
+
+
+
%
+
VOLTAGE
CHANNEL
WGAIN[11:0]
OUTPUTS FROM THE LPF2 ARE
ACCUMULATED (INTEGRATED) IN
ACTIVE POWER
SIGNAL
THE INTERNAL ACTIVE ENERGY REGISTER
TO
DIGITAL-TO-FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
5
T
MCLK
WAVEFORM
REGISTER
VALUES
TIME (nT)
Figure 61. Active Energy Calculation
Rev. 0 | Page 55 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Figure 62 shows this energy accumulation for full-scale signals
(sinusoidal) on the analog inputs. The three displayed curves
illustrate the minimum period of time it takes the energy register
to roll over when the active power gain register contents are
0x7FF, 0x000, and 0x800. The watt gain register is used to carry
out power calibration in the ADE5166/ADE5169. As shown, the
fastest integration time occurs when the watt gain register is set to
maximum full scale, that is, 0x7FF.
When WDIV is set to a value other than 0, the integration time
varies, as shown in Equation 15.
Time = TimeWDIV = 0 × WDIV
(15)
Active Energy Accumulation Modes
Watt-Signed Accumulation Mode
The ADE5166/ADE5169 active energy default accumulation
mode is a watt-signed accumulation based on the active power
information.
WATTHR[23:0]
0x7F,FFFF
Watt Positive-Only Accumulation Mode
WGAIN = 0x7FF
WGAIN = 0x000
WGAIN = 0x800
The ADE5166/ADE5169 are placed in watt positive-only accumu-
lation mode by setting the POAM bit (Bit 1) in the ACCMODE
register (Address 0x0F). In this mode, the energy accumulation
is done only for positive power, ignoring any occurrence of
negative power above or below the no load threshold (see
Figure 63). The CF pulse also reflects this accumulation method
when in this mode. The default setting for this mode is off.
Detection of the transitions in the direction of power flow and
detection of no load threshold are active in this mode.
0x3F,FFFF
0x00,0000
0x40,0000
TIME (Minutes)
13.7
3.41
6.82
10.2
0x80,0000
Figure 62. Energy Register Rollover Time for Full-Scale Power
(Minimum and Maximum Power Gain)
Note that the energy register contents roll over to full-scale negative
(0x800000) and continue to increase in value when the power or
energy flow is positive (see Figure 62). Conversely, if the power is
negative, the energy register underflows to full-scale positive
(0x7FFFFF) and continues to decrease in value.
ACTIVE ENERGY
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
Using the interrupt enable register (MIRQENM, Address 0xDA),
the ADE5166/ADE5169 can be configured to issue an ADE
interrupt to the 8052 core when the active energy register is half
full (positive or negative) or when an overflow or underflow
occurs.
ACTIVE POWER
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
APSIGN FLAG
Integration Time Under Steady Load: Active Energy
POS NEG POS
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTERS
As mentioned in the Active Energy Calculation section, the
discrete time sample period (T) for the accumulation register
is 1.22 μs (5/MCLK). With full-scale sinusoidal signals on the
analog inputs and the WGAIN register (Address 0x1D) set to
0x000, the average word value from each LPF2 is 0xCCCCD
(see Figure 59). The maximum positive value that can be stored in
the internal 49-bit register is 248 (or 0xFFFF,FFFF,FFFF) before it
overflows. The integration time under these conditions when
WDIV = 0 is calculated in the following equation:
Figure 63. Energy Accumulation in Positive-Only Accumulation Mode
Watt-Absolute Accumulation Mode
The ADE5166/ADE5169 are placed in watt-absolute accumulation
mode by setting the ABSAM bit (Bit 0) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F). In this mode, the energy accumulation is done
using the absolute active power, ignoring any occurrence of power
below the no load threshold (see Figure 64). The CF pulse also
reflects this accumulation method when in this mode. The default
setting for this mode is off. Detection of the transitions in the
direction of power flow and detection of no load threshold are
active in this mode.
Time =
0xFFFF,FFFF,FFFF
×1.22ꢁs = 409.6sec = 6.82min (14)
0xCCCCD
Rev. 0 | Page 56 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Line Cycle Active Energy Accumulation Mode
In line cycle active energy accumulation mode, the energy accumu-
lation of the ADE5166/ADE5169 can be synchronized to the
voltage channel zero crossing so that active energy can be
accumulated over an integral number of half-line cycles. The
advantage of summing the active energy over an integer number
of line cycles is that the sinusoidal component in the active energy
is reduced to 0. This eliminates any ripple in the energy calculation.
Energy is calculated more accurately and more quickly because
the integration period can be shortened. By using this mode,
the energy calibration can be greatly simplified, and the time
required to calibrate the meter can be significantly reduced.
ACTIVE ENERGY
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
ACTIVE POWER
NO LOAD
In the line cycle active energy accumulation mode, the ADE5166/
ADE5169 accumulate the active power signal in the LWATTHR
register (Address 0x03) for an integral number of line cycles, as
shown in Figure 65. The number of half-line cycles is specified in
the LINCYC register (Address 0x12).
THRESHOLD
APSIGN FLAG
APNOLOAD
POS
NEG POS
APNOLOAD
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTERS
The ADE5166/ADE5169 can accumulate active power for up to
65,535 half-line cycles. Because the active power is integrated
on an integral number of line cycles, the CYCEND flag (Bit 2) in
the Interrupt Status 3 SFR (MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE) is set at the
end of an active energy accumulation line cycle. If the CYCEND
enable bit (Bit 2) in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH,
Address 0xDB) is set, the 8052 core has a pending ADE interrupt.
The ADE interrupt stays active until the CYCEND status bit is
cleared (see the Energy Measurement Interrupts section). Another
calibration cycle starts as soon as the CYCEND flag is set. If the
LWATTHR register (Address 0x03) is not read before a new
CYCEND flag is set, the LWATTHR register is overwritten by
a new value.
Figure 64. Energy Accumulation in Absolute Accumulation Mode
Active Energy Pulse Output
All of the ADE5166/ADE5169 circuitry has a pulse output whose
frequency is proportional to active power (see the Active Power
Calculation section). This pulse frequency output uses the
calibrated signal from the WGAIN register (Address 0x1D)
output, and its behavior is consistent with the setting of the
active energy accumulation mode in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F). The pulse output is active low and should
preferably be connected to an LED, as shown in Figure 75.
TO
DIGITAL-TO-FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
WGAIN[11:0]
48
0
+
OUTPUT
FROM
LPF2
+
%
WATTOS[15:0]
WDIV[7:0]
ACCUMULATE
ACTIVE ENERGY IN
INTERNAL REGISTER
AND UPDATE THE
LWATTHR REGISTER
AT THE END OF LINCYC
HALF-LINE CYCLES
23
0
LPF1
LWATTHR[23:0]
FROM VOLTAGE
CHANNEL
ADC
ZERO-CROSSING
DETECTION
CALIBRATION
CONTROL
LINCYC[15:0]
Figure 65. Line Cycle Active Energy Accumulation
Rev. 0 | Page 57 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
When a new half-line cycle is written in the LINCYC register
(Address 0x12), the LWATTHR register (Address 0x03) is reset,
and a new accumulation starts at the next zero crossing. The
number of half-line cycles is then counted until LINCYC is
reached. This implementation provides a valid measurement at
the first CYCEND interrupt after writing to the LINCYC register
(see Figure 66). The line active energy accumulation uses the
same signal path as the active energy accumulation. The LSB
size of these two registers is equivalent.
v(t) = 2 V sin(ωt +θ)
i(t) = 2 I sin(ωt)
(19)
(20)
π
2
⎛
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎠
′
i (t) = 2 I sin ωt +
⎜
where:
θ is the phase difference between the voltage and current channel.
v is the rms voltage.
i is the rms current.
q(t) = v(t) × i’(t)
(21)
LWATTHR REGISTER
CYCEND IRQ
q(t) = VI sin (θ) + VI sin(2ωt + θ)
The average reactive power over an integral number of lines (n)
is given in Equation 22.
nT
1
nT
Q =
q(t)dt = VI sin(θ)
(22)
∫
LINCYC
VALUE
0
Figure 66. Energy Accumulation When LINCYC Changes
where:
T is the line cycle period.
q is referred to as the reactive power.
Using the information from Equation 8 and Equation 9
⎧
⎪
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎪
⎩
⎫
⎪
⎪
⎬
⎪
⎪
⎭
Note that the reactive power is equal to the dc component of
the instantaneous reactive power signal, q(t), in Equation 21.
nT
nT
VI
E
(
t
)
= VIdt −
cos
(
2πft
)
dt
(16)
∫
∫
2
0
0
The instantaneous reactive power signal, q(t), is generated by
multiplying the voltage and current channels. In this case, the
phase of the current channel is shifted by 90°. The dc component of
the instantaneous reactive power signal is then extracted by a
low-pass filter to obtain the reactive power information (see
Figure 67).
f
⎛
⎜
⎞
⎟
1+
8.9
⎝
⎠
where:
n is an integer.
T is the line cycle period.
Because the sinusoidal component is integrated over an integer
number of line cycles, its value is always 0. Therefore,
In addition, the phase-shifting filter has a nonunity magnitude
response. Because the phase-shifted filter has a large attenuation
at high frequency, the reactive power is primarily for calculation
at line frequency. The effect of harmonics is largely ignored in
the reactive power calculation. Note that, because of the magnitude
characteristic of the phase shifting filter, the weight of the reactive
power is slightly different from the active power calculation
(see the Energy Register Scaling section).
nT
E = VIdt + 0
(17)
(18)
∫
0
E(t) = VInT
Note that in this mode, the 16-bit LINCYC register can hold
a maximum value of 65,535. In other words, the line energy
accumulation mode can be used to accumulate active energy
for a maximum duration of over 65,535 half-line cycles. At
a 60 Hz line frequency, it translates to a total duration of
65,535/120 Hz = 546 sec.
The frequency response of the LPF in the reactive signal path is
identical to the one used for LPF2 in the average active power
calculation. Because LPF2 does not have an ideal brick wall
frequency response (see Figure 60), the reactive power signal
has some ripple due to the instantaneous reactive power signal.
This ripple is sinusoidal and has a frequency equal to twice the
line frequency. Because the ripple is sinusoidal in nature, it is
removed when the reactive power signal is integrated to
calculate energy.
REACTIVE POWER CALCULATION (ADE5169)
Reactive power, a function available for the ADE5169, is defined
as the product of the voltage and current waveforms when one of
these signals is phase-shifted by 90°. The resulting waveform is
called the instantaneous reactive power signal. Equation 21 gives
an expression for the instantaneous reactive power signal in an
ac system when the phase of the current channel is shifted by 90°.
The reactive power signal can be read from the waveform register
by setting the WAVMODE register (Address 0x0D) and the
WFSM bit (Bit 5) in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH,
Address 0xDB). Like the current and voltage channels waveform
sampling modes, the waveform data is available at sample rates
of 25.6 kSPS, 12.8 kSPS, 6.4 kSPS, and 3.2 kSPS.
Rev. 0 | Page 58 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Reactive Power Gain Calibration
Sign of Reactive Power Calculation
Figure 67 shows the signal processing chain for the ADE5169
reactive power calculation. As explained in the Reactive Power
Calculation (ADE5169) section, the reactive power is calculated by
applying a low-pass filter to the instantaneous reactive power
signal. Note that, when reading the waveform samples from the
output of LPF2, the gain of the reactive energy can be adjusted by
using the multiplier and by writing a twos complement, 12-bit
word to the var gain register (VARGAIN[11:0], Address 0x1E).
Equation 23 shows how the gain adjustment is related to the
contents of the var gain register.
Note that the average reactive power is a signed calculation.
The phase shift filter has −90° phase shift when the integrator
is enabled and +90° phase shift when the integrator is disabled.
Table 46 summarizes the relationship of the phase difference
between the voltage and the current and the sign of the resulting
var calculation.
Table 46. Sign of Reactive Power Calculation
Angle
Integrator
Sign
Off
Off
On
On
Positive
Negative
Positive
Negative
Between 0° to +90°
Between –90° to 0°
Between 0° to +90°
Between –90° to 0°
Output VARGAIN =
VARGAIN
⎛
⎞
⎟
⎧
⎩
⎫
⎬
⎭
Reactive Power× 1+
⎜
(23)
⎨
212
⎝
⎠
Reactive Power Sign Detection
The resolution of the VARGAIN register is the same as the
The ADE5169 detects a change of sign in the reactive power.
The VARSIGN flag (Bit 4) in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR
(MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) records when a change of sign has
occurred according to the VARSIGN bit (Bit 5) in the ACCMODE
register (Address 0x0F). If the VARSIGN bit is set in the Interrupt
Enable 1 SFR (MIRQENL, Address 0xD9), the 8052 core has a
pending ADE interrupt. The ADE interrupt stays active until the
VARSIGN status bit is cleared (see the Energy Measurement
Interrupts section).
WGAIN register (see the Active Power Gain Calibration section).
VARGAIN can be used to calibrate the reactive power (or energy)
calculation in the ADE5169.
Reactive Power Offset Calibration
The ADE5169 also incorporates a reactive power offset register
(VAROS[15:0] (Address 0x21). This is a signed, twos complement,
16-bit register that can be used to remove offsets in the reactive
power calculation (see Figure 67). An offset can exist in the reactive
power calculation due to crosstalk between channels on the PCB
or in the IC itself. The offset calibration allows the contents of
the reactive power register to be maintained at 0 when no power
is being consumed.
When the VARSIGN bit (Bit 5) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is cleared (default), the VARSIGN flag (Bit 4)
in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set
when a transition from positive to negative reactive power occurs.
The 256 LSBs (VAROS = 0x100) written to the reactive power
offset register are equivalent to 1 LSB in the WAVMODE register
(Address 0x0D).
When VARSIGN in the ACCMODE register (Address 0x0F) is
set, the VARSIGN flag in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL,
Address 0xDC) is set when a transition from negative to positive
reactive power occurs.
UPPER 24 BITS ARE
ACCESSIBLE THROUGH
VARHR[23:0] REGISTER
FOR WAVEFORM
SAMPLING
V
ARHR[23:0]
23
0
VAROS[15:0]
90° PHASE
SHIFTING FILTER
HPF
CURRENT
CHANNEL
6
5
–6 –7 –8
2 2 2
sgn
2
2
VARDIV[7:0]
2
LPF2
48
0
+
+
+
%
+
VOLTAGE
CHANNEL
PHCAL[7:0]
VARGAIN[11:0]
OUTPUTS FROM THE LPF2 ARE
ACCUMULATED (INTEGRATED) IN
THE INTERNAL REACTIVE ENERGY
REGISTER
REACTIVE POWER
SIGNAL
TO
DIGITAL-TO-FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
5
T
MCLK
WAVEFORM
REGISTER
VALUES
TIME (nT)
Figure 67. Reactive Energy Calculation
Rev. 0 | Page 59 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
The output of the multiplier is divided by VARDIV. If the value
in the VARDIV register (Address 0x25) is equal to 0, the internal
reactive energy register is divided by 1. VARDIV is an 8-bit,
unsigned register. After dividing by VARDIV, the reactive energy is
accumulated in a 49-bit internal energy accumulation register.
The upper 24 bits of this register are accessible through a read to
the reactive energy register (VARHR[23:0], Address 0x04). A read
to the RVAHR register (Address 0x08) returns the content of
the VARHR register, and the upper 24 bits of the internal register
are cleared.
Reactive Power No Load Detection
The ADE5169 includes a no load threshold feature on the reactive
energy that eliminates any creep effects in the meter. The ADE5169
accomplishes this by not accumulating reactive energy when
the multiplier output is below the no load threshold. When the
reactive power is below the no load threshold, the RNOLOAD flag
(Bit 1) in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR (MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC)
is set. If the RNOLOAD bit (Bit 1) is set in the Interrupt Enable 1
SFR (MIRQENL, Address 0xD9), the 8052 core has a pending ADE
interrupt. The ADE interrupt stays active until the RNOLOAD
status bit is cleared (see the Energy Measurement Interrupts
section).
As shown in Figure 67, the reactive power signal is accumulated
in an internal 49-bit, signed register. The reactive power signal
can be read from the waveform register by setting the WAVMODE
register (Address 0x0D) and setting the WFSM bit (Bit 5) in the
Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH, Address 0xDB). Like the
current and voltage channel waveform sampling modes, the
waveform data is available at sample rates of 25.6 kSPS, 12.8
kSPS, 6.4 kSPS, and 3.2 kSPS.
The no load threshold level can be selected by setting the
VARNOLOAD bits (Bits[3:2])in the NLMODE register, located
at Address 0x0E. Setting these bits to 0b00 disables the no load
detection, and setting them to 0b01, 0b10, or 0b11 sets the no
load detection threshold to 0.015%, 0.0075%, and 0.0037% of
the full-scale output frequency of the multiplier, respectively.
Figure 62 shows this energy accumulation for full-scale signals
(sinusoidal) on the analog inputs. These curves also apply for
the reactive energy accumulation.
REACTIVE ENERGY CALCULATION (ADE5169)
As for active energy, the ADE5169 achieves the integration of the
reactive power signal by continuously accumulating the reactive
power signal in an internal, nonreadable, 49-bit energy register. The
reactive energy register (VARHR[23:0], Address 0x04) represents
the upper 24 bits of this internal register. The VARHR register
and its function are available for the ADE5169.
Note that the energy register contents roll over to full-scale
negative (0x800000) and continue to increase in value when
the power or energy flow is positive. Conversely, if the power is
negative, the energy register underflows to full-scale positive
(0x7FFFFF) and continues to decrease in value.
The discrete time sample period (T) for the accumulation register
in the ADE5169 is 1.22 μs (5/MCLK). As well as calculating the
energy, this integration removes any sinusoidal components
that may be in the active power signal. Figure 67 shows this
discrete time integration or accumulation. The reactive power
signal in the waveform register is continuously added to the
internal reactive energy register.
Using the interrupt enable register (MIRQENM, Address 0xDA),
the ADE5169 can be configured to issue an ADE interrupt to
the 8052 core when the reactive energy register is half-full
(positive or negative) or when an overflow or underflow occurs.
Integration Time Under Steady Load: Reactive Energy
As mentioned in the Active Energy Calculation section, the
discrete time sample period (T) for the accumulation register is
1.22 μs (5/MCLK). With full-scale sinusoidal signals on the
analog inputs and the VARGAIN register (Address 0x1E) and
the VARDIV register (Address 0x25) set to 0x000, the integration
time before the reactive energy register overflows is calculated
in Equation 24.
The reactive energy accumulation depends on the setting of the
SAVARM and ABSVARM bits in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F). When both bits are cleared, the addition is
signed and, therefore, negative energy is subtracted from the
reactive energy contents. When both bits are set, the ADE5169
is set to be in the more restrictive mode, which is the absolute
accumulation mode.
Time =
0xFFFF, FFFF, FFFF
When the SAVARM bit (Bit 2) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is set, the reactive power is accumulated
depending on the sign of the active power. When active power
is positive, the reactive power is added as it is to the reactive energy
register. When active power is negative, the reactive power is
subtracted from the reactive energy accumulator (see the Var
Antitamper Accumulation Mode section).
×1.22μs = 409.6 sec = 6.82 min (24)
0xCCCCD
When VARDIV is set to a value different from 0, the integration
time varies, as shown in Equation 25.
Time =TimeWDIV =0 ×VARDIV
(25)
Reactive Energy Accumulation Modes
When the ABSVARM bit (Bit 3) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F) is set, the absolute reactive power is used for the
reactive energy accumulation (see the Var Absolute Accumulation
Mode section).
Var Signed Accumulation Mode
The ADE5169 reactive energy default accumulation mode is a
signed accumulation based on the reactive power information.
Rev. 0 | Page 60 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Var Antitamper Accumulation Mode
Var Absolute Accumulation Mode
The ADE5169 is placed in var antitamper accumulation mode
by setting the SAVARM bit in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F). In this mode, the reactive power is accumulated
depending on the sign of the active power. When the active
power is positive, the reactive power is added as it is to the reactive
energy register. When the active power is negative, the reactive
power is subtracted from the reactive energy accumulator (see
Figure 68). The CF pulse also reflects this accumulation method
when in this mode. The default setting for this mode is off. Transi-
tions in the direction of power flow and no load threshold are
active in this mode.
The ADE5169 is placed in absolute accumulation mode by
setting the ABSVARM bit (Bit 3) in the ACCMODE register
(Address 0x0F). In absolute accumulation mode, the reactive
energy accumulation is done by using the absolute reactive
power and ignoring any occurrence of power below the no load
threshold for the reactive energy (see Figure 69). The CF pulse
also reflects this accumulation method when in the absolute
accumulation mode. The default setting for this mode is off.
Transitions in the direction of power flow and no load threshold
are active in this mode.
REACTIVE ENERGY
REACTIVE ENERGY
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
REACTIVE POWER
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
REACTIVE POWER
Figure 69. Reactive Energy Accumulation in Absolute Accumulation Mode
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
Reactive Energy Pulse Output
The ADE5169 provides all the circuitry with a pulse output
whose frequency is proportional to reactive power (see the
Energy-to-Frequency Conversion section). This pulse frequency
output uses the calibrated signal after VARGAIN, and its behavior
is consistent with the setting of the reactive energy accumulation
mode in the ACCMODE register (Address 0x0F). The pulse
output is active low and should preferably be connected to an LED,
as shown in Figure 75.
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
ACTIVE POWER
NO LOAD
THRESHOLD
APSIGN FLAG
POS
NEG
POS
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTERS
Figure 68. Reactive Energy Accumulation in
Antitamper Accumulation Mode
Rev. 0 | Page 61 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Line Cycle Reactive Energy Accumulation Mode
in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH, Address 0xDB) is set,
the 8052 core has a pending ADE interrupt. The ADE interrupt
stays active until the CYCEND status bit is cleared (see the Energy
Measurement Interrupts section). Another calibration cycle starts
as soon as the CYCEND flag is set. If the LVARHR register
(Address 0x06) is not read before a new CYCEND flag is set, the
LVARHR register is overwritten by a new value.
In line cycle reactive energy accumulation mode, the energy
accumulation of the ADE5169 can be synchronized to the
voltage channel zero crossing so that reactive energy can be
accumulated over an integral number of half-line cycles. The
advantages of this mode are similar to those described in the
Line Cycle Active Energy Accumulation Mode section.
When a new half-line cycle is written in the LINCYC register
(Address 0x12), the LVARHR register is reset, and a new accu-
mulation starts at the next zero crossing. The number of half-
line cycles is then counted internally until the value programmed
in LINCYC is reached. This implementation provides a valid
measurement at the first CYCEND interrupt after writing to the
LINCYC register. The line reactive energy accumulation uses
the same signal path as the reactive energy accumulation. The
LSB size of these two registers is equivalent.
In line cycle active energy accumulation mode, the ADE5169
accumulates the reactive power signal in the LVARHR register
(Address 0x06) for an integral number of line cycles, as shown in
Figure 70. The number of half-line cycles is specified in the
LINCYC register (Address 0x12). The ADE5169 can accumulate
active power for up to 65,535 half-line cycles.
Because the reactive power is integrated on an integral number
of line cycles, the CYCEND flag (Bit 2) in the Interrupt Status 3
SFR (MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE) is set at the end of an active
energy accumulation line cycle. If the CYCEND enable bit (Bit 2)
TO
DIGITAL-TO-FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
VARGAIN[11:0]
48
0
+
+
OUTPUT
FROM
LPF2
%
VAROS[15:0]
VARDIV[7:0]
ACCUMULATE REACTIVE
ENERGY IN INTERNAL
REGISTER AND UPDATE
THE LVARHR REGISTER
AT THE END OF LINCYC
HALF-LINE CYCLES
23
0
LPF1
LVARHR[23:0]
ZERO-CROSSING
DETECTION
CALIBRATION
CONTROL
FROM VOLTAGE
CHANNEL ADC
LINCYC[15:0]
Figure 70. Line Cycle Reactive Energy Accumulation Mode
Rev. 0 | Page 62 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Apparent Power Offset Calibration
APPARENT POWER CALCULATION
Each rms measurement includes an offset compensation register
to calibrate and eliminate the dc component in the rms value (see
the Current Channel RMS Calculation section and the Voltage
Channel RMS Calculation section). The voltage and current
channels rms values are then multiplied together in the apparent
power signal processing. Because no additional offsets are
created in the multiplication of the rms values, there is no
specific offset compensation in the apparent power signal
processing. The offset compensation of the apparent power
measurement is done by calibrating each individual rms
measurement.
Apparent power is defined as the maximum power that can be
delivered to a load. Vrms and Irms are the effective voltage and current
delivered to the load, respectively. Therefore, the apparent power
(AP) = Vrms × Irms. This equation is independent from the phase
angle between the current and the voltage.
Equation 29 gives an expression of the instantaneous power signal
in an ac system with a phase shift.
(26)
v(t) = 2 Vrms sin(ωt)
2 Irms sin(ωt + θ)
p(t) = v(t)×i(t)
=Vrms Irms cos(θ)−Vrms Irms cos(2ωt + θ)
i
(
t
)
=
(27)
(29)
(30)
APPARENT ENERGY CALCULATION
p t
( )
The apparent energy is given as the integral of the apparent power.
Apparent Energy =
(32)
Apparent Power(t)dt
Figure 71 illustrates the signal processing for the calculation of the
apparent power in the ADE5166/ADE5169.
∫
The ADE5166/ADE5169 achieve the integration of the apparent
power signal by continuously accumulating the apparent power
signal in an internal 48-bit register. The apparent energy register
(VAHR[23:0], Address 0x07) represents the upper 24 bits of this
internal register. This discrete time accumulation or summation
is equivalent to integration in continuous time. Equation 33
expresses the relationship.
The apparent power signal can be read from the waveform register
by setting the WAVMODE register (Address 0x0D) and setting the
WFSM bit (Bit 5) in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR (MIRQENH,
Address 0xDB). Like the current and voltage channel waveform
sampling modes, the waveform data is available at sample rates
of 25.6 kSPS, 12.8 kSPS, 6.4 kSPS, or 3.2 kSPS.
∞
The gain of the apparent energy can be adjusted by using the
multiplier and by writing a twos complement, 12-bit word to the
VAGAIN register (VAGAIN[11:0], Address 0x1F). Equation 31
shows how the gain adjustment is related to the contents of the
VAGAIN register.
⎧
⎨
⎩
⎫
⎬
⎭
(33)
Apparent Energy = lim
Apparent Power(nT)×T
∑
T →0
n=0
where:
n is the discrete time sample number.
T is the sample period.
Output VAGAIN =
The discrete time sample period (T) for the accumulation register
in the ADE5166/ADE5169 is 1.22 μs (5/MCLK).
VAGAIN
⎛
⎞
⎟
⎧
⎩
⎫
⎬
⎭
Apparent Power × 1+
(31)
⎜
⎨
212
⎝
⎠
For example, when 0x7FF is written to the VAGAIN register, the
power output is scaled up by 50% (0x7FF = 2047d, 2047/212 = 0.5).
Similarly, 0x800 = –2047d (signed twos complement), and power
output is scaled by –50%. Each LSB represents 0.0244% of the
power output. The apparent power is calculated with the current
and voltage rms values obtained in the rms blocks of the
ADE5166/ADE5169.
VARMSCFCON
APPARENT POWER
SIGNAL (P)
I
rms
0x1A36E2
CURRENT RMS SIGNAL – i(t)
0x1CF68C
0x00
VAGAIN
V
rms
VOLTAGE RMS SIGNAL – v(t)
0x1CF68C
TO
DIGITAL-TO-FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
0x00
Figure 71. Apparent Power Signal Processing
Rev. 0 | Page 63 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Figure 72 shows this discrete time integration or accumulation.
The apparent power signal is continuously added to the internal
register. This addition is a signed addition even if the apparent
energy theoretically remains positive.
analog inputs and the VAGAIN register (Address 0x1F) set to
0x000, the average word value from the apparent power stage is
0x1A36E2 (see the Apparent Power Calculation section). The
maximum value that can be stored in the apparent energy register
before it overflows is 224 or 0xFF,FFFF. The average word value
is added to the internal register, which can store 248 or
0xFFFF,FFFF,FFFF before it overflows. Therefore, the integration
time under these conditions with VADIV = 0 is calculated as
follows:
The 49 bits of the internal register are divided by VADIV. If the
value in the VADIV register (Address 0x26) is 0, the internal
apparent energy register is divided by 1. VADIV is an 8-bit,
unsigned register. The upper 24 bits are then written in the 24-bit
apparent energy register (VAHR[23:0], Address 0x07). The
RVAHR register (Address 0x08), which is 24 bits long, is provided
to read the apparent energy. This register is reset to 0 after a read
operation.
Time =
0xFFFF, FFFF, FFFF
×1.22μs =199 sec = 3.33 min
(34)
0xD055
Note that the apparent energy register is unsigned. By setting
the VAEHF bit (Bit 2) and the VAEOF bit (Bit 5) in the Interrupt
Enable 2 SFR (MIRQENM, Address 0xDA), the ADE5166/
ADE5169 can be configured to issue an ADE interrupt to the
8052 core when the apparent energy register is half-full or when
an overflow occurs. The half-full interrupt for the unsigned
apparent energy register is based on 24 bits, as opposed to 23 bits
for the signed active energy register.
When VADIV is set to a value different from 0, the integration
time varies, as shown in Equation 35.
Time = TimeWDIV = 0 × VADIV
(35)
Apparent Energy Pulse Output
All the ADE5166/ADE5169 circuitry has a pulse output whose
frequency is proportional to apparent power (see the Energy-to-
Frequency Conversion section). This pulse frequency output
uses the calibrated signal after VAGAIN. This output can also
be used to output a pulse whose frequency is proportional to Irms.
Integration Times Under Steady Load: Apparent Energy
As mentioned in the Apparent Energy Calculation section, the
discrete time sample period (T) for the accumulation register is
1.22 μs (5/MCLK). With full-scale sinusoidal signals on the
The pulse output is active low and should preferably be connected
to an LED, as shown in Figure 75.
VAHR[23:0]
23
0
48
0
%
VADIV
48
0
APPARENT POWER
+
or
+
I
rms
APPARENT
POWER SIGNAL = P
APPARENT POWER OR I
rms
IS
ACCUMULATED (INTEGRATED)
IN THE APPARENT ENERGY
REGISTER
T
TIME (nT)
Figure 72. Apparent Energy Calculation
Rev. 0 | Page 64 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Line Apparent Energy Accumulation
Apparent Power No Load Detection
The ADE5166/ADE5169 are designed with a special apparent
energy accumulation mode that simplifies the calibration process.
By using the on-chip, zero-crossing detection, the ADE5166/
ADE5169 accumulate the apparent power signal in the LVAHR
register (Address 0x09) for an integral number of half cycles, as
shown in Figure 73. The line apparent energy accumulation mode
is always active.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 include a no load threshold feature on
the apparent power that eliminates any creep effects in the meter.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 accomplish this by not accumulating
energy if the multiplier output is below the no load threshold.
When the apparent power is below the no load threshold, the
VANOLOAD flag (Bit 2) in the Interrupt Status 1 SFR
(MIRQSTL, Address 0xDC) is set.
The number of half-line cycles is specified in the LINCYC
register (Address 0x12), which is an unsigned 16-bit register.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 can accumulate apparent power for up
to 65,535 combined half cycles. Because the apparent power is
integrated on the same integral number of line cycles as the line
active register and reactive energy register, these values can easily
be compared. The energies are calculated more accurately
because of this precise timing control and provide all the
information needed for reactive power and power factor
calculation.
If the VANOLOAD bit (Bit 2) is set in the Interrupt Enable 1
SFR (MIRQENL, Address 0xD9), the 8052 core has a pending
ADE interrupt. The ADE interrupt stays active until the
APNOLOAD status bit is cleared (see the Energy Measurement
Interrupts section).
The no load threshold level is selectable by setting the
VANOLOAD bits (Bits[5:4]) in the NLMODE register
(Address 0x0E). Setting these bits to 0b00 disables the no load
detection, and setting them to 0b01, 0b10, or 0b11 sets the no
load detection threshold to 0.030%, 0.015%, and 0.0075% of the
full-scale output frequency of the multiplier, respectively.
At the end of an energy calibration cycle, the CYCEND flag (Bit 2)
in the Interrupt Status 3 SFR (MIRQSTH, Address 0xDE) is set.
If the CYCEND enable bit (Bit 2) in the Interrupt Enable 3 SFR
(MIRQENH, Address 0xDB) is enabled, the 8052 core has
a pending ADE interrupt.
This no load threshold can also be applied to the Irms pulse
output when selected. In this case, the level of no load threshold
is the same as for the apparent energy.
AMPERE-HOUR ACCUMULATION
As for LWATTHR, when a new half-line cycle is written
in the LINCYC register (Address 0x12), the LVAHR register
(Address 0x09) is reset and a new accumulation starts at the next
zero crossing. The number of half-line cycles is then counted until
LINCYC is reached.
In a tampering situation where no voltage is available to the energy
meter, the ADE5166/ADE5169 are capable of accumulating the
ampere-hour instead of apparent power into the VAHR, RVAHR,
and LVAHR. When the VARMSCFCON bit (Bit 3) of the MODE2
register (Address 0x0C) is set, the VAHR, RVAHR, and LVAHR
and the input for the digital-to-frequency converter accumulate
Irms instead of apparent power. All the signal processing and cali-
bration registers available for apparent power and energy
accumulation remain the same when ampere-hour accumulation
is selected. However, the scaling difference between Irms and
apparent power requires independent values for gain calibration
in the VAGAIN (Address 0x1F), VADIV (Address 0x26),
CFxNUM (Address 0x27 and Address 0x29), and CFxDEN
(Address 0x28 and Address 0x2A) registers.
This implementation provides a valid measurement at the first
CYCEND interrupt after writing to the LINCYC register. The
line apparent energy accumulation uses the same signal path as
the apparent energy accumulation. The LSB size of these two
registers is equivalent.
48
0
+
+
APPARENT POWER
%
OR I
rms
LVAHR REGISTER IS
UPDATED EVERY LINCYC
ZERO CROSSING WITH THE
TOTAL APPARENT ENERGY
DURING THAT DURATION
VADIV[7:0]
23
0
LPF1
LVAHR[23:0]
FROM
VOLTAGE CHANNEL
ADC
ZERO-CROSSING
DETECTION
CALIBRATION
CONTROL
LINCYC[15:0]
Figure 73. Line Cycle Apparent Energy Accumulation
Rev. 0 | Page 65 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
The selection between Irms and apparent power is done by
the VARMSCFCON bit in the MODE2 register (Address 0x0C).
With this selection, CF2 cannot be proportional to apparent
power if CF1 is proportional to Irms, and CF1 cannot be propor-
ENERGY-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERSION
The ADE5166/ADE5169 also provide two energy-to-frequency
conversions for calibration purposes. After initial calibration at
manufacturing, the manufacturer or end customer often verifies
the energy meter calibration. One convenient way to do this is for
the manufacturer to provide an output frequency that is propor-
tional to the active power, reactive power, apparent power, or Irms
under steady load conditions. This output frequency can provide
a simple single-wire, optically isolated interface to external
calibration equipment. Figure 74 illustrates the energy-to-
frequency conversion in the ADE5166/ADE5169.
tional to apparent power if CF2 is proportional to Irms
.
Pulse Output Characteristic
The pulse output for both DFCs stays low for 90 ms if the pulse
period is longer than 180 ms (5.56 Hz). If the pulse period is
shorter than 180 ms, the duty cycle of the pulse output is 50%.
The pulse output is active low and should preferably be connected
to an LED, as shown in Figure 75.
V
DD
MODE2 REGISTER 0x0C
CF
VARMSCFCON CFxSEL[1:0]
Irms
CFxNUM
VA
Figure 75. CF Pulse Output
CFx PULSE
OUTPUT
DFC
VAR*
÷
The maximum output frequency with ac input signals at
full scale and CFxNUM = 0x00 and CFxDEN = 0x00 is
approximately 21.1 kHz.
WATT
CFxDEN
*AVAILABLE ONLY IN THE ADE5569 AND ADE5169.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 incorporate two registers per DFC,
CFxNUM[15:0] and CFxDEN[15:0], to set the CFx frequency.
These are unsigned 16-bit registers that can be used to adjust
the CFx frequency to a wide range of values. These frequency
scaling registers are 16-bit registers that can scale the output
frequency by 1/216 to 1 with a step of 1/216.
Figure 74. Energy-to-Frequency Conversion
Two digital-to-frequency converters (DFC) are used to generate
the pulsed outputs. When WDIV = 0 or 1, the DFC generates a
pulse each time 1 LSB in the energy register is accumulated. An
output pulse is generated when a CFxNUM/CFxDEN number of
pulses are generated at the DFC output. Under steady load con-
ditions, the output frequency is proportional to the active power,
reactive power, apparent power, or Irms, depending on the
CFxSEL bits in the MODE2 register (Address 0x0C).
If 0 is written to any of these registers, 1 is applied to the register.
The ratio of CFxNUM/CFxDEN should be less than 1 to ensure
proper operation. If the ratio of the CFxNUM/CFxDEN registers
is greater than 1, the register values are adjusted to a ratio of 1.
For example, if the output frequency is 1.562 kHz, and the content
of CFxDEN is 0 (0x000), the output frequency can be set to 6.1 Hz
by writing 0xFF to the CFxDEN register.
Both pulse outputs can be enabled or disabled by clearing or
setting the DISCF1 bit (Bit 1) and the DISCF2 bit (Bit 2) in the
MODE1 register (Address 0x0B), respectively.
ENERGY REGISTER SCALING
Both pulse outputs set separate flags in the Interrupt Status 2 SFR
(MIRQSTM, Address 0xDD), CF1 (Bit 6) and CF2 (Bit 7). If the
CF1 enable bit (Bit 6) and CF2 enable bit (Bit 7) in the Interrupt
Enable 2 SFR (MIRQENM, Address 0xDA) are set, the 8052 core
has a pending ADE interrupt. The ADE interrupt stays active
until the CF1 or CF2 status bit is cleared (see the Energy
Measurement Interrupts section).
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide measurements of active, reactive,
and apparent energies that use separate paths and filtering for cal-
culation. The difference in data paths can result in small differences
in LSB weight between active, reactive, and apparent energy
registers. These measurements are internally compensated so that
the scaling is nearly one to one. The relationship between these
registers is shown in Table 47.
Pulse Output Configuration
The two pulse output circuits have separate configuration bits
in the MODE2 register (Address 0x0C). Setting the CFxSEL bits
to 0b00, 0b01, or 0b1x configures the DFC to create a pulse
output proportional to active power, reactive power, or apparent
power, or Irms, respectively.
Table 47. Energy Registers Scaling
Line Frequency = 50 Hz Line Frequency = 60 Hz Integrator
Var = 0.9952 × watt
VA = 0.9978 × watt
Var = 0.9997 × watt
VA = 0.9977 × watt
Var = 0.9949 × watt
VA = 1.0015 × watt
Var = 0.9999 × watt
VA = 1.0015 × watt
Off
Off
On
On
Rev. 0 | Page 66 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
(MIRQENH, Address 0xDB) enable the energy measurement
interrupts that are allowed to interrupt the 8052 core. If an
event is not enabled, it cannot create a system interrupt.
ENERGY MEASUREMENT INTERRUPTS
The energy measurement part of the ADE5166/ADE5169 has
its own interrupt vector for the 8052 core, Vector Address 0x004B
(see the Interrupt Vectors section). The bits set in the Interrupt
Enable 1 SFR (MIRQENL, Address 0xD9), Interrupt Enable 2
SFR (MIRQENM, Address 0xDA), and Interrupt Enable 3 SFR
The ADE interrupt stays active until the status bit that has created
the interrupt is cleared. The status bit is cleared when a 0 is written
to this register bit.
Rev. 0 | Page 67 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
TEMPERATURE, BATTERY, AND SUPPLY VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
The ADE5166/ADE5169 include temperature measurements as
well as battery and supply voltage measurements. These measure-
ments enable many forms of compensation. The temperature and
supply voltage measurements can be used to compensate external
circuitry. The RTC can be calibrated over temperature to ensure
that it does not drift. Supply voltage measurements allow the LCD
contrast to be maintained despite variations in voltage. Battery
measurements allow low battery detection to be performed.
All ADC measurements are configured through the SFRs, as
shown in Table 48.
The temperature, battery, and supply voltage measurements
can be configured to continue functioning in PSM1 and PSM2.
Keeping the temperature measurement active ensures that it is
not necessary to wait for the temperature measurement to settle
before using it for compensation.
Table 48. Temperature, Battery, and Supply Voltage Measurement SFRs
SFR
Address R/W
Mnemonic
STRBPER
DIFFPROG
ADCGO
BATVTH
VDCINADC
BATADC
Description
0xF9
0xF3
0xD8
0xFA
0xEF
0xDF
0xD7
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Peripheral ADC strobe period (see Table 49).
Temperature and supply delta (see Table 50).
Start ADC measurement (see Table 51).
Battery detection threshold (see Table 52).
VDCIN ADC value (see Table 53).
Battery ADC value (see Table 54).
Temperature ADC value (see Table 55).
TEMPADC
Table 49. Peripheral ADC Strobe Period SFR (STRBPER, Address 0xF9)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:6]
[5:4]
Reserved
00
0
These bits must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
Period for background external voltage measurements.
VDCIN_PERIOD
VDCIN_PERIOD
Result
00
01
10
11
No VDCIN measurement
8 min
2 min
1 min
[3:2]
[1:0]
BATT_PERIOD
TEMP_PERIOD
0
0
Period for background battery level measurements.
BATT_PERIOD
Result
00
01
10
11
No battery measurement
16 min
4 min
1 min
Period for background temperature measurements.
TEMP_PERIOD
Result
00
01
10
11
No temperature measurement
8 min
2 min
1 min
Rev. 0 | Page 68 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 50. Temperature and Supply Delta SFR (DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default Description
[7:6]
[5:3]
Reserved
0
0
Reserved.
TEMP_DIFF
Difference threshold between last temperature measurement interrupting 8052 and new
temperature measurement that should interrupt 8052.
TEMP_DIFF
000
Result
No interrupt
001
010
011
100
1 LSB (≈ 0.8°C)
2 LSB (≈ 1.6°C)
3 LSB (≈ 2.4°C)
4 LSB (≈ 3.2°C)
5 LSB (≈ 4°C)
101
110
111
6 LSB (≈ 4.8°C)
Every temperature measurement
[2:0]
VDCIN_DIFF
0
Difference threshold between last external voltage measurement interrupting 8052 and new
external measurement that should interrupt 8052.
VDCIN_DIFF
000
Result
No interrupt
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
1 LSB (≈ 120 mV)
2 LSB (≈ 240 mV)
3 LSB (≈ 360 mV)
4 LSB (≈ 480 mV)
5 LSB (≈ 600 mV)
6 LSB (≈ 720 mV)
Every VDCIN measurement
Table 51. Start ADC Measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8)
Bit
Bit Address
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
0xDF
PLLACK
0
Set this bit to clear the PLL fault bit, PLL_FLT, in the PERIPH register (Address 0xF4).
A PLL fault is generated if a reset is caused because the PLL lost lock.
[6:3]
2
0xDE to 0xDB
0xDA
Reserved
VDCIN_ADC_GO
0
0
Reserved.
Set this bit to initiate an external voltage measurement. This bit is cleared when
the measurement request is received by the ADC.
1
0
0xD9
0xD8
TEMP_ADC_GO
BATT_ADC_GO
0
0
Set this bit to initiate a temperature measurement. This bit is cleared when the
measurement request is received by the ADC.
Set this bit to initiate a battery measurement. This bit is cleared when the
measurement request is received by the ADC.
Table 52. Battery Detection Threshold SFR (BATVTH, Address 0xFA)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
BATVTH
0
The battery ADC value is compared to this register, the battery threshold register. If BATADC
is lower than the threshold, an interrupt is generated.
Table 53. VDCIN ADC Value SFR (VDCINADC, Address 0xEF)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
VDCINADC
0
The VDCINADC value in this register is updated when an ADC interrupt occurs.
Table 54. Battery ADC Value SFR (BATADC, Address 0xDF)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
BATADC
0
The battery ADC value in this register is updated when an ADC interrupt occurs.
Table 55. Temperature ADC Value SFR (TEMPADC, Address 0xD7)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
TEMPADC
0
The temperature ADC value in this register is updated when an ADC interrupt occurs.
Rev. 0 | Page 69 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
start ADC measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8).
Background temperature measurements are not available.
In PSM2 operating mode, the 8052 is not active. Temperature
conversions are available through the background measure-
ment mode only.
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
To provide a digital temperature measurement, each ADE5166/
ADE5169 includes a dedicated ADC. An 8-bit temperature
ADC value SFR (TEMPADC, Address 0xD7) holds the results
of the temperature conversion. The resolution of the temperature
measurement is 0.83°C/LSB. There are two ways to initiate a
temperature conversion: a single temperature measurement or
background temperature measurements.
•
The temperature ADC value SFR (TEMPADC, Address 0xD7)
is updated with a new value only when a temperature ADC
interrupt occurs.
Single Temperature Measurement
Temperature ADC Interrupt
Set the TEMP_ADC_GO bit (Bit 1) in the start ADC measu-
ment SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8) to obtain a temperature
measurement (see Table 51). An interrupt is generated when the
conversion is complete and when the temperature measurement
is available in the temperature ADC value SFR (TEMPADC,
Address 0xD7).
The temperature ADC can generate an ADC interrupt when at
least one of the following conditions occurs:
•
The difference between the new temperature ADC value and
the last temperature ADC value generating an ADC interrupt
is larger than the value set in the TEMP_DIFF bits.
•
The temperature ADC conversion, initiated by setting start
ADC measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8), finishes.
Background Temperature Measurements
Background temperature measurements are disabled by default.
To configure the background temperature measurement mode,
set a temperature measurement interval in the peripheral ADC
strobe period SFR (STRBPER, Address 0xF9). Temperature mea-
surements are then performed periodically in the background (see
Table 49).
When the ADC interrupt occurs, a new value is available in the
temperature ADC value SFR (TEMPADC, Address 0xD7). Note
that there is no flag associated with this interrupt.
BATTERY MEASUREMENT
To provide a digital battery measurement, each ADE5166/
ADE5169 includes a dedicated ADC. The battery measurement
is available in the 8-bit battery ADC value SFR (BATADC,
Address 0xDF). The battery measurement has a resolution of
14.6 mV/LSB. A battery conversion can be initiated by two
methods: a single battery measurement or background battery
measurements.
When a temperature conversion completes, the new temperature
ADC value is compared to the last temperature ADC value that
created an interrupt. If the absolute difference between the two
values is greater than the setting in the TEMP_DIFF bits in the
temperature and supply delta SFR (DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3[5:3]),
a TEMPADC interrupt is generated (see Table 50). This allows
temperature measurements to take place completely in the back-
ground, requiring MCU activity only if the temperature changes
more than a configurable delta.
Single Battery Measurement
Set the BATT_ADC_GO bit (Bit 0) in the start ADC measure-
ment SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8) to obtain a battery
measurement. An interrupt is generated when the conversion is
done and when the battery measurement is available in the
battery ADC value SFR (BATADC, Address 0xDF).
To set up background temperature measurement,
1. Initiate a single temperature measurement by setting the
TEMP_ADC_GO bit in the start ADC measurement SFR
(ADCGO, Address 0xD8[1]).
Background Battery Measurements
2. Upon completion of this measurement, configure the
TEMP_DIFF bits in the temperature and supppy delta SFR
(DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3[5:3]) to establish the change in
temperature that triggers an interrupt.
3. Set up the interval for background temperature measurements
by configuring the TEMP_PERIOD bits in the peripheral
ADC strobe period SFR (STRBPER, Address 0xF9[1:0]).
To configure background measurements for the battery, establish a
measurement interval in the peripheral ADC strobe period SFR
(STRBPER, Address 0xF9). Battery measurements are then
performed periodically in the background (see Table 49).
When a battery conversion completes, the battery ADC value is
compared to the low battery threshold, established in the battery
detection threshold SFR (BATVTH, Address 0xFA). If the battery
ADC value is below this threshold, a low battery flag is set. This
low battery flag is the FBAT bit (Bit 2) in the power management
interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8), used for power supply
management. This low battery flag can be enabled to generate
the PSM interrupt by setting the EBAT bit (Bit 2) in the power
management interrupt enable SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC). This
method allows battery measurements to take place completely in
the background, requiring MCU activity only if the battery
drops below a user-specified threshold.
Temperature ADC in PSM0, PSM1, and PSM2
Depending on the operating mode of the ADE5166/ADE5169,
a temperature conversion is initiated only by certain actions.
•
In PSM0 operating mode, the 8052 is active. Temperature
measurements are available in the background measurement
mode and by initiating a single measurement.
•
In PSM1 operating mode, the 8052 is active, and the part
is battery powered. Single temperature measurements
can be initiated by setting the TEMP_ADC_GO bit in the
Rev. 0 | Page 70 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
holds the results of the conversion. The resolution of the external
voltage measurement is 15.3 mV/LSB. There are two ways to
initiate an external voltage conversion: a single external voltage
measurement or background external voltage measurements.
To set up background battery measurements, follow these steps:
1. Configure the battery detection threshold SFR (BATVTH,
Address 0xFA) to establish a low battery threshold. If the
BATADC measurement is below this threshold, the FBAT bit
(Bit 2) in the power management interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF,
Address 0xF8) is set.
2. Set up the interval for background battery measurements
by configuring the BATT_PERIOD bits in the peripheral
ADC strobe period SFR (STRBPER, Adress 0xF9[3:2]).
Single External Voltage Measurement
To obtain an external voltage measurement, set the VDCIN_
ADC_GO bit (Bit 2) in the start ADC measurement SFR
(ADCGO, Address 0xD8). An interrupt is generated when the
conversion is done and when the external voltage measurement
is available in the VDCIN ADC value SFR (VDCINADC,
Address 0xEF).
Battery ADC in PSM0, PSM1, and PSM2
Depending on the operating mode, a battery conversion is
initiated only by certain actions.
Background External Voltage Measurements
Background external voltage measurements are disabled by
default. To configure the background external voltage measure-
ment mode, set an external voltage measurement interval in the
peripheral ADC strobe period SFR (STRBPER, Address 0xF9).
External voltage measurements are performed periodically in
the background (see Table 49).
•
In PSM0 operating mode, the 8052 is active. Battery
measurements are available in the background measure-
ment mode and by initiating a single measurement.
In PSM1 operating mode, the 8052 is active, and the part
is battery powered. Single battery measurements can be
initiated by setting the BATT_ADC_GO bit (Bit 0) in the
start ADC measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8).
Background battery measurements are not available.
In PSM2 operating mode, the 8052 is not active. Unlike
temperature and VDCIN measurements, the battery
conversions are not available in this mode.
•
When an external voltage conversion is complete, the new
external voltage ADC value is compared to the last external
voltage ADC value that created an interrupt. If the absolute
difference between the two values is greater than the setting in
the VDCIN_DIFF[2:0] bits in the temperature and supply delta
SFR (DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3), a VDCIN ADC flag is set. This
VDCIN ADC flag is FVADC (Bit 3) in the power management
interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8), which is used for power
supply management. This VDCIN ADC flag can be enabled to
generate a PSM interrupt by setting the EVADC bit (Bit 3) in the
power management interrupt enable SFR (IPSME, Address 0xEC).
•
Battery ADC Interrupt
The battery ADC can generate an ADC interrupt when at least
one of the following conditions occurs:
•
The new battery ADC value is smaller than the value
set in the battery detection threshold SFR (BATVTH,
Address 0xFA), indicating a battery voltage loss.
A single battery measurement initiated by setting the
BATT_ADC_GO bit in the start ADC measurement SFR
(ADCGO, Address 0xD8) finishes.
This method allows external voltage measurements to take
place completely in the background, requiring MCU activity
only if the external voltage has changed more than a confi-
gurable delta.
•
To set up background external voltage measurements, follow
these steps:
When the battery flag (FBAT, Bit 2) is set in the power manage-
ment interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8), a new ADC
value is available in the battery ADC value SFR (BATADC,
Address 0xDF). This battery flag can be enabled as a source of the
PSM interrupt to generate a PSM interrupt every time the battery
drops below a set voltage threshold or after a single conversion
initiated by setting the BATT_ADC_GO bit in the start ADC
measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8) is ready.
1. Initiate a single external voltage measurement by setting
the VDCIN_ADC_GO bit (Bit 2) in the start ADC
measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8).
2. Upon completion of this measurement, configure the
VDCIN_DIFF bits in the temperature and supply delta SFR
(DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3[2:0]) to establish the change
in voltage that sets the FVDCIN (Bit 0) in the power manage-
ment interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8).
3. Set up the interval for background external voltage measure-
ments by configuring the VDCIN_PERIOD bits in the
peripheral ADC strobe period SFR (STRBPER,
Address 0xF9[5:4]).
The battery ADC value SFR (BATADC, Address 0xDF) is updated
with a new value only when the battery flag (FBAT) is set in the
power management interrupt flag SFR (IPSMF, Address 0xF8).
EXTERNAL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
The ADE5166/ADE5169 include a dedicated ADC to provide a
digital measurement of an external voltage on the VDCIN pin. An
8-bit SFR, the VDCIN ADC value SFR (VDCINADC, Address 0xEF),
Rev. 0 | Page 71 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
External Voltage ADC in the PSM1 and PSM2 Modes
External Voltage ADC Interrupt
An external voltage conversion is initiated only by certain actions
that depend on the operating mode of the ADE5166/ ADE5169.
The external voltage ADC can generate an ADC interrupt when
at least one of the following conditions occurs:
•
In PSM0 operating mode, the 8052 is active. External
voltage measurements are available in the background
measurement mode and by initiating a single measurement.
In PSM1 operating mode, the 8052 is active and the part is
powered from battery. Single external voltage measurements
can be initiated by setting the VDCIN_ADC_GO bit (Bit 2) in
the start ADC measurement SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8).
Background external voltage measurements are not available.
In PSM2 operating mode, the 8052 is not active. External
voltage conversions are available through the background
measurement mode only.
•
The difference between the new external voltage ADC
value and the last external voltage ADC value generating
an ADC interrupt is larger than the value set in the
VDCIN_DIFF[2:0] bits in the temperature and supply
delta SFR (DIFFPROG, Address 0xF3).
The external voltage ADC conversion, initiated by setting
VDCIN_ADC_GO in the start ADC measurement SFR
(ADCGO, Address 0xD8), finishes.
•
•
•
When the ADC interrupt occurs, a new value is available in the
VDCIN ADC value SFR (VDCINADC, Address 0xEF). Note that
there is no flag associated with this interrupt.
The external voltage ADC in the VDCIN ADC value SFR
(VDCINADC, Address 0xEF) is updated with a new value only
when an external voltage ADC interrupt occurs.
Rev. 0 | Page 72 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
8052 MCU CORE ARCHITECTURE
The ADE5166/ADE5169 have an 8052 MCU core and use the
8051 instruction set. Some of the standard 8052 peripherals,
such as the UART, have been enhanced. This section describes
the standard 8052 core and enhancements that have been made
to it in the ADE5166/ADE5169.
62kB ELECTRICALLY
REPROGRAMMABLE
NONVOLATILE
FLASH/EE
ENERGY
MEASUREMENT
PROGRAM/DATA
MEMORY
POWER
MANAGEMENT
256 BYTES
GENERAL-
PURPOSE
RAM
RTC
128-BYTE
LCD DRIVER
The special function register (SFR) space is mapped into the
upper 128 bytes of internal data memory space and is accessed
by direct addressing only. It provides an interface between the
CPU and all on-chip peripherals. See Figure 76 for a block
diagram showing the programming model of the ADE5166/
ADE5169 via the SFR area
8051-COMPATIBLE
CORE
SPECIAL
FUNCTION
TEMPERATURE
REGISTER
REGISTER
BANKS
ADC
PC
IR
AREA
BATTERY
ADC
2kB XRAM
OTHER ON-CHIP
PERIPHERALS:
SERIAL I/O
WDT
TIMERS
All registers except the program counter (PC), instruction register
(IR), and the four general-purpose register banks reside in the
SFR area. The SFR registers include control, configuration, and
data registers that provide an interface between the CPU and all
on-chip peripherals.
Figure 76. Block Diagram Showing Programming Model via the SFRs
MCU REGISTERS
The registers used by the MCU are summarized in Table 56.
Table 56. 8051 SFRs
SFR
ACC
B
PSW
PCON
DPL
DPH
DPTR
SP
Address
Bit Addressable
Description
0xE0
0xF0
0xD0
0x87
0x82
0x83
0x82 and 0x83
0x81
0xB7
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Accumulator.
Auxiliary math.
Program status word (see Table 57).
Program control (see Table 58).
Data pointer low (see Table 59).
Data pointer high (see Table 60).
Data pointer (see Table 61).
Stack pointer (see Table 62).
Stack pointer high (see Table 63).
Stack boundary (see Table 64).
Configuration (see Table 65).
SPH
STCON
CFG
0xBF
0xAF
Table 57. Program Status Word SFR (PSW, Address 0xD0)
Bit
Bit Address
Mnemonic Description
7
0xD7
CY
Carry flag. Modified by ADD, ADDC, SUBB, MUL, and DIV instructions.
Auxiliary carry flag. Modified by ADD and ADDC instructions.
General-purpose flag available to the user.
6
0xD6
AC
5
0xD5
F0
[4:3] 0xD4, 0xD3
RS1, RS0
Register bank select bits.
RS1
0
RS0
0
Selected Bank
0
1
2
3
0
1
1
0
1
1
2
1
0
0xD2
0xD1
0xD0
OV
F1
P
Overflow flag. Modified by ADD, ADDC, SUBB, MUL, and DIV instructions.
General-purpose flag available to the user.
Parity bit. The number of bits set in the accumulator added to the value of the parity bit is always an
even number.
Rev. 0 | Page 73 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 58. Program Control SFR (PCON, Address 0x87)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
[6:0]
SMOD
Reserved
0
0
Double baud rate control.
Reserved. These bits must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
Table 59. Data Pointer Low SFR (DPL, Address 0x82)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
DPL
0
These bits contain the low byte of the data pointer.
Table 60. Data Pointer High SFR (DPH, Address 0x83)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
DPH
0
These bits contain the high byte of the data pointer.
Table 61. Data Pointer SFR (DPTR, Address 0x82 and Address 0x83)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[15:0] DP
0
These bits contain the 2-byte address of the data pointer. DPTR is a combination of the DPH and DPL SFRs.
Table 62. Stack Pointer SFR (SP, Address 0x81)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
SP
0
These bits contain the eight LSBs of the pointer for the stack.
Table 63. Stack Pointer High SFR (SPH, Address 0xB7)
Bit
Mnemonic
Reserved
SBFLG
SSA[10]
SSA[9]
SSA[8]
SP[10]
SP[9]
SP[8]
Default
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Reserved. This bit must be set to 1 for proper operation.
Stack bottom flag.
Stack Starting Address Bit 10.
Stack Starting Address Bit 9.
Stack Starting Address Bit 8.
Stack Address Bit 10.
Stack Address Bit 9.
Stack Address Bit 8.
Table 64. Stack Boundary SFR (STCON, Address 0xBF)
Bit
[7:3]
2
Mnemonic
WTRLINE
INT_RST
Default
Description
0
0
Contains the stack waterline setting bits.
Interrupt/reset selection bit.
INT_RST
Result
0
1
An interrupt is issued when a stack violation occurs
A reset is issued when a stack violation occurs
1
0
SBE
0
0
Stack boundary enable bit.
Waterline flag.
WTRLFG
Table 65. Configuration SFR (CFG, Address 0xAF)
Bit
Mnemonic
Reserved
EXTEN
Default
Description
7
1
0
Reserved. This bit should be left set for proper operation.
Enhanced UART enable bit.
6
EXTEN
Result
0
1
Standard 8052 UART without enhanced error checking features
Enhanced UART with enhanced error checking (see the UART Additional Features section)
5
SCPS
0
Synchronous communication selection bit.
SCPS
Result
0
1
I2C port is selected for control of the shared I2C/SPI (MOSI, MISO, SCLK, and SS) pins and SFRs
SPI port is selected for control of the shared I2C/SPI (MOSI, MISO, SCLK, and SS) pins and SFRs
Rev. 0 | Page 74 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
4
MOD38EN
0
38 kHz modulation enable bit.
MOD38EN
Result
0
1
38 kHz modulation is disabled
38 kHz modulation is enabled on the pins selected by the MOD38 bits in the
EPCFG SFR (Address 0x9F[7:0])
[3:2]
[1:0]
Reserved
00
01
Reserved. These bits should be kept at 0 for proper operation.
XREN1,
XREN0
XREN1, XREN0
Result
XREN1 or XREN0 = 1
Enable MOVX instruction to use 256 bytes of extended RAM
XREN1 and XREN0 = 0 Disable MOVX instruction
B Register
BASIC 8052 REGISTERS
The B register is used by the multiply and divide instructions,
Program Counter (PC)
MUL AB and DIV AB, to hold one of the operands. Because it
is not used for many instructions, it can be used as a scratch pad
register like those in the register banks. The B register is stored
in the SFR space (see Table 56).
The program counter holds the 2-byte address of the next instruc-
tion to be fetched. The PC is initialized with 0x00 at reset and is
incremented after each instruction is performed. Note that the
amount that is added to the PC depends on the number of bytes
in the instruction; therefore, the increment can range from one
to three bytes. The program counter is not directly accessible to
the user but can be directly modified by CALL and JMP instruc-
tions that change which part of the program is active.
Program Status Word (PSW)
The PSW register (PSW, Address 0xD0) reflects the status of
arithmetic and logical operations through carry, auxiliary carry,
and overflow flags. The parity flag reflects the parity of the contents
of the accumulator, which can be helpful for communication
protocols. The program status word SFR is bit addressable (see
Table 57).
Instruction Register (IR)
The instruction register holds the opcode of the instruction being
executed. The opcode is the binary code that results from assem-
bling an instruction. This register is not directly accessible to
the user.
Data Pointer (DPTR)
The data pointer SFR (DPTR, Address 0x82 and Address 0x83)
is made up of two 8-bit registers: DPL (low byte, Address 0x82),
and DPH (high byte, Address 0x83). These SFRs provide memory
addresses for internal code and data access. The DPTR can be
manipulated as a 16-bit register (DPTR = DPH, DPL) or as two
independent 8-bit registers (DPH and DPL) (see Table 59 and
Table 60).
Register Banks
There are four banks, each containing an 8-byte-wide register,
for a total of 32 bytes of registers. These registers are convenient
for temporary storage of mathematical operands. An instruction
involving the accumulator and a register can be executed in one
clock cycle, as opposed to two clock cycles to perform an instruc-
tion involving the accumulator and a literal or a byte of general-
purpose RAM. The register banks are located in the first 32 bytes
of RAM.
The 8052 MCU core architecture supports dual data pointers
(see the 8052 MCU Core Architecture section).
Stack Pointer (SP)
The active register bank is selected by the RS0 and RS1 bits in
the program status word SFR (PSW, Address 0xD0).
The stack pointer SFR (SP, Address 0x81) keeps track of the
current address of the top of the stack. To push a byte of data
onto the stack, the stack pointer is incremented and the data is
moved to the new top of the stack. To pop a byte of data off the
stack, the top byte of data is moved into the awaiting address
and the stack pointer is decremented. The stack is a last in first
out (LIFO) method of data storage because the most recent
addition to the stack is the first to come off it.
Accumulator
The accumulator is a working register, storing the results of
many arithmetic or logical operations. The accumulator is used
in more than half of the 8052 instructions where it is usually
referred to as A. The status register (PSW) constantly monitors
the number of bits that are set in the accumulator to determine
if it has even or odd parity. The accumulator is stored in the
SFR space (see Table 56).
The stack is used during CALL and RET instructions to keep
track of the address to move into the PC when returning from
the function call. The stack is also manipulated when vectoring
for interrupts, to keep track of the prior state of the PC.
Rev. 0 | Page 75 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
The stack resides in the upper part of the extended internal RAM.
The SP bits (Bits[7:0]) in the stack pointer SFR (SP, Address 0x81)
and the SP bits (Bits[2:0]) in the stack pointer high SFR (SPH,
Address 0xB7) hold the address of the stack in the extended
RAM. The advantage of this solution is that the use of the
general-purpose RAM can be limited to data storage. The use
of the extended internal RAM can be limited to the stack or,
alternatively, split between the stack and data storage if more
space is required. This separation limits the chance of data
corruption because the stack can be contained in the upper
section of the XRAM and does not over-flow into the lower
section containing data. Data can still be stored in extended
RAM by using the MOVX command.
When enabled, the stack boundary protection can be configured
to either reset the part or trigger an interrupt when a stack viola-
tion occurs. The value of the INT_RST bit (Bit 2) of the STCON
SFR (Address 0xBF) determines the response of the part. When
STCON[2] is set to 0x1 and the stack pointer exceeds the waterline,
the part resets immediately, no matter what other routines are
in progress. If an attempt is made to move the stack pointer below
the default stack starting address when STCON[2] is high, a reset
also occurs. If an interrupt response is selected, the watchdog
interrupt service routine is entered, assuming that there is no
higher level interrupt currently being serviced. Note that once the
SBE bit (Bit 1) of the STCON SFR is enabled, an interrupt(or reset)
triggers if the stack boundary is violated, regardless of the status
of the EA bit (Bit 7) in the interrupt enable SFR (IE, Address 0xA8).
This is because the watchdog interrupt is automatically configured
as a high priority interrupt and, therefore, is not disabled by
clearing EA. When the SBE bit (Bit 1) of the STCON SFR
(Address 0xBF) is low, the feature is completely disabled and no
pending interrupts are generated.
The default starting address for the stack is 0x100, electing the
upper 1792 bytes of XRAM for the stack operation. The starting
address can be reconfigured to reduce the stack by writing to
the SPH[5:3] bits. These three bits set the value of the three most
significant bits of the stack pointer. For example, setting the
SPH[5:3] to a value of 110b moves the default starting address
of the stack to 0x600, allowing the highest 512 bytes of the XRAM
to be used for stack operation. If the situation occurs that the
stack reaches the top of the XRAM and overflows, the stack
pointer rolls over to the default starting address that is written
in SPH[5:3]. Care should be taken if altering the default starting
address of the stack because unwanted overwrite operations
may occur, should the stack overflow or underflow.
There are two separate flags associated with the stack boundary
protection, allowing the cause of the violation to be determined.
When the waterline is exceeded, a flag is set in WTRLFG (Bit 0)
of the stack boundary SFR (STCON, Address 0xBF), indicating that
the reset/interrupt was initiated by the stack waterline monitor.
This flag remains high until the stack pointer falls below the water-
line and the user clears the flag in software. A waterline or
watchdog reset alone does not clear the flag. To successfully clear
the flag, the software clear must occur while the stack pointer is
below the waterline.
Stack Boundary Protection
As a warning signal that the stack pointer is extending outside
the specified range, a stack boundary protection feature is included.
This feature is controlled through the stack boundary SFR
(STCON, Address 0xBF) and is disabled by default. To enable
this feature, the boundary protection enable bit (SBE, Bit 1)
should be set in the STCON SFR.
Note that the stack pointer should never be altered while in the
interrupt service routine because this leads to the program
returning to a different section of the program and, therefore,
malfunctioning. An external reset also causes the waterline flag
to reset.
The stack boundary protection works in two ways to protect the
remainder of the XRAM from being corrupted. The waterline
detection feature monitors the top of the stack and warns the
user when the stack pointer is reaching the overflow point. By
setting STCON[7:3], the level of the waterline below the top of
the XRAM can be set. For example, by setting STCON[7:3] to
the maximum value of 0x1F, the waterline is set to its minimum
value of 0x7FF − 0x1F = 0x7F0. Similarly, by setting STCON[7:3]
to 0x1, the waterline is set at the top of the RAM space,
When an attempt is made to move the stack pointer below the
stack starting address, a flag (SBFLG, Bit 0) is set in the stack
pointer high SFR (SPH, Address 0xB7), indicating that the reset/
interrupt was initiated by the stack bottom monitor. Once again,
a boundary or watchdog reset alone does not clear this flag, and
the user must clear the flag in software to successfully acknowledge
the event. Note that if SPH[5:3] and SPH[2:0] are altered simul-
taneously to reduce the default stack starting address, when the
stack boundary condition is enabled, a stack violation condition
occurs and the stack bottom flag, SPH[6], is initiated. To avoid
this condition, it is recommended that the default stack starting
address remain at 0x100 or be increased to further up the XRAM.
Address 0x7FE. Note that if STCON[7:3] is set to 000b, the
feature is effectively disabled and no interrupt or reset is generated.
The bottom of the stack is also preserved by the stack boundary
feature. Should the stack pointer be written to a value lower
than the default stack starting address defined in SPH[5:3],
a warning is issued and the perpetrating command is ignored.
The protection for both the waterline and the stack starting
address are enabled simultaneously by setting SBE (Bit 1) in the
STCON SFR.
Rev. 0 | Page 76 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
A useful implementation of the waterline feature is to determine
the amount of space required for the stack and allow a suitable
default starting address to be selected. This optimizes the use
of the additional XRAM space, allowing it to be used for data
storage. To obtain this information, the waterline should be set
to the estimated stack maximum and the interrupt enabled. If
the stack exceeds the estimated maximum, the interrupt triggers,
and the waterline level should be increased in the interrupt
service routine. Before returning to the main program, the
waterline interrupt status flag (WTRLFG, Bit 0) of the stack
boundary SFR (STCON, Address 0xBF) should be cleared. This
program continues to jump to the waterline service routine
until the stack no longer exceeds the waterline level and the
maximum stack level is determined.
for a highest priority power supply management interrupt, PSM
(see the Interrupt System section).
I/O Port SFRs
The 8052 core supports four I/O ports, P0 through P3, where
Port 0 and Port 2 are typically used for access to external code
and data spaces. The ADE5166/ADE5169, unlike standard 8052
products, provide internal nonvolatile flash memory so that an
external code space is unnecessary. The on-chip LCD driver
requires many pins, some of which are dedicated for LCD
functionality and others that can be configured at LCD or
general-purpose I/O. Due to the limited number of I/O pins,
the ADE5166/ADE5169 do not allow access to external code
and data spaces.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide 20 pins that can be used for
general-purpose I/O. These pins are mapped to Port 0, Port 1, and
Port 2 and are accessed through three bit-addressable 8052 SFRs:
P0, P1, and P2. Another enhanced feature of the ADE5166/
ADE5169 is that the weak pull-ups standard on 8052 Port 1,
Port 2, and Port 3 can be disabled to make open-drain outputs,
as is standard on Port 0. The weak pull-ups can be enabled on
a pin-by-pin basis (see the I/O Ports section).
0x7FF
WATERLINE
0x7FF-STCON[7:3]
STACK STARTING
ADDRESS
{SPH[5:3], 0x00}
2kB OF
ON-CHIP x-RAM
0xFF
Power Control Register (PCON, Address 0x87)
256 BYTES
OF RAM
The 8052 core defines two power-down modes: power-down
and idle. The ADE5166/ADE5169 enhance the power control
capability of the traditional 8052 MCU with additional power
management functions. The POWCON register is used to
define power control specific functionality for the ADE5166/
ADE5169. The program control SFR (PCON, Address 0x87) is
not bit addressable (see the Power Management section).
(DATA)
0x00
0x00
Figure 77. Extended Stack Pointer Operation
STANDARD 8052 SFRS
The standard 8052 SFRs include the accumulator (ACC), B, PSW,
DPTR, and SP SFRs, as described in the Basic 8052 Registers
section. The 8052 also defines standard timers, serial port
interfaces, interrupts, I/O ports, and power-down modes.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide many other peripherals not
standard to the 8052 core, for example:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ADE energy measurement DSP
Full RTC
LCD driver
Battery switchover/power management
Temperature ADC
Timer SFRs
The 8052 contains three 16-bit timers, the identical Timer 0 and
Timer 1, as well as a Timer 2. These timers can also function as
event counters. Timer 2 has a capture feature in which the value
of the timer can be captured in two 8-bit registers upon the
assertion of an external input signal (see the Timers section).
Battery ADC
SPI/I2C communication
Flash memory controller
Watchdog timer
Serial Port SFRs
The two full-duplex serial port peripherals each require two
registers, one for setting up the baud rate and other communication
parameters, and another byte for the transmit/receive buffer. The
ADE5166/ADE5169 also provide enhanced serial port function-
ality with a dedicated timer for baud rate generation with a
fractional divisor and additional error detection (see the UART
Serial Interface section and the UART2 Serial Interface section.)
Secondary UART port
MEMORY OVERVIEW
The ADE5166/ADE5169 contain three memory blocks.
•
•
•
62 kB of on-chip Flash/EE program and data memory
256 bytes of general-purpose RAM
2 kB of internal extended RAM (XRAM)
Interrupt SFR
There is a two-tiered interrupt system standard in the 8052
core. The priority level for each interrupt source is individually
selectable as high or low. TheADE5166/ADE5169 enhance this
interrupt system by creating, in essence, a third interrupt tier
The 256 bytes of general-purpose RAM share the upper 128 bytes
of its address space with the SFRs. All of the memory spaces are
shown in Figure 76. The addressing mode specifies which
memory space to access.
Rev. 0 | Page 77 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
BYTE
ADDRESS
General-Purpose RAM
BIT ADDRESSES (HEXA)
0x2F
0x2E
0x2D
0x2C
0x2B
0x2A
0x29
0x28
0x27
0x26
0x25
0x24
0x23
0x22
0x21
0x20
7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78
77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70
6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68
67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58
57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50
4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 48
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30
2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
0F 0E 0D 0C 0B 0A 09 08
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
General-purpose RAM resides in Memory Location 0x00
through Memory Location 0xFF. It contains the register banks.
0x7F
GENERAL-PURPOSE
AREA
0x30
0x2F
BIT-ADDRESSABLE
BANKS
(BIT ADDRESSES)
SELECTED
VIA
BITS IN PSW
0x20
0x18
0x10
0x08
0x00
0x1F
11
10
01
00
0x17
0x0F
0x07
FOUR BANKS OF EIGHT
REGISTERS R0 TO R7
Figure 80. Bit Addressable Area of General-Purpose RAM
Bit addressing can be used for instructions that involve Boolean
variable manipulation and program branching (see the Instruction
Set section).
RESET VALUE OF
STACK POINTER
Figure 78. Lower 128 Bytes of Internal Data Memory
Special Function Registers (SFRs)
Address 0x80 through Address 0xFF of general-purpose RAM
are shared with the SFRs. The mode of addressing determines
which memory space is accessed, as shown in Figure 79.
Special function registers are registers that affect the function
of the 8051 core or its peripherals. These registers are located
in RAM at Address 0x80 through Address 0xFF. They are
accessible only through direct addressing, as shown in Figure 79.
0xFF
ACCESSIBLE BY
ACCESSIBLE BY
INDIRECT ADDRESSING DIRECT ADDRESSING
The individual bits of some of the SFRs can be accessed for use
in Boolean and program branching instructions. These SFRs are
labeled as bit addressable, and the bit addresses are given in
Table 14.
ONLY
ONLY
0x80
0x7F
ACCESSIBLE BY
DIRECT AND INDIRECT
ADDRESSING
0x00
Extended Internal RAM (XRAM)
GENERAL-PURPOSE RAM
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS (SFRs)
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide 2 kB of extended on-chip
RAM. No external RAM is supported. This RAM is located in
Address 0x00 through Address 0x7FF in the extended RAM
space. To select the extended RAM memory space, the extended
indirect addressing modes are used.
Figure 79. General-Purpose RAM and SFR Memory Address Overlap
Both direct and indirect addressing can be used to access general-
purpose RAM from 0x00 through 0x7F, but indirect addressing
must be used to access general-purpose RAM with addresses in
the range from 0x80 through 0xFF because they share the same
address space with the SFRs.
0x7FF
2kB OF
EXTENDED INTERNAL
RAM (XRAM)
The 8052 core also has the means to access individual bits of
certain addresses in the general-purpose RAM and special
function memory spaces. The individual bits of general-purpose
RAM, Address 0x20 to Address 0x2F, can be accessed through
Bit Address 0x00 to Bit Address 0x7F. The benefit of bit addressing
is that the individual bits can be accessed quickly, without the
need for bit masking, which takes more code memory and
execution time. The bit addresses for general-purpose RAM
Address 0x20 through Address 0x2F can be seen in Figure 80.
0x00
Figure 81. Extended Internal RAM (XRAM) Space
Code Memory
Code and data memory is stored in the 62 kB flash memory
space. No external code memory is supported. To access code
memory, code indirect addressing is used.
ADDRESSING MODES
The 8052 core provides several addressing modes. The address-
ing mode determines how the core interprets the memory location
or data value specified in assembly language code. There are six
addressing modes, as shown in Table 66.
Rev. 0 | Page 78 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Extended Direct Addressing
Table 66. 8052 Addressing Modes
The DPTR register is used to access internal extended RAM in
extended indirect addressing mode. The ADE5166/ADE5169
provide 2 kB of internal extended RAM (XRAM), accessed
through MOVX instructions. External memory spaces are not
supported on the ADE5166/ADE5169.
Core Clock
Bytes Cycles
Addressing Mode Example
Immediate
MOV A, #A8h
MOV DPTR, #A8h
MOV A, A8h
2
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
2
1
2
4
4
4
4
3
Direct
MOV A, IE
MOV A, R0
In extended direct addressing mode, the DPTR register points
to the address of the byte of extended RAM. The following code
moves the contents of extended RAM Address 0x100 to the
accumulator:
Indirect
MOV A, @R0
Extended Direct
Extended Indirect
Code Indirect
MOVX A, @DPTR
MOVX A, @R0
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
MOVC A, @A+PC
JMP @A+DPTR
MOV
DPTR,#100h
A,@DPTR
MOVX
These two instructions require a total of seven clock cycles and
four bytes of storage in the program memory.
Immediate Addressing
Extended Indirect Addressing
In immediate addressing, the expression entered after the number
sign (#) is evaluated by the assembler and stored in the memory
address specified. This number is referred to as a literal because
it refers only to a value and not to a memory location. Instructions
using this addressing mode are slower than those between two
registers because the literal must be stored and fetched from
memory. The expression can be entered as a symbolic variable
or an arithmetic expression; the value is computed by the
assembler.
The internal extended RAM is accessed through a pointer to the
address in indirect addressing mode. The ADE5166/ADE5169
provide 2 kB of internal extended RAM, accessed through MOVX
instructions. External memory is not supported on the ADE5166/
ADE5169.
In extended indirect addressing mode, a register holds the
address of the byte of extended RAM. The following code
moves the contents of extended RAM Address 0x80 to the
accumulator:
Direct Addressing
MOV
R0, #80h
A, @R0
With direct addressing, the value at the source address is moved
to the destination address. Direct addressing provides the fastest
execution time of all the addressing modes when an instruction
is performed between registers using direct addressing. Note that
indirect or direct addressing modes can be used to access general-
purpose RAM Address 0x00 through Address 0x7F. An instruction
with direct addressing that uses an address between 0x80 and
0xFF is referring to a special function memory location.
MOVX
These two instructions require six clock cycles and three bytes
of storage.
Note that there are 2 kB of extended RAM, so both extended
direct and extended indirect addressing can cover the whole
address range. There is a storage and speed advantage to using
extended indirect addressing because the additional byte of
addressing available through the DPTR register that is not
needed is not stored.
Indirect Addressing
With indirect addressing, the value pointed to by the register is
moved to the destination address. For example, to move the
contents of internal RAM Address 0x82 to the accumulator, use
the following two instructions, which require a total of four
clock cycles and three bytes of storage in the program memory:
From the three examples demonstrating the access of internal
RAM from 0x80 through 0xFF and extended internal RAM
from 0x00 through 0xFF, it can be seen that it is most efficient
to use the entire internal RAM accessible through indirect
access before moving to extended RAM.
MOV
MOV
R0,#82h
A,@R0
Code Indirect Addressing
Indirect addressing allows addresses to be computed and is
useful for indexing into data arrays stored in RAM.
The internal code memory can be accessed indirectly. This can be
useful for implementing lookup tables and other arrays of constants
that are stored in flash memory. For example, to move the data
stored in flash memory at Address 0x8002 into the accumulator,
Note that an instruction that refers to Address 0x00 through
Address 0x7F is referring to internal RAM, and indirect or direct
addressing modes can be used. An instruction with indirect
addressing that uses an address between 0x80 and 0xFF is
referring to internal RAM, not to an SFR.
MOV
DPTR,#8002h
A
CLR
MOVX
A,@A+DPTR
The accumulator can be used as a variable index into the array
of flash memory located at DPTR.
Rev. 0 | Page 79 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 67 documents the number of clock cycles required for each instruction. Most instructions are executed in one or two clock cycles,
resulting in a 4-MIPS peak performance. Note that, throughout this section, A represents the accumulator.
Table 67. Instruction Set
Mnemonic
Arithmetic
ADD A, Rn
ADD A, @Ri
ADD A, dir
ADD A, #data
ADDC A, Rn 1 1
ADDC A, @Ri
ADDC A, dir
ADDC A, #data
SUBB A, Rn
SUBB A, @Ri
SUBB A, dir
SUBB A, #data
INC A
INC Rn
INC @
INC dir
INC DPTR
DEC A
DEC Rn
DEC @Ri
DEC dir
MUL AB
Description
Bytes
Cycles
Add register to A
Add indirect memory to A
Add direct byte to A
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
2
2
9
9
2
Add Immediate to A
Add register to A with carry
Add indirect memory to A with carry
Add direct byte to A with carry
Add immediate to A with carry
Subtract register from A with borrow
Subtract indirect memory from A with borrow
Subtract direct from A with borrow
Subtract immediate from A with borrow
Increment A
Increment register
Ri increment indirect memory
Increment direct byte
Increment data pointer
Decrement A
Decrement register
Decrement indirect memory
Decrement direct byte
Multiply A by B
Divide A by B
Decimal Adjust A
DIV AB
DA A
Logic
ANL A, Rn
ANL A, @Ri
ANL A, dir
ANL A, #data
ANL dir, A
ANL dir, #data
ORL A, Rn
ORL A, @Ri
ORL A, dir
ORL A, #data
ORL dir, A
ORL dir, #data
XRL A, Rn
XRL A, @Ri
XRL A, #data
XRL dir, A
XRL A, dir
XRL dir, #data
CLR A
AND register to A
AND indirect memory to A
AND direct byte to A
AND immediate to A
AND A to direct byte
AND immediate data to direct byte
OR register to A
OR indirect memory to A
OR direct byte to A
OR immediate to A
OR A to direct byte
OR immediate data to direct byte
Exclusive-OR register to A
Exclusive-OR indirect memory to A
Exclusive-OR immediate to A
Exclusive-OR A to direct byte
Exclusive-OR indirect memory to A
Exclusive-OR immediate data to direct
Clear A
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
CPL A
SWAP A
RL A
Complement A
Swap nibbles of A
Rotate A left
Rev. 0 | Page 80 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Mnemonic
RLC A
RR A
Description
Bytes
Cycles
Rotate A left through carry
Rotate A right
Rotate A right through carry
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRC A
Data Transfer
MOV A, Rn
MOV A, @Ri
MOV Rn, A
MOV @Ri, A
MOV A, dir
MOV A, #data
MOV Rn, #data
MOV dir, A
MOV Rn, dir
MOV dir, Rn
MOV @Ri, #data
MOV dir, @Ri
MOV @Ri, dir
MOV dir, dir
MOV dir, #data
MOV DPTR, #data
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
MOVC A, @A+PC
MOVX A, @Ri
MOVX A, @DPTR
MOVX @Ri, A
MOVX @DPTR, A
PUSH dir
Move register to A
Move indirect memory to A
Move A to register
Move A to indirect memory
Move direct byte to A
Move immediate to A
Move register to immediate
Move A to direct byte
Move register to direct byte
Move direct to register
Move immediate to indirect memory
Move indirect to direct memory
Move direct to indirect memory
Move direct byte to direct byte
Move immediate to direct byte
Move immediate to data pointer
Move code byte relative DPTR to A
Move code byte relative PC to A
Move external (A8) data to A
Move external (A16) data to A
Move A to external data (A8)
Move A to external data (A16)
Push direct byte onto stack
Pop direct byte from stack
Exchange A and register
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
1
2
2
2
POP dir
XCH A, Rn
XCH A, @Ri
XCHD A, @Ri
XCH A, dir
Boolean
Exchange A and indirect memory
Exchange A and indirect memory nibble
Exchange A and direct byte
CLR C
CLR bit
SETB C
SETB bit
CPL C
CPL bit
ANL C,bit
ANL C, /bit
ORL C, bit
ORL C, /bit OR
MOV C, bit
MOV bit, C
Branching
JMP @A+DPTR
RET
Clear carry
Clear direct bit
Set carry
Set direct bit
Complement carry
Complement direct bit
AND direct bit and carry
AND direct bit inverse to carry
OR direct bit and carry
Direct bit inverse to carry
Move direct bit to carry
Move carry to direct bit
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Jump indirect relative to DPTR
Return from subroutine
Return from interrupt
Absolute jump to subroutine
Absolute jump unconditional
Short jump (relative address)
Jump on carry equal to 1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
3
3
3
3
RETI
ACALL addr11
AJMP addr11
SJMP rel
JC rel
Rev. 0 | Page 81 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Mnemonic
JNC rel
JZ rel
JNZ rel
DJNZ Rn, rel
LJMP
Description
Bytes
Cycles
Jump on carry = 0
Jump on accumulator = 0
Jump on accumulator ≠ 0
Decrement register, JNZ relative
Long jump unconditional
Long jump to subroutine
Jump on direct bit = 1
Jump on direct bit = 0
Jump on direct bit = 1 and clear
Compare A, direct JNE relative
Compare A, immediate JNE relative
Compare register, immediate JNE relative
Compare indirect, immediate JNE relative
Decrement direct byte, JNZ relative
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
LCALL addr16
JB bit, rel
JNB bit, rel
JBC bit, rel
CJNE A, dir, rel
CJNE A, #data, rel
CJNE Rn, #data, rel
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel
DJNZ dir, rel
Miscellaneous
NOP
No operation
1
1
READ-MODIFY-WRITE INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS THAT AFFECT FLAGS
Some 8052 instructions read the latch and others read the pin.
The state of the pin is read for instructions that input a port bit.
Instructions that read the latch rather than the pins are the ones
that read a value, possibly change it, and rewrite it to the latch.
Because these instructions involve modifying the port, it is
assumed that the pins being modified are outputs, so the output
state of the pin is read from the latch. This prevents a possible
misinterpretation of the voltage level of a pin. For example, if a
port pin is used to drive the base of a transistor, a 1 is written to
the bit to turn on the transistor. If the CPU reads the same port
bit at the pin rather than the latch, it reads the base voltage of
the transistor and interprets it as Logic 0. Reading the latch
rather than the pin returns the correct value of 1.
Many instructions explicitly modify the carry bit, such as the
MOV C bit and CLR C instructions. Other instructions that
affect status flags are listed in this section.
ADD A, Source
This instruction adds the source to the accumulator. No status
flags are referenced by the instruction.
Table 69. ADD A (Source) Affected Status Flags
Flag Description
C
Set if there is a carry out of Bit 7. Cleared otherwise. Used
to indicate an overflow if the operands are unsigned.
OV
Set if there is a carry out of Bit 6 or a carry out of Bit 7, but
not if both are set. Used to indicate an overflow for
signed addition. This flag is set if two positive operands
yield a negative result or if two negative operands yield a
positive result.
The instructions that read the latch rather than the pins are
called read-modify-write instructions and are listed in Table 68.
When the destination operand is a port or a port bit, these
instructions read the latch rather than the pin.
AC
Set if there is a carry out of Bit 3. Cleared otherwise.
ADDC A, Source
Table 68. Read-Modify-Write Instructions
This instruction adds the source and the carry bit to the accu-
mulator. The carry status flag is referenced by the instruction.
Instruction
Example
ANL P0, A
ORL P1, A
XRL P2, A
Description
Logic AND
Logic OR
ANL
ORL
XRL
Table 70. ADDC A (Source) Affected Status Flags
Flag Description
Logic XOR
C
Set if there is a carry out of Bit 7. Cleared otherwise. Used
to indicate an overflow if the operands are unsigned.
JBC
JBC P1.1, LABEL Jump if Bit = 1 and clear bit
CPL
INC
CPL P2.0
INC P2
Complement bit
Increment
OV
Set if there is a carry out of Bit 6 or a carry out of Bit 7, but
not if both are set. Used to indicate an overflow for
signed addition. This flag is set if two positive operands
yield a negative result or if two negative operands yield a
positive result.
DEC
DEC P2
Decrement
DJNZ
DJNZ P0, LABEL Decrement and jump if not zero
MOV PX.Y, C1 MOV P0.0, C
Move carry to Bit Y of Port X
Clear Bit Y of Port X
AC
Set if there is a carry out of Bit 3. Cleared otherwise.
CLR PX.Y1
SETB PX.Y1
CLR P0.0
SETB P0.0
Set Bit Y of Port X
1 These instructions read the port byte (all eight bits), modify the addressed
bit, and write the new byte back to the latch.
Rev. 0 | Page 82 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
SUBB A, Source
to correct the lower four bits. If the carry bit is set when the instruc-
tion begins, or if 0x06 is added to the accumulator in the first step,
0x60 is added to the accumulator to correct the higher four bits.
This instruction subtracts the source byte and the carry (borrow)
flag from the accumulator. It references the carry (borrow)
status flag.
The carry and AC status flags are referenced by this instruction.
Table 71. SUBB A (Source) Affected Status Flags
Table 74. DA A Affected Status Flag
Flag Description
Flag
Description
C
Set if there is a borrow needed for Bit 7. Cleared
otherwise. Used to indicate an overflow if the operands
are unsigned.
C
Set if the result is greater than 0x99. Cleared otherwise.
RRC A
This instruction rotates the accumulator to the right through
the carry flag. The old LSB of the accumulator becomes the new
carry flag, and the old carry flag is loaded into the new MSB of
the accumulator.
OV
Set if there is a borrow needed for Bit 6 or Bit 7, but not
for both. Used to indicate an overflow for signed
subtraction. This flag is set if a negative number
subtracted from a positive yields a negative result or if a
positive number subtracted from a negative number
yields a positive result.
The carry status flag is referenced by this instruction.
AC
Set if a borrow is needed for Bit 3. Cleared otherwise.
Table 75. RRC A Affected Status Flag
MUL AB
Flag
Description
This instruction multiplies the accumulator by the B SFR. This
operation is unsigned. The lower byte of the 16-bit product is
stored in the accumulator and the higher byte is left in the B
register. No status flags are referenced by the instruction.
C
Equal to the state of ACC[0] before execution of the
instruction.
RLC A
This instruction rotates the accumulator to the left through the
carry flag. The old MSB of the accumulator becomes the new
carry flag, and the old carry flag is loaded into the new LSB of
the accumulator.
Table 72. MUL AB Affected Status Flags
Flag
Description
C
Cleared
OV
Set if the result is greater than 255. Cleared otherwise.
The carry status flag is referenced by this instruction.
DIV AB
Table 76. RLC A Affected Status Flag
This instruction divides the accumulator by the B SFR. This
operation is unsigned. The integer part of the quotient is stored
in the accumulator and the remainder goes into the B register.
No status flags are referenced by the instruction.
Flag
Description
C
Equal to the state of ACC[7] before execution of the
instruction.
CJNE Destination, Source, Relative Jump
Table 73. DIV AB Affected Status Flags
This instruction compares the source value to the destination
value and branches to the location set by the relative jump if
they are not equal. If the values are equal, program execution
continues with the instruction after the CJNE instruction.
Flag
Description
C
Cleared
OV
Cleared unless the B register is equal to 0, in which
case the results of the division are undefined and the
OV flag is set.
No status flags are referenced by this instruction.
Table 77. CINE Destination (Source, Relative Jump)
Affected Status Flag
DA A
This instruction adjusts the accumulator to hold two 4-bit digits
after the addition of two binary coded decimals (BCDs) with the
ADD or ADDC instructions. If the AC bit is set or if the value of
Bit 0 to Bit 3 exceeds 9, 0x06 is added to the accumulator
Flag
Description
C
Set if the source value is greater than the destination
value. Cleared otherwise.
Rev. 0 | Page 83 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
DUAL DATA POINTERS
MOV DPTR,#0
;Main DPTR = 0
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 incorporates two data pointers. The
second data pointer is a shadow data pointer and is selected via
the data pointer control SFR (DPCON, Address 0xA7). DPCON
features automatic hardware postincrement and postdecrement, as
well as an automatic data pointer toggle.
MOV DPCON,#55H
;Select shadow DPTR
;DPTR1 increment mode
;DPTR0 increment mode
;DPTR auto toggling ON
MOV DPTR,#0D000H ;DPTR = D000H
MOVELOOP: CLR A
Note that this is the only section of the data sheet where the
main and shadow data pointers are distinguished. Whenever the
data pointer (DPTR) is mentioned elsewhere in the data sheet,
active DPTR is implied.
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
;Post Inc DPTR
;Get data
In addition, only the MOVC/MOVX @DPTR instructions
automatically postincrement and postdecrement the DPTR.
Other MOVC/MOVX instructions, such as MOVC PC
or MOVC @Ri, do not cause the DPTR to automatically
postincrement and postdecrement.
;Swap to Main DPTR(Data)
MOVX @DPTR,A
;Put ACC in XRAM
;Increment main DPTR
;Swap Shadow DPTR(Code)
MOV A, DPL
To illustrate the operation of DPCON, the following code copies
256 bytes of code memory at Address 0xD000 into XRAM,
starting from Address 0x0000:
JNZ MOVELOOP
Table 78. Data Pointer Control SFR (DPCON, Address 0xA7)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default Description
7
0
0
Not implemented. Write don’t care.
6
DPT
Data pointer automatic toggle enable. Cleared by the user to disable autoswapping of the DPTR.
Set in user software to enable automatic toggling of the DPTR after each MOVX or MOVC instruction.
[5:4]
DP1m1,
DP1m0
0
Shadow data pointer mode. These bits enable extra modes of the shadow data pointer operation,
allowing more compact and more efficient code size and execution.
DP1m1
DP1m0
Result (Behavior of the Shadow Data Pointer)
8052 behavior.
DPTR is postincremented after a MOVX or a MOVC instruction.
DPTR is postdecremented after a MOVX or MOVC instruction.
DPTR LSB is toggled after a MOVX or MOVC instruction. This instruction can be
useful for moving 8-bit blocks to/from 16-bit devices.
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
[3:2]
DP0m1,
DP0m0
0
Main data pointer mode. These bits enable extra modes of the main data pointer operation, allowing
more compact and more efficient code size and execution.
DP0m1
DP0m0
Result (Behavior of the Main Data Pointer)
8052 behavior.
DPTR is postincremented after a MOVX or a MOVC instruction.
DPTR is postdecremented after a MOVX or MOVC instruction.
DPTR LSB is toggled after a MOVX or MOVC instruction. This instruction is useful
for moving 8-bit blocks to/from 16-bit devices.
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Not implemented. Write don’t care.
DPSEL
Data pointer select. Cleared by the user to select the main data pointer, meaning that the contents of
this 16-bit register are placed into the DPL SFR and DPH SFR. Set by the user to select the shadow data
pointer, meaning that the contents of a separate 16-bit register appear in the DPL SFR and DPH SFR.
Rev. 0 | Page 84 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
INTERRUPT SYSTEM
The unique power management architecture of the ADE5166/
ADE5169 includes an operating mode (PSM2) where the 8052
MCU core is shut down. Events can be configured to wake the
8052 MCU core from the PSM2 operating mode. A distinction
is drawn here between events that can trigger the wake-up of
the 8052 MCU core and events that can trigger an interrupt
when the MCU core is active. Events that can wake the core are
referred to as wake-up events, whereas events that can interrupt
the program flow when the MCU is active are called interrupts.
See the 3.3 V Peripherals and Wake-Up Events section to learn
more about events that can wake the 8052 core from PSM2 mode.
occur at the same time, the Priority 1 interrupt is serviced first.
An interrupt cannot be interrupted by another interrupt of the
same priority level. If two interrupts of the same priority level
occur simultaneously, a polling sequence is observed (see the
Interrupt Priority section).
INTERRUPT ARCHITECTURE
The ADE5166/ADE5169 possess advanced power supply man-
agement features. To ensure a fast response to time-critical
power supply issues, such as a loss of line power, the power
supply management interrupt should be able to interrupt any
interrupt service routine. To enable the user to have full use of
the standard 8052 interrupt priority levels, an additional priority
level is added for the power supply management (PSM) interrupt.
The PSM interrupt is the only interrupt at this highest interrupt
priority level.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide 12 interrupt sources with three
priority levels. The power management interrupt is at the highest
priority level. The other two priority levels are configurable
through the interrupt priority SFR (IP, Address 0xB8) and
interrupt enable and Priority 2 SFR (IEIP2, Address 0xA9).
HIGH
PSM
STANDARD 8052 INTERRUPT ARCHITECTURE
PRIORITY 1
The 8052 standard interrupt architecture includes two tiers of
interrupts, where some interrupts are assigned a high priority
and others are assigned a low priority.
PRIORITY 0
LOW
Figure 83. Interrupt Architecture
HIGH
See the Power Supply Management (PSM) Interrupt section for
more information on the PSM interrupt.
PRIORITY 1
PRIORITY 0
LOW
INTERRUPT REGISTERS
Figure 82. Standard 8052 Interrupt Priority Levels
The control and configuration of the interrupt system are carried
out through four interrupt-related SFRs, discussed in this section.
A Priority 1 interrupt can interrupt the service routine of a
Priority 0 interrupt, and if two interrupts of different priorities
Table 79. Interrupt SFRs
SFR
Address
Default
0x00
0x00
0xA0
0x10
Bit Addressable
Description
IE
IP
0xA8
0xB8
0xA9
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Interrupt enable (see Table 80).
Interrupt priority (see Table 81).
Interrupt enable and Priority 2 (see Table 82).
Watchdog timer (see Table 87 and the Writing to the Watchdog Timer SFR
(WDCON, Address 0xC0) section).
IEIP2
WDCON 0xC0
Table 80. Interrupt Enable SFR (IE, Address 0xA8)
Bit
Bit Address Mnemonic Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
0xAF
0xAE
0xAD
0xAC
0xAB
0xAA
0xA9
0xA8
EA
Enables all interrupt sources. Set by the user. Cleared by the user to disable all interrupt sources.
Enables the temperature ADC interrupt. Set by the user.
Enables the Timer 2 interrupt. Set by the user.
Enables the UART serial port interrupt. Set by the user.
Enables the Timer 1 interrupt. Set by the user.
Enables the External Interrupt 1 (INT1). Set by the user.
Enables the Timer 0 interrupt. Set by the user.
Enables External Interrupt 0 (INT0). Set by the user.
ETEMP
ET2
ES
ET1
EX1
ET0
EX0
1
0
Rev. 0 | Page 85 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 81. Interrupt Priority SFR (IP, Address 0xB8)
Bit
Bit Address
Mnemonic
PADE
PTEMP
PT2
PS
PT1
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
0xBF
0xBE
0xBD
0xBC
0xBB
ADE energy measurement interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
Temperature ADC interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
Timer 2 interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
UART serial port interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
Timer 1 interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
INT1 (External Interrupt 1) priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
Timer 0 interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
INT0 (External Interrupt 0) priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
0xBA
PX1
1
0
0xB9
0xB8
PT0
PX0
Table 82. Interrupt Enable and Priority 2 SFR (IEIP2, Address 0xA9)
Bit
Mnemonic
Description
7
6
PS2
PTI
UART2 serial port interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
RTC interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
5
4
ES2
PSI
Enables the UART2 serial port interrupt. Set by the user.
SPI/I2C interrupt priority (1 = high, 0 = low).
3
2
1
0
EADE
ETI
EPSM
ESI
Enables the energy metering interrupt (ADE). Set by the user.
Enables the RTC interval timer interrupt. Set by the user.
Enables the PSM power supply management interrupt. Set by the user.
Enables the SPI/I2C interrupt. Set by the user.
INTERRUPT PRIORITY
If two interrupts of the same priority level occur simultaneously, the polling sequence is observed (as shown in Table 83).
Table 83. Priority Within Interrupt Level
Source
IPSM
IRTC
IADE
WDT
Priority
Description
0 (highest)
1
2
3
4
5
Power supply management interrupt.
RTC interval timer interrupt.
ADE energy measurement interrupt.
Watchdog timer overflow interrupt.
Temperature ADC interrupt.
External Interrupt 0.
ITEMP
IE0
TF0
IE1
6
7
Timer/Counter 0 interrupt.
External Interrupt 1.
TF1
ISPI/I2CI
RI/TI
TF2/EXF2
RI2/TI2
8
9
10
11
Timer/Counter 1 interrupt.
SPI/I2C interrupt.
UART serial port interrupt.
Timer/Counter 2 interrupt.
UART2 serial port interrupt.
12 (lowest)
Rev. 0 | Page 86 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
INTERRUPT FLAGS
The interrupt flags and status flags associated with the interrupt vectors are shown in Table 84 and Table 85, respectively. Most of the
interrupts have flags associated with them.
Table 84. Interrupt Flags
Interrupt Source
Flag
Bit Name
IE0
TF0
IE1
TF1
TI
RI
TI2
RI2
TF2
EXF2
N/A
FPSM
Description
IE0
TF0
IE1
TF1
RI + TI
TCON.1
TCON.5
TCON.3
TCON.7
SCON.1
SCON.0
SCON2.1
SCON2.0
T2CON.7
T2CON.6
N/A
External Interrupt 0.
Timer 0.
External Interrupt 1.
Timer 1.
Transmit interrupt.
Receive interrupt.
Transmit 2 interrupt
Receive 2 interrupt
Timer 2 overflow flag.
Timer 2 external flag.
Temperature ADC interrupt. Does not have an interrupt flag associated with it.
PSM interrupt flag.
RI2 + TI2
TF2 + EXF2
ITEMP (Temperature ADC)
IPSM (Power Supply)
IPSMF.6
IADE (Energy Measurement DSP) MIRQSTL.7 ADEIRQFLAG Read MIRQSTH, MIRQSTM, MIRQSTL.
Table 85. Status Flags
Interrupt Source
ITEMP (Temperature ADC)
ISPI/I2CI
Flag
Bit Address
Description
N/A
N/A
Temperature ADC interrupt. Does not have a status flag associated with it.
SPI2CSTAT1 N/A
SPI interrupt status register.
I2C interrupt status register.
SPI2CSTAT N/A
IRTC (RTC Interval Timer)
TIMECON.6 ALFLAG
TIMECON.2 ITFLAG
RTC alarm flag.
RTC interrupt flag.
WDT (Watchdog Timer)
WDCON.2
WDS
Watchdog timeout flag.
1 There is no specific flag for ISPI/I2CI; however, all flags for SPI2CSTAT need to be read to assess the reason for the interrupt.
A functional block diagram of the interrupt system is shown in
Figure 84. Note that the PSM interrupt is the only interrupt in
the highest priority level.
remain pending until the I2C/SPI interrupt vectors are enabled.
Their respective interrupt service routines are entered shortly
thereafter.
If an external wake-up event occurs to wake the ADE5166/
ADE5169 from PSM2 mode, a pending external interrupt is
generated. When the EX0 bit (Bit 0) or the EX1 bit (Bit2) in the
interrupt enable SFR (IE, Address 0xA8) is set to enable external
interrupts, the program counter is loaded with the IE0 or IE1
interrupt vector. The IE0 and IE1 interrupt flags (Bit 1 and Bit 3,
respectively) in the Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 control
SFR (TCON, Address 0x88) are not affected by events that occur
when the 8052 MCU core is shut down during PSM2 mode (see
the Power Supply Management (PSM) Interrupt section).
The temperature ADC and I2C/SPI interrupts are latched such
that pending interrupts cannot be cleared without entering their
respective interrupt service routines. Clearing the I2C/SPI status
bits in the SPI interrupt status SFR (SPISTAT, Address 0xEA)
does not cancel a pending I2C/SPI interrupt. These interrupts
The RTC interrupts are driven by the alarm and interval flags.
Pending RTC interrupts can be cleared without entering the
interrupt service routine, by clearing the corresponding RTC
flag in software. Entering the interrupt service routine alone
does not clear the RTC interrupt.
Figure 84 shows how the interrupts are cleared when the inter-
rupt service routines are entered. Some interrupts with multiple
interrupt sources are not automatically cleared; specifically, the
PSM, ADE, UART, UART2 and Timer 2 interrupt vectors. Note
INT0
INT1
that the
and
interrupts are cleared only if the external
interrupt is configured to be triggered by a falling edge by setting
IT0 (Bit 0) in the Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 control
INT0 INT1
SFR (TCON, Address 0x88). If
or
is configured to
interrupt on a low level, the interrupt service routine is
reentered until the respective pin goes high.
Rev. 0 | Page 87 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
PRIORITY LEVEL
IE/IEIP2 REGISTERS
IP/IEIP2 REGISTERS
LOW
HIGH HIGHEST
IPSMF
FPSM
(IPSMF.6)
PSM
IPSME
INTERVAL
RTC
ALARM
MIRQSTH MIRQSTM MIRQSTL
MIRQENH MIRQENM MIRQENL
ADE
MIRQSTL.7
WATCHDOG TIMEOUT
WDIR
WATCHDOG
TEMP ADC
IN/OUT
LATCH
RESET
TEMPADC INTERRUPT
PSM2
IE0
IT0
0
INT0
EXTERNAL
INTERRUPT 0
1
IT0
TF0
INTERRUPT
POLLING
SEQUENCE
TIMER 0
PSM2
IE1
IT1
0
EXTERNAL
INTERRUPT 1
INT1
1
IT1
TF1
TIMER 1
CFG.5
SPI INTERRUPT
IN/OUT
LATCH
RESET
1
2
I C/SPI
2
I C INTERRUPT
0
RI
TI
UART
RI2
TI2
UART2
TF2
TIMER 2
EXF2
INDIVIDUAL
INTERRUPT
ENABLE
LEGEND
AUTOMATIC
CLEAR SIGNAL
GLOBAL
INTERRUPT
ENABLE (EA)
Figure 84. Interrupt System Functional Block Diagram
Rev. 0 | Page 88 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
generated during a low priority interrupt RETI, followed by
a multiply instruction. This results in a maximum interrupt
latency of 16.25 instruction cycles, 4 μs with a clock of 4.096 MHz.
INTERRUPT VECTORS
When an interrupt occurs, the program counter is pushed onto the
stack, and the corresponding interrupt vector address is loaded
into the program counter. When the interrupt service routine is
complete, the program counter is popped off the stack by a RETI
instruction. This allows program execution to resume from where
it was interrupted. The interrupt vector addresses are shown in
Table 86.
CONTEXT SAVING
When the 8052 vectors to an interrupt, only the program counter
is saved on the stack. Therefore, the interrupt service routine must
be written to ensure that registers used in the main program are
restored to their pre-interrupt state. Common SFRs that can be
modified in the ISR are the accumulator register and the PSW
register. Any general-purpose registers that are used as scratch
pads in the ISR should also be restored before exiting the
interrupt. The following example 8052 code shows how to
restore some commonly used registers:
Table 86. Interrupt Vector Addresses
Source
Vector Address
0x0003
0x000B
0x0013
0x001B
0x0023
0x002B
0x0033
0x003B
0x0043
0x004B
0x0053
0x005B
0x0063
IE0
TF0
IE1
TF1
GeneralISR:
; save the current Accumulator value
RI + TI
TF2 + EXF2
ITEMP (Temperature ADC)
ISPI/I2CI
IPSM (Power Supply)
IADE (Energy Measurement DSP)
IRTC (RTC Interval Timer)
WDT (Watchdog Timer)
RI2 + TI2
PUSH
ACC
; save the current status and register bank
selection
PUSH
PSW
; service interrupt
…
INTERRUPT LATENCY
; restore the status and register bank
selection
The 8052 architecture requires that at least one instruction
execute between interrupts. To ensure this, the 8052 MCU
core hardware prevents the program counter from jumping to
an ISR immediately after completing a RETI instruction or an
access of the IP and IE SFRs.
POP
PSW
; restore the accumulator
POP
ACC
RETI
The shortest interrupt latency is 3.25 instruction cycles, 800 ns
with a clock of 4.096 MHz. The longest interrupt latency for
a high priority interrupt results when a pending interrupt is
Rev. 0 | Page 89 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
WATCHDOG TIMER
The watchdog timer generates a device reset or interrupt within
a reasonable amount of time if the ADE5166/ADE5169 enter an
erroneous state, possibly due to a programming error or electrical
noise. The watchdog is enabled by default with a timeout of two
seconds and creates a system reset if not cleared within two
seconds. The watchdog function can be disabled by clearing the
watchdog enable bit (WDE, Bit 1) in the watchdog timer SFR
(WDCON, Address 0xC0).
The WDCON SFR can be written to only by user software if the
double write sequence described in Table 87 is initiated on every
write access to the WDCON SFR.
To prevent any code from inadvertently disabling the watchdog,
a watchdog protection can be activated. This watchdog protection
locks in the watchdog enable and event settings so they cannot
be changed by user code. The protection is activated by clearing
a watchdog protection bit in the flash memory. The watchdog
protection bit is the most significant bit at Address 0x3FFA of
the flash memory. When this bit is cleared, the WDIR bit (Bit 3) is
forced to 0, and the WDE bit is forced to 1. Note that the sequence
for configuring the flash protection bits must be followed to
modify the watchdog protection bit at Address 0x3FFA (see the
Protecting the Flash section).
The watchdog circuit generates a system reset or interrupt
(WDS, Bit 2) if the user program fails to set the WDE bit within
a predetermined amount of time (set by the PRE bits, Bits[7:4]).
The watchdog timer is clocked from the 32.768 kHz external
crystal connected between the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins.
Table 87. Watchdog Timer SFR (WDCON, Address 0xC0)
Bit
Address
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:4] 0xC7 to 0xC4
PRE
7
Watchdog prescaler. In normal mode, the 16-bit watchdog timer is clocked by the input
clock (32.768 kHz). The PRE bits set which of the upper bits of the counter are used as the
watchdog output, as follows:
29
tWATCHDOG = 2PRE
×
XTAL1
PRE[3:0]
Result (Watchdog Timeout)
0000
15.6 ms
0001
31.2 ms
0010
62.5 ms
0011
125 ms
0100
250 ms
0101
500 ms
0110
1 sec
0111
2 sec
1000
1001
1010 to 1111
0 sec, automatic reset
0 sec, serial download reset
Not a valid selection
3
2
0xC3
0xC2
WDIR
WDS
0
0
Watchdog interrupt response bit. When cleared, the watchdog generates a system reset
when the watchdog timeout period has expired. When set, the watchdog generates an
interrupt when the watchdog timeout period has expired.
Watchdog status bit. This bit is set to indicate that a watchdog timeout has occurred. It is
cleared by writing a 0 or by an external hardware reset. A watchdog reset does not clear
WDS; therefore, it can be used to distinguish between a watchdog reset and a hardware
reset from the RESET pin.
1
0
0xC1
0xC0
WDE
1
0
Watchdog enable bit. When set, this bit enables the watchdog and clears its counter. The
watchdog counter is subsequently cleared again whenever WDE is set. If the watchdog is
not cleared within its selected timeout period, it generates a system reset or watchdog
interrupt, depending on the WDIR bit.
WDWR
Watchdog write enable bit (see the Writing to the Watchdog Timer SFR (WDCON, Address
0xC0) section).
Rev. 0 | Page 90 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 88. Watchdog and Flash Protection Byte in Flash (Flash Address = 0x3FFA)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
WDPROT_PROTKY7
1
This bit holds the protection for the watchdog timer and the seventh bit of the flash protection key.
When this bit is cleared, the watchdog enable and event bits WDE and WDIR cannot be changed
by user code. The watchdog configuration is then fixed to WDIR = 0 and WDE = 1. The watchdog
timeout in PRE (Bits[7:4]) can still be modified by user code.
The value of this bit is also used to set the flash protection key. If this bit is cleared to protect the
watchdog, then the default value for the flash protection key is 0x7F instead of 0xFF (see the
Protecting the Flash section for more information on how to clear this bit).
[6:0] PROTKY[6:0]
0xFF
These bits hold the flash protection key. The content of this flash address is compared to the flash
protection key SFR (PROTKY, Address 0xBB) when the protection is being set or changed. If the
two values match, the new protection is written to the flash Address 0x3FFF to Address 0x3FFB.
See the Protecting the Flash section for more information on how to configure these bits.
Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Writing to the Watchdog Timer SFR (WDCON, Address 0xC0)
If the watchdog timer is not cleared within the watchdog timeout
period, a system reset occurs unless the watchdog timer interrupt is
enabled. The watchdog timer interrupt response bit (WDIR, Bit 3)
is located in the watchdog timer SFR (WDCON, Address 0xC0).
Enabling the WDIR bit allows the program to examine the stack
or other variables that may have led the program to execute
inappropriate code. The watchdog timer interrupt also allows
the watchdog to be used as a long interval timer.
Writing data to the WDCON SFR involves a double instruction
sequence. The WDWR (Bit 0) bit must be set, and the following
instruction must be a write instruction to the WDCON SFR.
; Disable Watchdog
CLR EA
SETB WDWR
CLR WDE
SETB EA
Note that WDIR is automatically configured as a high priority
interrupt. This interrupt cannot be disabled by the EA bit (Bit 7)
in the interrupt enable SFR (IE, Address 0xA8; see Table 80).
Even if all of the other interrupts are disabled, the watchdog is
kept active to watch over the program.
This sequence is necessary to protect the WDCON SFR from
code execution upsets that may unintentionally modify this
SFR. Interrupts should be disabled during this operation due
to the consecutive instruction cycles.
Rev. 0 | Page 91 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
LCD DRIVER
Using shared pins, the LCD module is capable of directly driving
an LCD panel of 17 × 4 segments without compromising any
ADE5166/ADE5169 functions. It is capable of driving LCDs with
2×, 3×, and 4× multiplexing. The LCD waveform voltages gener-
ated through internal charge pump circuitry support up to 5 V
LCDs. An external resistor ladder for LCD waveform voltage
generation is also supported.
LCD REGISTERS
There are six LCD control registers that configure the driver for
the specific type of LCD in the end system and set up the user
display preferences. The LCD configuration SFR (LCDCON,
Address 0x95), LCD Configuration X SFR (LCDCONX,
Address 0x9C), and LCD Configuration Y SFR (LCDCONY,
Address 0xB1) contain general LCD driver configuration infor-
mation including the LCD enable and reset, as well as the method
of LCD voltage generation and multiplex level. The LCD clock
SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96) configures timing settings for LCD
frame rate and blink rate. LCD pins are configured for LCD
functionality in the LCD segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE,
Address 0x97) and the LCD Segment Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2,
Address 0xED).
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 has an embedded LCD control circuit,
driver, and power supply circuit. The LCD module is functional
in all operating modes (see the Operating Modes section) and
can store up to four different screens in memory for scrolling
purposes.
Table 89. LCD Driver SFRs
SFR Address
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Mnemonic
LCDCON
LCDCLK
LCDSEGE
LCDCONX
LCDPTR
LCDDAT
LCDCONY
LCDSEGE2
Description
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x9C
0xAC
0xAE
0xB1
0xED
LCD configuration (see Table 90).
LCD clock (see Table 94).
LCD segment enable (see Table 97).
LCD Configuration X (see Table 91).
LCD pointer (see Table 98).
LCD data (see Table 99).
LCD Configuration Y (see Table 93).
LCD Segment Enable 2 (see Table 100).
Table 90. LCD Configuration SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default Description
7
LCDEN
0
0
0
LCD enable. If this bit is set, the LCD driver is enabled.
6
LCDRST
LCD data registers reset. If this bit is set, the LCD data registers are reset to 0.
5
BLINKEN
Blink mode enable bit. If this bit is set, blink mode is enabled. The blink mode is configured by
BLKMOD (Bits[7:6]) and BLKFREQ (Bits[5:4]) in the LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96).
4
LCDPSM2
0
Forces LCD off when in PSM2 (sleep) mode. Note that the internal voltage reference must be enabled by
setting the REF_BAT_EN bit in the peripheral configuration SFR (PERIPH, Address 0xF4) to allow LCD
operation in PSM2.
LCDPSM2
Result
0
1
The LCD is disabled or enabled in PSM2 by the LCDEN bit
The LCD is disabled in PSM2 regardless of LCDEN setting
3
CLKSEL
BIAS
0
0
0
LCD clock selection.
CLKSEL
Result
0
fLCDCLK = 2048 Hz
fLCDCLK = 128 Hz
1
2
Bias mode.
BIAS
Result
1/2
0
1
1/3
[1:0]
LMUX
LCD multiplex level.
LMUX
00
Result
Reserved
01
2× multiplexing; FP27/COM3 is used as FP27, and FP28/COM2 is used as FP28
3× multiplexing; FP27/COM3 is used as FP27, and FP28/COM2 is used as COM2
4× multiplexing; FP27/COM3 is used as COM3, and FP28/COM2 is used as COM2
10
11
Rev. 0 | Page 92 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 91. LCD Configuration X SFR (LCDCONX, Address 0x9C)
Bit
Mnemonic
Reserved
EXTRES
Default
Description
7
0
0
Reserved.
6
External resistor ladder selection bit.
EXTRES
Result
0
1
External resistor ladder is disabled. Charge pump is enabled
External resistor ladder is enabled. Charge pump is disabled
[5:0]
BIASLVL
0
Bias level selection bits (see Table 92).
Table 92. LCD Bias Voltage When Contrast Control Is Enabled
1/2 Bias
VC
1/3 Bias
VC
BIASLVL[5]
VA (V)
VB
VB
0
VB = VA
VC = 2 × VA
VB = 2 × VA
VC = 3 × VA
BIASLVL
[
4:0
]
VREF
×
31
BIASLVL
1
VB = VA
VC = 2 × VA
VB = 2 × VA
VC = 3 × VA
[
4:0
]
⎛
⎞
⎟
VREF × 1+
⎜
31
⎝
⎠
Table 93. LCD Configuration Y SFR (LCDCONY, Address 0xB1)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
AUTOSCREENSCROLL
0
When set, the four screens scroll automatically. The scrolling item is selected by
the BLKFREQ bits in the LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96). If both BLINKEN in
the LCD configuration SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95) and AUTOSCREENSCROLL are
set, this bit preempts the blinking mode.
6
INV_LVL
0
Frame inversion mode enable bit. If this bit is set, frames are inverted every other
frame. If this bit is cleared, frames are not inverted.
[5:4]
[3:2]
Reserved
00
0
These bits should be kept cleared to 0 for proper operation.
SCREEN_SEL
These bits select the screen that is being output on the LCD pins. Values of 0, 1, 2,
and 3 select Screen 0, Screen 1, Screen 2, and Screen 3, respectively.
1
0
UPDATEOVER
REFRESH
0
0
Update finished flag bit. This bit is updated by the LCD driver. When set, this bit
indicates that the LCD memory has been updated and a new frame has begun.
Refresh LCD data memory bit. This bit should be set by the user. When set, the
LCD driver does not use the data in the LCD data registers to update the display.
The LCD data registers can be updated by the 8052. When cleared, the LCD driver
uses the data in the LCD data registers to update display at the next frame.
Table 94. LCD Clock SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:6]
BLKMOD
0
Blink mode clock source configuration bits.
BLKMOD
Result
00
01
10
11
The blink rate is controlled by software; the display is off
The blink rate is controlled by software; the display is on
The blink rate is 2 Hz
The blink rate is set by BLKFREQ[1:0]
[5:4]
[3:0]
BLKFREQ
0
0
Blink rate configuration bits. These bits control the LCD blink rate if BLKMOD (Bits[7:6]) = 11.
BLKFREQ
Result (Blink Rate)
1 Hz
1/2 Hz
1/3 Hz
1/4 Hz
00
01
10
11
FD
LCD frame rate selection bits (see Table 95 and Table 96).
Rev. 0 | Page 93 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 95. LCD Frame Rate Selection for fLCDCLK = 2048 Hz (LCDCON[3] = 0)
2× Multiplexing
3× Multiplexing
4× Multiplexing
Frame Rate (Hz)
FD3
0
FD2
0
FD1
0
FD0
1
fLCD (Hz)
256
Frame Rate (Hz)
fLCD (Hz)
341.3
341.3
256
Frame Rate (Hz)
170.71
113.81
85.3
fLCD (Hz)
512
341.3
256
1281
85.3
64
1281
85.3
64
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
170.7
128
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
102.4
85.3
73.1
64
51.2
42.7
36.6
32
204.8
170.7
146.3
128
68.3
56.9
48.8
42.7
204.8
170.7
146.3
128
51.2
42.7
36.6
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
56.9
51.2
46.5
42.7
39.4
36.6
34.1
32
28.5
25.6
23.25
21.35
19.7
18.3
17.05
16
113.8
102.4
93.1
85.3
78.8
73.1
68.3
64
37.9
34.1
31
28.4
26.3
24.4
22.8
21.3
113.8
102.4
93.1
85.3
78.8
73.1
68.3
64
28.5
25.6
23.25
21.35
19.7
18.3
17.05
16
0
0
0
0
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1 Not within the range of typical LCD frame rates.
Table 96. LCD Frame Rate Selection for fLCDCLK = 128 Hz (LCDCON[3] = 1)
2× Multiplexing
3× Multiplexing
4× Multiplexing
FD3
0
0
FD2
0
0
FD1
0
1
FD0
1
0
fLCD (Hz)
32
21.3
16
Frame Rate (Hz)
fLCD (Hz)
32
32
Frame Rate (Hz)
10.7
10.7
fLCD (Hz)
32
32
Frame Rate (Hz)
161
10.6
8
8
8
8
0
0
1
1
32
10.7
32
0
1
0
0
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
0
1
0
1
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
0
1
1
0
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
0
1
1
1
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
0
0
0
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
0
0
1
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
0
1
0
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
0
1
1
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
1
0
0
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
1
0
1
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
1
1
0
16
8
32
10.7
32
8
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
128
64
64
32
128
64
42.7
21.3
128
64
32
16
1 Not within the range of typical LCD frame rates.
Table 97. LCD Segment Enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97)
Bit
Mnemonic
FP25EN
FP24EN
FP23EN
FP22EN
FP21EN
FP20EN
Reserved
Default
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
[1:0]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FP25 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP24 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP23 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP22 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP21 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP20 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
These bits must be kept at 0 for proper operation.
Rev. 0 | Page 94 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 98. LCD Pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
R/W
0
Read or write LCD bit. If this bit is set to 1, the data in the LCD data SFR (LCDDAT, Address 0xAE)
is written to the address indicated by the ADDRESS bits (LCDPTR[3:0]).
6
[5:4]
[3:0]
Reserved
RAM2SCREEN
ADDRESS
0
0
0
Reserved.
These bits select the screen recipient of the data memory action.
LCD memory address (see Table 101).
Table 99. LCD Data SFR (LCDDAT, Address 0xAE)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
LCDDATA
0
Data to be written into or read out of the LCD memory SFRs.
Table 100. LCD Segment Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED)
Bit
[7:4]
3
2
1
Mnemonic
Reserved
FP19EN
FP18EN
FP17EN
Default
Description
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved.
FP19 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP18 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP17 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
FP16 function select bit. 0 = general-purpose I/O, 1 = LCD function.
0
FP16EN
LCD SETUP
LCD TIMING AND WAVEFORMS
The LCD configuration SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95) configures
the LCD module to drive the type of LCD in the user end system.
The BIAS bit (Bit 2) and the LMUX bits (Bits[1:0]) in this SFR
should be set according to the LCD specifications.
An LCD segment acts like a capacitor that is charged and dis-
charged at a certain rate. This rate, the refresh rate, determines
the visual characteristics of the LCD. A slow refresh rate results
in the LCD blinking on and off between refreshes. A fast refresh
rate presents a screen that appears to be continuously lit. In
addition, a faster refresh rate consumes more power.
The COM2/FP28 and COM3/FP27 pins default to LCD segment
lines. Selecting the 3× multiplex level in the LCD configuration
SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95) by setting LMUX[1:0] to 10
changes the FP28 pin functionality to COM2. The 4× multiplex
level selection, LMUX[1:0] = 11, changes the FP28 pin function-
ality to COM2 and the FP27 pin functionality to COM3.
The frame rate, or refresh rate, for the LCD module is derived
from the LCD clock, fLCDCLK. The LCD clock is selected as 2048 Hz
or 128 Hz by the CLKSEL bit (Bit 3) in the LCD configuration
SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95). The minimum refresh rate
needed for the LCD to appear solid (without blinking) is
independent of the multiplex level.
The LCD segments of FP0 to FP15 are enabled by default.
Additional pins are selected for LCD functionality in the LCD
segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97) and LCD
Segment Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED) where
there are individual enable bits for the FP16 to FP25 segment
pins. The LCD pins do not have to be enabled sequentially. For
example, if the alternate function of FP23, the Timer 2 input, is
required, any of the other shared pins, FP16 to FP25, can be
enabled instead.
The LCD waveform frequency, fLCD, is the frequency at which
the LCD switches the active common line. Thus, the LCD
waveform frequency depends heavily on the multiplex level.
The frame rate and LCD waveform frequency are set by fLCDCLK
,
the multiplex level, and the FD[3:0] frame rate selection bits in
the LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96).
The LCD module provides 16 different frame rates for fLCDCLK
2048 Hz, ranging from 8 Hz to 128 Hz for an LCD with 4×
multiplexing. Fewer options are available with fLCDCLK = 128 Hz,
ranging from 8 Hz to 32 Hz for a 4× multiplexed LCD. The
128 Hz clock is beneficial for battery operation because it consumes
less power than the 2048 Hz clock. The frame rate is set by the
FD[3:0] bits in the LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96);
see Table 95 and Table 96.
=
The Display Element Control section contains details about setting
up the LCD data memory to turn individual LCD segments on
and off. Setting the LCDRST bit (Bit 6) in the LCD configuration
SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95) resets the LCD data memory to
its default (0). A power-on reset also clears the LCD data memory.
The LCD waveform is inverted at twice the LCD waveform fre-
quency, fLCD. This way, each frame has an average dc offset of 0.
ADC offset degrades the lifetime and performance of the LCD.
Rev. 0 | Page 95 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Each byte configures the on and off states of two segment lines.
The LSBs store the state of the even numbered segment lines,
and the MSBs store the state of the odd numbered segment lines.
For example, LCD Data Address 0 refers to segment Line 1 and
Line 0 (see Table 101). Note that the LCD data memory is
maintained in the PSM2 operating mode.
BLINK MODE
Blink mode is enabled by setting the BLINKEN bit (Bit 5) in the
LCD configuration SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95). This mode
is used to alternate between the LCD on state and LCD off state
so that the LCD screen appears to blink. There are two blinking
modes: a software controlled blink mode and an automatic
blink mode.
The LCD data memory is accessed indirectly through the LCD
pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC) and LCD data SFR
(LCDDAT, Address 0xAE). Moving a value to the LCDPTR SFR
selects the LCD screen and data byte to be accessed and initiates
a read or write operation (see Table 98).
Software Controlled Blink Mode
The LCD blink rate can be controlled by user code with the
BLKMOD bits (Bits[7:6]) in the LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK,
Address 0x96) by toggling the bits to turn the display on and off
at a rate determined by the MCU code.
Writing to LCD Data Registers
To update the LCD data memory, first set the LSB of the LCD
Configuration Y SFR (LCDCONY, Address 0xB1) to freeze the
data being displayed on the LCD while updating it. This operation
ensures that the data displayed on the screen does not change
while the data is being changed. Then, move the data to the
LCD data SFR (LCDDAT, Address 0xAE) prior to accessing the
LCD pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC). The address of the
LCD screen should be consistent with the data changed. When the
MSB of the LCD pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC) is set, the
content of the LCD data SFR (LCDDAT, Address 0xAE) is trans-
ferred to the internal LCD data memory designated by the address
in the LCD pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC) and the
screen designator. Clear the LSB of the LCD Configuration Y SFR
(LCDCONY, Address 0xB1) when all of the data memory has been
updated to allow the use of the new LCD setup for display.
Automatic Blink Mode
There are five blink rates. These blink rates are selected by the
BLKMOD bits (Bits[7:6]) and the BLKFREQ bits (Bits[5:4]) bits
in the LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96); see Table 94.
SCROLLING MODE
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide the possibility to have four
screens in memory. The LCD driver can use any of these screens
by setting the SCREEN_SEL bits in the LCD Configuration Y SFR
(LCDCONY, Address 0xB1) and clearing the refresh bit (Bit 0)
in the same register. The software scrolling of the screens can
then be achieved by a one-command instruction.
Automatic Scrolling Mode
The ADE5166/ADE5169 also provide an automatic scrolling
between the screens using the five available blink rates. This
mode is enabled by setting bit AUTOSCREENSCROLL (Bit 7)
in the LCD Configuration Y SFR (LCDCONY, Address 0xB1)
and also the BLINKEN bit (Bit 5) in the LCD configuration SFR
(LCDCON, Address 0x95). To allow the scrolling frequency to
be selected, the BLKMOD bits (Bits[7:6]) in the LCD clock SFR
(LCDCLK, Address 0x96) should both be set to 1. The scrolling
rates are then selected by the BLKFREQ bits (Bits[5:4]) in the
LCD clock SFR (LCDCLK, Address 0x96); see Table 94. Auto-
matic scrolling mode is available in all operating modes.
Sample 8052 code to update the segments attached to Pin FP10
and Pin FP11 on Screen 1 is as follows:
ORL
MOV
MOV
ANL
LCDCONY,#01h ;start updating the data
LCDDAT,#FFh
LCDPTR,#80h OR 05h
LCDCONY,#0FEh;update finished
Reading LCD Data Registers
When the MSB of the LCD pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC)
is cleared, the content of the LCD data memory of the correspond-
ing screen designated by LCDPTR is transferred to the LCD data
SFR (LCDDAT, Address 0xAE).
DISPLAY ELEMENT CONTROL
Four banks of 15 bytes of data memory located in the LCD module
control the on or off state of each segment of the LCD. The LCD
data memory is stored in Address 0 through Address 14 in the
LCD module, with two extra bits defining which one of the four
screens is being addressed.
Sample 8052 code to read the contents of LCD Data Memory
Address 0x07 on Screen 1, which holds the on and off state of
the segments attached to FP14 and FP15, is as follows.
MOV
MOV
LCDPTR,#07h
R1, LCDDAT
Rev. 0 | Page 96 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 101. LCD Data Memory Accessed Indirectly Through LCD Pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC) and LCD Data SFR (LCDDAT,
Address 0xAE)1, 2
LCD Pointer SFR (LCDPTR, Address 0xAC)
LCD Pointer SFR (LCDDAT, Address 0xAE)
LCD Memory Address
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
COM3
FP28
N/A
COM2
FP28
N/A
COM1
FP28
N/A
COM0
FP28
N/A
0x0E
0x0D
0x0C
0x0B
0x0A
0x09
0x08
0x07
0x06
0x05
0x04
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
FP27
FP25
FP23
FP21
FP19
FP17
FP15
FP13
FP11
FP9
FP27
FP25
FP23
FP21
FP19
FP17
FP15
FP13
FP11
FP9
FP27
FP25
FP23
FP21
FP19
FP17
FP15
FP13
FP11
FP9
FP27
FP25
FP23
FP21
FP19
FP17
FP15
FP13
FP11
FP9
FP24
FP22
FP20
FP18
FP16
FP14
FP12
FP10
FP8
FP6
FP4
FP2
FP0
FP24
FP22
FP20
FP18
FP16
FP14
FP12
FP10
FP8
FP6
FP4
FP2
FP0
FP24
FP22
FP20
FP18
FP16
FP14
FP12
FP10
FP8
FP6
FP4
FP2
FP0
FP24
FP22
FP20
FP18
FP16
FP14
FP12
FP10
FP8
FP6
FP4
FP2
FP0
FP7
FP5
FP3
FP1
FP7
FP5
FP3
FP1
FP7
FP5
FP3
FP1
FP7
FP5
FP3
FP1
1 COMx designates the common lines.
2 FPx designates the segment lines.
internal charge pump voltage generation is a configurable bias
voltage that can be compensated over temperature and supply
to maintain contrast on the LCD. These compensations can be
performed based on the ADE5166/ADE5169 temperature and
supply voltage measurements (see the Temperature, Battery, and
Supply Voltage Measurements section). This dynamic contrast
control is not easily implemented with external resistor ladder
voltage generation.
VOLTAGE GENERATION
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide two ways to generate the LCD
waveform voltage levels. The on-chip charge pump option can
generate 5 V. This makes it possible to use 5 V LCDs with the 3.3 V
ADE5166/ADE5169. There is also an option to use an external
resistor ladder with a 3.3 V LCD. The EXTRES bit (Bit 6) in the
LCD Configuration X SFR (LCDCONX, Address 0x9C) selects
the resistor ladder or charge pump option.
The LCD bias voltage sets the contrast of the display when the
charge pump provides the LCD waveform voltages. The ADE5166/
ADE5169 provide 64 bias levels selected by the BIASLVL[5:0]
bits in the LCD Configuration X SFR (LCDCONX, Address 0x9C).
The voltage level on LCDVA, LCDVB, and LCDVC depend on the
internal voltage reference value (VREF), BIASLVL (Bits[5:0]) selec-
tion, and the biasing selected, as described in Table 92.
When selecting how to generate the LCD waveform voltages,
the following should be considered:
•
•
Lifetime performance power consumption
Contrast control
Lifetime Performance Power Consumption
In most LCDs, a high amount of current is required when the LCD
waveforms change state. The external resistor ladder option draws a
constant amount of current, whereas the charge pump circuitry
allows dynamic current consumption. If the LCD module is used
with the internal charge pump option when the display is disabled,
the voltage generation is disabled so that no power is consumed by
the LCD function. This feature results in significant power
savings if the display is turned off during battery operation.
Lifetime Performance
DC offset on a segment degrades its performance over time.
The voltages generated through the internal charge pump
switch faster than those generated by the external resistor
ladder, reducing the likelihood of a dc voltage being applied
to a segment and increasing the lifetime of the LCD.
LCD EXTERNAL CIRCUITRY
Contrast Control
The voltage generation selection is made by the EXTRES bit
(Bit 6) in the LCD configuration X SFR (LCDCONX,
Address 0x9C). This bit is cleared by default for charge pump
voltage generation, but it can be set to enable an external
resistor ladder.
The electrical characteristics of the liquid in the LCD change
over temperature. This requires adjustments in the LCD waveform
voltages to ensure a readable display. An added benefit of the
Rev. 0 | Page 97 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Charge Pump
•
•
•
Type of LCD: 5 V, 4× multiplexed with 1/3 bias, 96 segment
Voltage generation: internal charge pump
Refresh rate: 64 Hz
Voltage generation through the charge pump requires external
capacitors to store charge. The external connections to LCDVA,
LCDVB, and LCDVC, as well as to LCDVP1 and LCDVP2, are
shown in Figure 85.
A 96-segment LCD with 4× multiplexing requires 96/4 = 24
segment lines. Sixteen pins, FP0 to FP15, are automatically
dedicated for use as LCD segments. Eight more pins must be
chosen for the LCD function. Because the LCD has 4× multi-
plexing, all four common lines are used. As a result, COM2/FP28
and COM3/FP27 cannot be used as segment lines. Based on the
alternate functions of the pins used for FP16 through FP25, FP16 to
FP23 are chosen for the eight remaining segment lines. These
pins are enabled for LCD functionality in the LCD segment
enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97) and LCD Segment
Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED).
LCDVC
470nF
LCDVB
CHARGE PUMP
470nF
AND
LCDVA
LCD WAVEFORM
470nF
CIRCUITRY
LCDVP1
100nF
LCDVP2
Figure 85. External Circuitry for Charge Pump Option
External Resistor Ladder
To enable the external resistor ladder option, set the EXTRES
bit (Bit 6) in the LCD Configuration X SFR (LCDCONX, Address
0x9C). When EXTRES = 1, the LCD waveform voltages are
supplied by the external resistor ladder. Because the LCD
voltages are not generated on-chip, the LCD bias compensation
implemented to maintain contrast over temperature and supply
is not possible.
To determine contrast setting for this 5 V LCD, Table 92 shows
the BIASLVL[5:0] setting in the LCD Configuration X SFR
(LCDCONX, Address 0x9C) that corresponds to a VC of 5 V in
1/3 bias mode. The maximum bias level setting for this LCD is
BIASLVL[5:0] = 101110.
The LCD is set up with the following 8052 code:
The external circuitry needed for the resistor ladder option is
shown in Figure 86. The resistors required should be in the range
of 10 kΩ to 100 kΩ and should be based on the current required
by the LCD being used.
; set up LCD pins to have LCD functionality
MOV
MOV
LCDSEG,#FP20EN+FP21EN+FP22EN+FP23EN
LCDSEGX,#FP16EN+FP17EN+FP18EN+FP19EN
LCDVC
; set up LCDCON for fLCDCLK=2048Hz, 1/3 bias
and 4x multiplexing
LCDVB
LCD WAVEFORM
CIRCUITRY
LCDVA
LCDVP1
LCDVP2
MOV
LCDCON,#BIAS+LMUX1+LMUX0
; set up LCDCONX for charge pump and
BIASLVL[110111]
Figure 86. External Circuitry for External Resistor Ladder Option
MOV
LCDCONX,#BIASLVL5+BIASLVL4+BIASLVL3+BI
ASLVL2+BIASLVL1+BIASLVL0
LCD FUNCTION IN PSM2
LCDPSM2 (Bit 4) and LCDEN (Bit 7) in the LCD configuration
SFR (LCDCON, Address 0x95) control the LCD functionality
in the PSM2 operating mode (see Table 102).
; set up refresh rate for 64Hz with fLCDCLK
2048 Hz
=
MOV
LCDCLK,#FD3+FD2+FD1+FD0
; set up LCD data registers with data to be
displayed using
Note that the internal voltage reference must be enabled by set-
ting REF_BAT_EN (Bit 3) in the peripheral configuration SFR
(PERIPH, Address 0xF4) to allow LCD operation in PSM2 mode
(see Table 19).
; LCDPTR and LCDDATA registers
; turn all segments on FP27 ON
ORL
refresh
LCDCONY,#01h ; start data memory
Table 102. Bits Controlling LCD Functionality in PSM2 Mode
LCDPSM2
LCDEN
Result
MOV
MOV
LCDDAT,#F0H
0
0
1
0
1
X
The display is off in PSM2.
The display is on in PSM2.
The display is off in PSM2.
LCDPTR, #80h OR 0DH
ANL
refresh
LCDCONY,#0FEh; end of data memory
In addition, note that the LCD configuration and data memory
is retained when the display is turned off.
ORL
LCDCON,#LCDEN ; enable LCD
To set up the same 3.3 V LCD for use with an external resistor
ladder,
Example LCD Setup
An example of how to set up the LCD peripheral for a specific
LCD is described in this section with the following parameters:
; setup LCDCONX for external resistor ladder
MOV
LCDCONX,#EXTRES
Rev. 0 | Page 98 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
FLASH MEMORY
FLASH MEMORY OVERVIEW
Retention is the ability of the flash memory to retain its
programmed data over time. Again, the parts have been
qualified in accordance with the formal retention lifetime
specification, JEDEC Standard 22 Method A117, at a specific
junction temperature (TJ = 55°C). As part of this qualification
procedure, the flash memory is cycled to its specified endurance
limit, as described previously, before data retention is charac-
terized. This means that the flash memory is guaranteed to retain
its data for its full specified retention lifetime every time the
flash memory is reprogrammed. It should also be noted that
retention lifetime, based on an activation energy of 0.6 eV,
derates with TJ, as shown in Figure 87.
Flash memory is a type of nonvolatile memory that is in-circuit
programmable. The default, erased state of a byte of flash memory
is 0xFF. When a byte of flash memory is programmed, the required
bits change from 1 to 0. The flash memory must be erased to turn
the 0s back to 1s. A byte of flash memory cannot, however, be
erased individually. The entire segment, or page, of flash
memory that contains the byte must be erased.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide 62 bytes of flash program/
information memory. This memory is segmented into 124 pages
that each contain 512 bytes. To reprogram one byte of flash
memory, the 511 other bytes in that page must be erased. The
flash memory can be erased by page or all at once in a mass erase.
There is a command to verify that a flash write operation has
completed successfully. The ADE5166/ADE5169 flash memory
controller also offers configurable flash memory protection.
300
250
ANALOG DEVICES
200
SPECIFICATION
100 YEARS MIN.
The 62 bytes of flash memory are provided on-chip to facilitate
code execution without any external discrete ROM device require-
ments. The program memory can be programmed in-circuit,
using the serial download mode provided or using conventional
third party memory programmers.
AT T = 55°C
J
150
100
50
Flash/EE Memory Reliability
0
The flash memory arrays on the ADE5166/ADE5169 are fully
qualified for two key Flash/EE memory characteristics:
Flash/EE memory cycling endurance and Flash/EE memory
data retention.
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
T
JUNCTION TEMPERATURE (°C)
J
Figure 87. Flash/EE Memory Data Retention
FLASH MEMORY ORGANIZATION
Endurance quantifies the ability of the Flash/EE memory to be
cycled through many program, read, and erase cycles. In real
terms, a single endurance cycle is composed of four independent,
sequential events, as follows:
The ADE5166/ADE5169 contain a 64 kB array of Flash/EE
program memory. The upper 2 kB contain permanently embedded
firmware, allowing in-circuit serial download, serial debug, and
nonintrusive single-pin emulation. The 2 kB of embedded firm-
ware also contains essential coefficients that provide calibration
to peripherals such as the ADCs and reference. The embedded
firmware contained in the upper 2 kB of Flash/EE memory is
not accessible by the user.
1. Initial page erase sequence
2. Read/verify sequence
3. Byte program sequence
4. Second read/verify sequence
EMBEDDED DOWNLOAD/DEBUG KERNEL
In reliability qualification, every byte in both the program and
data Flash/EE memory is cycled from 0x00 to 0xFF until a first
fail is recorded, signifying the endurance limit of the on-chip
Flash/EE memory.
PERMANENTLY EMBEDDED FIRMWARE ALLOWS
0×FFFF
2kB
0×F800
CODE TO BE DOWNLOADED TO ANY OF THE
62 kB OF ON-CHIP PROGRAM MEMORY.
THE KERNEL PROGRAM APPEARS AS NOP
INSTRUCTIONS TO USER CODE.
As indicated in Table 4, the ADE5166/ADE5169 flash memory
endurance qualification has been carried out in accordance with
JEDEC Standard 22 Method A117 over the industrial temperature
range of −40°C, +25°C, and +85°C. The results allow the specifica-
tion of a minimum endurance figure over supply and temperature
of 100,000 cycles, with a minimum endurance figure of 20,000
cycles of operation at 25°C.
USER PROGRAM MEMORY
62 kB OF FLASH/EE PROGRAM MEMORY
ARE AVAILABLE TO THE USER. ALL OF THIS
SPACE CAN BE PROGRAMMED FROM THE
PERMANENTLY EMBEDDED DOWNLOAD/DEBUG
KERNEL OR IN PARALLEL PROGRAMMING MODE.
0×F7FF
62kB
0×0000
Figure 88. Flash Memory Organization
Rev. 0 | Page 99 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
The lower 62 bytes are available to the user for program storage
or as nonvolatile data memory. They are segmented into 124 pages
of 512 bytes each. It is up to the user to decide which flash memory
is to be used for data memory. It is recommended that each page
be dedicated solely to program or data memory so that an
instance does not arise where the program counter is loaded
with data memory instead of an opcode from the program
memory or where program memory is erased to update a byte
of data memory.
USING THE FLASH MEMORY
The 62 bytes of flash memory are configured as 124 pages, each
comprising 512 bytes. As with the other ADE5166/ADE5169
peripherals, the interface to this memory space is via a group of
registers mapped in the SFR space. The flash data SFR, (EDATA,
Address 0xBC) holds the byte of data to be accessed. The byte of
flash memory is addressed via the EADRH SFR (Address 0xC7)
and the EADRL SFR (Address 0xC6).
Table 103. Flash SFRs
The flash memory can be protected from read or write/erase access.
The protection is implemented in the upper page of user program
memory. The last sixteen bytes from this page are used to con-
figure the write/erase protection for each of the pages. The
remaining four bytes are used for configuring read protection of
the flash memory. The read protection is selected in groups of
four pages. Finally, there is a byte used to store the key required
for modifying the protection scheme. If any code protection is
required, the page of information memory must be write/erase
protected at a minimum.
Bit
SFR
Address Default Addressable Description
ECON
FLSHKY 0xBA
PROTKY 0xBB
0xB9
0x00
0xFF
0xFF
No
No
No
Flash control
Flash key
Flash
protection key
Flash data
Flash low byte
address
Flash high byte
address
EDATA
EADRL
0xBC
0xC6
0x00
0x00
No
No
EADRH
0xC7
0x00
No
Thus, it is recommended that if code protection is enabled, the
last page of user accessible flash memory should be used only to
store data that does not need modification in the field. If the
firmware requires protection and may need updating in the
future, the last page should be reserved for constants used by
the user code that do not require modification during
emulation or debug.
ECON is an 8-bit flash control SFR (Address 0xB9) that can be
written to with one of five flash memory access commands to
trigger various read, write, erase, and verify functions. Figure 89
demonstrates the steps required for access to the flash memory.
ECON
COMMAND
ADDRESS ADDRESS PROTECTION
DECODER DECODER
ACCESS
TRUE: ACCESS
ALLOWED
Page 0 through Page 122 are, therefore, available for general
program and data memory use. It is recommended that Page 123
be used for constants or code that do not require future modifica-
tions. Note that the last 20 bytes of page 123 are reserved for the
flash memory protection and are, therefore, unavailable to the user.
ALLOWED?
EADRH EADRL
ECON = 0
FLASH
FALSE: ACCESS
DENIED
PROTECTION KEY
FLSHKY
ECON = 1
FLSHKY = 0x3B?
Figure 89. Flash Memory Read/Write/Erase Protection Block Diagram
Rev. 0 | Page 100 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
0xDFFF
0xBFFF
0x9FFF
PAGE 111
PAGE 110
PAGE 109
PAGE 108
PAGE 107
PAGE 106
PAGE 105
PAGE 104
PAGE 103
PAGE 102
PAGE 101
PAGE 100
PAGE 99
PAGE 98
PAGE 97
PAGE 96
PAGE 79
PAGE 95
PAGE 94
PAGE 93
PAGE 92
PAGE 91
PAGE 90
PAGE 89
PAGE 88
PAGE 87
PAGE 86
PAGE 85
PAGE 84
PAGE 83
PAGE 82
PAGE 81
PAGE 80
0xDE00
0xDDFF
0xBE00
0xBDFF
0x9E00
0x9DFF
PAGE 78
PAGE 77
PAGE 76
PAGE 75
PAGE 74
PAGE 73
PAGE 72
PAGE 71
PAGE 70
PAGE 69
PAGE 68
PAGE 67
PAGE 66
PAGE 65
PAGE 64
READ
READ
READ
PROTECT
BIT 19
0xDC00
0xDBFF
0xBC00
0xBBFF
0x9C00
0x9BFF
PROTECT
BIT 27
PROTECT
BIT 23
0xDA00
0xD9FF
0xBA00
0xB9FF
0x9A00
0x99FF
0xD800
0xD7FF
0xB800
0xB7FF
0x9800
0x97FF
0xF7FF
PAGE 123
PAGE 122
PAGE 121
PAGE 120
PAGE 119
PAGE 118
PAGE 117
PAGE 116
PAGE 115
PAGE 114
PAGE 113
PAGE 112
0xF600
0xF5FF
0xD600
0xD5FF
0xB600
0xB5FF
0x9600
0x95FF
READ
READ
PROTECT
BIT 26
READ
PROTECT
BIT 22
READ
0xF400
0xF3FF
0xD400
0xD3FF
0xB400
0xB3FF
0x9400
0x93FF
PROTECT
BIT 30
PROTECT
BIT 18
0xF200
0xF1FF
0xD200
0xD1FF
0xB200
0xB1FF
0x9200
0x91FF
0xF000
0xEFFF
0xD000
0xCFFF
0xB000
0xAFFF
0x9000
0x8FFF
0xEE00
0xEDFF
0xCE00
0xCDFF
0xAE00
0xADFF
0x8E00
0x8DFF
READ
PROTECT
BIT 29
READ
PROTECT
BIT 25
READ
PROTECT
BIT 21
READ
PROTECT
BIT 17
0xEC00
0xEBFF
0xCC00
0xCBFF
0xAC00
0xABFF
0x8C00
0x8BFF
0xEA00
0xE9FF
0xCA00
0xC9FF
0xAA00
0xA9FF
0x8A00
0x89FF
0xE800
0xE7FF
0xC800
0xC7FF
0xA800
0xA7FF
0x8800
0x87FF
0xE600
0xE5FF
0xC600
0xC5FF
0xA600
0xA5FF
0x8600
0x85FF
READ
PROTECT
BIT 28
READ
PROTECT
BIT 24
READ
PROTECT
BIT 20
READ
PROTECT
BIT 16
0xE400
0xE3FF
0xC400
0xC3FF
0xA400
0xA3FF
0x8400
0x83FF
0xE200
0xE1FF
0xC200
0xC1FF
0xA200
0xA1FF
0x8200
0x81FF
0xE000
0xC000
0xA000
0x8000
0x7FFF
0x5FFF
0x3FFF
0x1FFF
PAGE 47
PAGE 46
PAGE 45
PAGE 44
PAGE 43
PAGE 42
PAGE 41
PAGE 40
PAGE 39
PAGE 38
PAGE 37
PAGE 36
PAGE 35
PAGE 34
PAGE 33
PAGE 32
PAGE 15
PAGE 14
PAGE 13
PAGE 12
PAGE 11
PAGE 10
PAGE 9
PAGE 8
PAGE 7
PAGE 6
PAGE 5
PAGE 4
PAGE 3
PAGE 2
PAGE 1
PAGE 0
PAGE 63
PAGE 62
PAGE 61
PAGE 60
PAGE 59
PAGE 58
PAGE 57
PAGE 56
PAGE 55
PAGE 54
PAGE 53
PAGE 52
PAGE 51
PAGE 50
PAGE 49
PAGE 48
PAGE 31
PAGE 30
PAGE 29
PAGE 28
PAGE 27
PAGE 26
PAGE 25
PAGE 24
PAGE 23
PAGE 22
PAGE 21
PAGE 20
PAGE 19
PAGE 18
PAGE 17
PAGE 16
0x7E00
0x7DFF
0x5E00
0x5DFF
0x3E00
0x3DFF
0x1E00
0x1DFF
READ
READ
READ
READ
PROTECT
BIT 3
0x7C00
0x7BFF
0x5C00
0x5BFF
0x3C00
0x3BFF
0x1C00
0x1BFF
PROTECT
BIT 15
PROTECT
BIT 11
PROTECT
BIT 7
0x7A00
0x79FF
0x5A00
0x59FF
0x3A00
0x39FF
0x1A00
0x19FF
0x7800
0x77FF
0x5800
0x57FF
0x3800
0x37FF
0x1800
0x17FF
0x7600
0x75FF
0x5600
0x55FF
0x3600
0x35FF
0x1600
0x15FF
READ
PROTECT
BIT 14
READ
PROTECT
BIT 10
READ
PROTECT
BIT 6
READ
PROTECT
BIT 2
0x7400
0x73FF
0x5400
0x53FF
0x3400
0x33FF
0x1400
0x13FF
0x7200
0x71FF
0x5200
0x51FF
0x3200
0x31FF
0x1200
0x11FF
0x7000
0x6FFF
0x5000
0x4FFF
0x3000
0x2FFF
0x1000
0x0FFF
0x6E00
0x6DFF
0x4E00
0x4DFF
0x2E00
0x2DFF
0x0E00
0x0DFF
READ
PROTECT
BIT 13
READ
PROTECT
BIT 9
READ
PROTECT
BIT 5
READ
PROTECT
BIT 1
0x6C00
0x6BFF
0x4C00
0x4BFF
0x2C00
0x2BFF
0x0C00
0x0BFF
0x6A00
0x69FF
0x4A00
0x49FF
0x2A00
0x29FF
0x0A00
0x09FF
0x6800
0x67FF
0x4800
0x47FF
0x2800
0x27FF
0x0800
0x07FF
0x6600
0x65FF
0x4600
0x45FF
0x2600
0x25FF
0x0600
0x05FF
READ
PROTECT
BIT 12
READ
PROTECT
BIT 8
READ
PROTECT
BIT 4
READ
PROTECT
BIT 0
0x6400
0x63FF
0x4400
0x43FF
0x2400
0x23FF
0x0400
0x03FF
0x6200
0x61FF
0x4200
0x41FF
0x2200
0x21FF
0x0200
0x01FF
0x6000
0x4000
0x2000
0x0000
CONTAINS PROTECTION SETTINGS
Figure 90. Flash Memory Organization
Rev. 0 | Page 101 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
ECON—Flash Control SFR
The program counter, PC, is held on the instruction where the
ECON SFR is written to until the flash memory controller is
done performing the requested operation. Then the PC incre-
ments to continue with the next instruction. Any interrupt
requests that occur while the flash controller is performing an
operation are not handled until the flash operation is complete.
All peripherals, such as timers and counters, continue to operate
as configured throughout the flash memory access.
Programming flash memory is done through the flash control
SFR (ECON, Address 0xB9). This SFR allows the user to read,
write, erase, or verify the 62 kB of flash memory. As a method
of security, a key must be written to the flash key SFR (FLSHKY,
Address 0xBA) to initiate any user access to the flash memory.
Upon completion of the flash memory operation, the FLSHKY
SFR is reset such that it must be written to before another flash
memory operation. Requiring the key to be set before an access
to the flash memory decreases the likelihood of user code or
data being overwritten by a runaway program.
Table 104. Flash Control SFR (ECON, Address 0xB9)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Value
Description
[7:0]
ECON
0
1
Write byte. The value in EDATA is written to the flash memory, at the page address given by
EADRH (Address 0xC7) and EADRL (Address 0xC6). Note that the byte being addressed must
be pre-erased.
2
3
Erase page. A 512-byte page of flash memory address is erased. The page is selected by the
address in EADRH and EADRL. Any address in the page can be written to EADRH and EADRL to
select it for erasure.
Erase all. All 62 kB of the available flash memory are erased. Note that this command is used
during serial mode and parallel download mode but should not be executed by user code.
4
5
6
7
8
Read byte. The byte in the flash memory, addressed by EADRH and EADRL, is read into EDATA.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Protect code (see the Protecting the Flash Memory section).
Table 105. Flash Key SFR (FLSHKY, Address 0xBA)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:0]
FLSHKY 0xFF
The content of this SFR is compared to the flash key, 0x3B. If the two values match, the next ECON
operation is allowed (see the Protecting the Flash Memory section).
Table 106. Flash Protection Key SFR (PROTKY, Address 0xBB)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:0]
PROTKY 0xFF
The content of this SFR is compared to the flash memory location at Address 0xF7EA. If the two values
match, the update of the write/erase and read protection set up is allowed (see the Protecting the Flash
Memory section).
If the protection key in the flash is 0xFF, the PROTKY SFR value is not used for comparison.
The PROTKY SFR is also used to write the protection key in the flash. This is done by writing the desired
value in PROTKY and writing 0x08 in the ECON SFR. This operation can be done only once.
Table 107. Flash Data SFR (EDATA, Address 0xBC)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:0]
EDATA
0
Flash pointer data.
Table 108. Flash Low Byte Address SFR (EADRL, Address 0xC6)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:0]
EADRL
0
Flash pointer low byte address.
Table 109. Flash High Byte Address SFR (EADRH, Address 0xC7)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:0]
EADRH
0
Flash pointer high byte address.
Rev. 0 | Page 102 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Write/erase protection is individually selectable for all 124 pages.
Read protection is selected in groups of four pages (see Figure 90
for the groupings). The protection bits are stored in the last flash
memory locations, Address 0xF7EB through Address 0xF7FF
(see Figure 91). Sixteen bytes are reserved for write/erase pro-
tection, four bytes for read protection, and another byte to set
the flash protection key (PROTKY, Address 0xBB). The user
must enable write/erase protection for the last page, at a minimum,
for the entire protection scheme to work.
Flash Functions
The following sample 8051 code is provided to demonstrate how to
use the the flash functions. For these examples, Flash Memory
Byte 0x3C00 is accessed.
Write Byte
Write 0xF3 into Flash Memory Byte 0x3C00.
MOV EDATA, #F3h
MOV EADRH, #3Ch
MOV EADRL, #00h
; Data to be written
; Set up byte address
Note that the read protection does not prevent MOVC commands
from being executed within the code.
MOV FLSHKY, #3Bh
key.
; Write Flash security
; Write Byte
There is an additional layer of protection offered by a protection
security key (PROTKY). The user can set up a protection security
key so that the protection scheme cannot be changed without
this key. When the protection key has been configured, it cannot
be modified.
MOV ECON, #01H
Erase Page
Erase the page containing Flash Memory Byte 0x3C00.
MOV EADRH, #3Ch
byte address
; Select page through
Enabling Flash Protection by Code
The protection bytes in the flash can be programmed by using
the flash controller command and programming ECON to 0x08.
Issuing the ECON protection command initiates the program-
ming of one byte of protection data. The EADRL (Address 0xC6)
and EDATA (Address 0xBC) data pointers are used to store the
least significant address and data bytes, respectively. Note that
the EADRH data pointer is not used in this command.
MOV EADRL, #00h
MOV FLSHKY, #3Bh
key.
; Write Flash security
; Erase Page
MOV ECON, #02H
Erase All
Erase all of the 62 kB flash memory.
The following sequence should be followed to enable the flash
protection:
MOV FLSHKY, #3Bh
key.
; Write Flash security
MOV ECON, #03H
; Erase All
1. Set the EDATA data pointer with the write/erase or read
protection data. When erased, the protection bits default to 1,
like any other bit of flash memory. The default protection
setting is for no protection. To enable protection, write a 0
to the bits corresponding to the pages that should be pro-
tected. Note that when setting the read protection, each
protection bit protects four pages.
2. Set the EADRL data pointer with the least significant byte of
the protection address. For example, to access the protection
on Page 112 through Page 119 (Address 0xF7FE), EADRL
should be written to 0xFE.
Read Byte
Read Flash Memory Byte 0x3C00.
MOV EADRH, #3Ch
MOV EADRL, #00h
; Setup byte address
MOV FLSHKY, #3Bh
key.
; Write Flash security
; Read Byte
MOV ECON, #04H
; Data is ready in EDATA register
Note that the read byte command can be used to view the status
of the protection bytes located in the upper 21 bytes, Page 123.
The write byte command is not valid for this area.
3. Enable access to the flash by writing 3Bh to the FLSHKY
SFR (Address 0xBA).
4. Issue the protection command by writing 08H to the
ECON SFR (Address 0xB9).
PROTECTING THE FLASH MEMORY
Two forms of protection are offered for this flash memory: read
protection and write/erase protection. The read protection ensures
that any pages that are read protected cannot be read by the end
user. The write protection ensures that the flash memory cannot
be erased or written over. This protects the final product from
tampering and can prevent the code from being overwritten in
the event of a runaway program.
Step 1 to Step 3 should be repeated for each byte that requires
protection. While configuring the final byte of write/read pro-
tection, the PROTKY SFR can be enabled for a further level of
code security. If enabled, the flash protection key is required to
modify the protection scheme. To enable the flash protection
key, the Flash Location 0xF7EB where the PROTKY is located
should be written to using the flash control SFR (ECON,
Address 0xB9). The PROTKY can be written to any 8-bit value;
but once configured, it cannot be modified. To enable the PROTKY
and activate the flash protection, the part must be reset.
Rev. 0 | Page 103 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
MOV ECON, #08H
command
;issue protection
Note that after the PROTKY has been activated by a reset, any
further changes to the protection require the new 8-bit protection
key to be written to the PROTKY SFR prior to issuing the ECON
command. The PROTKY SFR is cleared automatically when the
ECON 0x8 command is issued and, therefore, the user must
ensure that the correct value is written to the PROTKY SFR
each time the protection scheme is changed.
;enable write/erase protection on last page
(this is required for any protection to be
activated)
MOV EDATA, #0F7H
MOV EADRL, #0FFH
MOV FLSHKY, #3BH
; clear bit WP123
; write address to F7FFh
; enable flash access
;issue protection
The most significant bit of 0xF7FF is used to enable the lock
mechanism for the watchdog (see the Watchdog Timer section
for more information).
MOV ECON, #08H
command
;set up PROTKY to A3h
MOV EDATA, #0A3H
MOV EADRL, #0EBH
MOV FLSHKY, #3BH
The following code provides an example of how the write/erase
protection can be enabled on the first page and the PROTKY set
to 0xA3. Note that to active the following protection, the part
requires a reset.
; set PROTKY to A3h
; write address to F7EBh
; enable flash access
; issue protection
; enable write/erase protection on the first
page only
MOV ECON, #08H
command
MOV EDATA, #0FEH
MOV EADRL, #0F0H
MOV FLSHKY, #3BH
; clear bit WP 0
Note that after the PROTKY is changed to 0xA3, as shown in
the preceding example code, all future modifications of the pro-
tection scheme require that the PROTKY SFR to be set to 0xA3
prior to issuing the ECON protection command.
; write address to F7F0h
; enable flash access
WDOG
WP
123
WP
122
WP
121
WP
120
0xF7FF
LOCK
WP
119
WP
118
WP
117
WP
116
WP
115
WP
114
WP
113
WP
112
WP
111
WP
110
WP
109
WP
108
WP
107
WP
106
WP
105
WP
104
WP
15
WP
14
WP
13
WP
12
WP
11
WP
10
WP
9
WP
8
WP
7
WP
6
WP
5
WP
4
WP
3
WP
2
WP
1
WP
0
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
0xF7EF
120–123 116–119 112–115 108–111 104–107 100–103 96–99
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
92–95 88–91 84–87 80–83 76–79 72–75 68–71 64–67
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
60–63 56–59 52–55 48–51 44–47 40–43 36–39 32–35
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
RP
4–7
RP
0–3
28–31 24–27 20–23 16–19 12–15 8–11
PROTKY
PROTECTION KEY
0xF7EB
0xF600
Figure 91. Flash Protection in Page124
Rev. 0 | Page 104 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
When the last page is read protected, the protection bits can still
be read by the user code. All other bits on this page are not
available for reading.
Enabling Flash Protection by Emulator Commands
Another way to set the flash protection bytes is to use the reserved
emulator commands available only in download mode. These
commands write directly to the SFRs and can be used to duplicate
the operation described in the Enabling Flash Protection by Code
section. When these flash bytes are written, the part can exit
emulation mode by reset and the protections are effective. This
method can be used in production and implemented after
downloading the program. The commands used for this opera-
tion are an extension of the commands listed in Application
Note uC004, Understanding the Serial Download Protocol,
available at www.analog.com.
The protection scheme is intended to protect the end system. Pro-
tection should be disabled while developing and emulating code.
Flash Memory Timing
Typical program and erase times for the flash memory are
shown in Table 110.
Table 110. Flash Memory Program and Erase Times
Command
Write Byte
Erase Page
Erase All
Bytes Affected
Flash Memory Timing
1 byte
512 bytes
62 kB
30 μs
20 ms
2.5 sec
100 ns
•
•
Command with ASCII Code I or 0x49 writes the data into R0.
Command with ASCII Code F or 0x46 writes R0 into the
SFR address defined in the data of this command.
Read Byte
1 byte
Note that the core microcontroller operation is idled until the
requested flash memory operation is complete. In practice, this
means that even though the flash operation is typically initiated
with a two-machine-cycle MOV instruction (to write to the flash
control SFR (ECON, Address 0xB9), the next instruction is not
executed until the Flash/EE operation is complete. This means
that the core cannot respond to interrupt requests until the Flash/
EE operation is complete, although the core peripheral functions
such as counters/timers continue to count, as configured, through-
out this period.
Omitting the protocol defined in the uC004, the sequence to
load protections is similar to the sequence mentioned in the
Enabling Flash Protection by Code section, except that two
emulator commands are necessary to replace one assembly
command. For example, to write the protection value in EADRH
(Address 0xC7), the following two commands must be executed:
•
•
Command I with data = value of Protection Byte 0x3FFF
Command F with data = 0xC7
With this protocol, the protection can be written to the flash
memory using the same sequence as described in the Enabling
Flash Protection by Code section. When the part is reset, the
protection is effective.
IN CIRCUIT PROGRAMMING
Serial Downloading
The ADE5166/ADE5169 facilitate code download via the
standard UART serial port. The parts enter serial download
Notes on Flash Protection
SDEN
mode after a reset or a power cycle if the
pin is pulled low
The flash protection scheme is disabled by default so that none
of the pages of the flash are protected from reading or writing/
erasing.
through an external 1 kΩ resistor. Once in serial download
mode, the hidden embedded download kernel executes. This
allows the user to download code to the full 62 kB of flash
memory while the device is in circuit in its target application
hardware.
The last page must be write-/erase-protected for the protection
scheme to work.
To activate the protection settings, the ADE5166/ADE5169
must be reset after configuring the protection.
Protection configured in the last page of the ADE5166/ADE5169
affects whether flash memory can be accessed in serial download
mode. Read protected pages cannot be read. Write/erase
protected pages cannot be written or erased. The configuration
bits cannot be programmed in serial download mode.
After configuring protection on the last page and resetting the
part, protections that have been enabled can be removed only
by mass erasing the flash memory. The protection bits are never
truly write protected. Protection bits can be program modified
from a 1 to a 0, even after the last page has been protected. In
this way, more protection can be added, but none can be removed.
Rev. 0 | Page 105 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
TIMERS
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 has three 16-bit timers/counters:
Timer/Counter 0, Timer/Counter 1, and Timer/Counter 2. The
timer/counter hardware is included on-chip to relieve the processor
core of overhead inherent in implementing timer/counter func-
tionality in software. Each timer/counter consists of two 8-bit
registers: THx and TLx (x = 0, 1, or 2). All three timers can be
configured to operate as timers or as event counters.
When functioning as a counter, the TLx register is incremented
by a 1-to-0 transition at its corresponding external input pin:
T0, T1, or T2. When the samples show a high in one cycle and a
low in the next cycle, the count is incremented. Because it takes
two machine cycles (two core clock periods) to recognize a 1-to-0
transition, the maximum count rate is half the core clock frequency.
There are no restrictions on the duty cycle of the external input
signal, but to ensure that a given level is sampled at least once
before it changes, it must be held for a minimum of one full
machine cycle. User configuration and control of all timer
operating modes is achieved via the SFRs listed in Table 111.
When functioning as a timer, the TLx SFR is incremented every
machine cycle. Thus, it can be thought of as counting machine
cycles. Because a machine cycle on a single cycle core consists of
one core clock period, the maximum count rate is the core clock
frequency.
Table 111. Timer SFRs
SFR
Address
Bit Addressable
Description
TCON
TMOD
TL0
TL1
TH0
0x88
0x89
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 control (see Table 113).
Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 mode (see Table 112).
Timer 0 low byte (see Table 116).
Timer 1 low byte (see Table 118).
Timer 0 high byte (see Table 115).
0x8A
0x8B
0x8C
0x8D
0xC8
0xCA
0xCB
0xCC
0xCD
TH1
Timer 1 high byte (see Table 117).
T2CON
RCAP2L
RCAP2H
TL2
Timer/Counter 2 control (see Table 114).
Timer 2 reload/capture low byte (see Table 122).
Timer 2 reload/capture high byte (see Table 121).
Timer 2 low byte (see Table 120).
TH2
Timer 2 high byte (see Table 119).
TIMER REGISTERS
Table 112. Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 Mode SFR (TMOD, Address 0x89)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
7
Gate1
C/T1
0
Timer 1 gating control. Set by software to enable Timer/Counter 1 only when the INT1 pin is high and the TR1
control bit (Address 0x88[6]) is set. Cleared by software to enable Timer 1 whenever the TR1 control bit is set.
6
0
Timer 1 timer or counter select bit. Set by software to select counter operation (input from T1 pin). Cleared
by software to select the timer operation (input from internal system clock).
[5:4] T1/M1,
T1/M0
00
Timer 1 mode select bits.
T1/M1, T1/M0
Result
00
TH1 (Address 0x8D) operates as an 8-bit timer/counter. TL1 (Address 0x8B) serves as a
5-bit prescaler.
01
10
11
16-bit timer/counter. TH1 and TL1 are cascaded; there is no prescaler.
8-bit autoreload timer/counter. TH1 holds a value to reload into TL1 each time it overflows.
Timer/Counter 1 stopped.
3
2
Gate0
C/T0
0
Timer 0 gating control. Set by software to enable Timer/Counter 0 only when the INT0 pin is high and the TR0
control bit (Address 0x88[4]) is set. Cleared by software to enable Timer 0 whenever the TR0 control bit is set
in the Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 control SFR (TCON, Address 0x88).
0
Timer 0 timer or counter select bit. Set by software to the select counter operation (input from the T0 pin).
Cleared by software to the select timer operation (input from internal system clock).
[1:0] T0/M1,
T0/M0
00
Timer 0 mode select bits.
T0/M1, T0/M0
Result
00
01
10
11
TH0 operates as an 8-bit timer/counter. TL0 serves as a 5-bit prescaler.
16-bit timer/counter. TH0 and TL0 are cascaded; there is no prescaler.
8-bit autoreload timer/counter. TH0 holds a value to reload into TL0 each time TL0 overflows.
TL0 is an 8-bit timer/counter controlled by the standard Timer 0 control bits. TH0 is an
8-bit timer only, controlled by Timer 1 control bits.
Rev. 0 | Page 106 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 113. Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 Control SFR (TCON, Address 0x88)
Bit Bit Address Mnemonic Default Description
7
6
5
4
3
0x8F
0x8E
0x8D
0x8C
0x8B
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
IE11
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1 overflow flag. Set by hardware on a Timer/Counter 1 overflow. Cleared by hardware
when the program counter (PC) vectors to the interrupt service routine.
Timer 1 run control bit. Set by the user to turn on Timer/Counter 1. Cleared by the user to turn
off Timer/Counter 1.
Timer 0 overflow flag. Set by hardware on a Timer/Counter 0 overflow. Cleared by hardware
when the PC vectors to the interrupt service routine.
Timer 0 run control bit. Set by the user to turn on Timer/Counter 0. Cleared by the user to turn
off Timer/Counter 0.
External Interrupt 1 (INT1) flag. Set by hardware by a falling edge or by a zero level applied to
the external interrupt pin, INT1, depending on the state of Bit IT1. Cleared by hardware when
the PC vectors to the interrupt service routine only if the interrupt was transition activated. If level
activated, the external requesting source, rather than the on-chip hardware, controls the
request flag.
2
1
0x8A
0x89
IT11
IE01
0
0
External Interrupt 1 (IE1) trigger type. Set by software to specify edge sensitive detection, that is,
a 1-to-0 transition. Cleared by software to specify level sensitive detection, that is, zero level.
External Interrupt 0 (INT0) flag. Set by hardware by a falling edge or by a zero level being
applied to the external interrupt pin, INT0, depending on the state of Bit IT0. Cleared by
hardware when the PC vectors to the interrupt service routine only if the interrupt was
transition activated. If level activated, the external requesting source, rather than the on-chip
hardware, controls the request flag.
0
0x88
IT01
0
External Interrupt 0 (IE0) trigger type. Set by software to specify edge sensitive detection, that is,
1-to-0 transition. Cleared by software to specify level sensitive detection, that is, zero level.
1
INT0
INT1
interrupt pins.
These bits are not used to control Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 but are instead used to control and monitor the external
and
Table 114. Timer/Counter 2 Control SFR (T2CON, Address 0xC8)
Bit Bit Address Mnemonic Default Description
7
6
5
0xCF
0xCE
0xCD
TF2
0
0
0
Timer 2 overflow flag. Set by hardware on a Timer 2 overflow. TF2 cannot be set when either
RCLK = 1 or TCLK = 1. Cleared by user software.
Timer 2 external flag. Set by hardware when either a capture or reload is caused by a negative
transition on the T2EX pin and EXEN2 = 1. Cleared by user software.
Receive clock enable bit. Set by the user to enable the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses
for its receive clock in Serial Port Mode 1 and Serial Port Mode 3. Cleared by the user to enable
Timer 1 overflow to be used for the receive clock.
EXF2
RCLK
4
3
0xCC
0xCB
TCLK
0
0
Transmit clock enable bit. Set by the user to enable the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses
for its transmit clock in Serial Port Mode 1 and Serial Port Mode 3. Cleared by the user to enable
Timer 1 overflow to be used for the transmit clock.
Timer 2 external enable flag. Set by the user to enable a capture or reload to occur as a result of
a negative transition on the T2EX pin if Timer 2 is not being used to clock the serial port. Cleared
by the user for Timer 2 to ignore events at T2EX.
EXEN2
2
1
0xCA
0xC9
TR2
C/T2
0
0
Timer 2 start/stop control bit. Set by the user to start Timer 2. Cleared by the user to stop Timer 2.
Timer 2 timer or counter function select bit. Set by the user to select the counter function (input
from the external T2 pin). Cleared by the user to select the timer function (input from the on-chip core
clock).
0
0xC8
CAP2
0
Timer 2 capture/reload select bit. Set by the user to enable captures on negative transitions at
the T2EX pin if EXEN2 = 1. Cleared by the user to enable autoreloads with Timer 2 overflows or
negative transitions at the T2EX pin when EXEN2 = 1. When either RCLK = 1 or TCLK = 1, this bit is
ignored and the timer is forced to autoreload on Timer 2 overflow.
Rev. 0 | Page 107 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Mode 0 (13-Bit Timer/Counter)
Table 115. Timer 0 High Byte SFR (TH0, Address 0x8C)
Mode 0 configures an 8-bit timer/counter. Figure 92 shows
Mode 0 operation. Note that the divide-by-12 prescaler is not
present on the single cycle core.
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TH0
0
Timer 0 data high byte.
Table 116. Timer 0 Low Byte SFR (TL0, Address 0x8A)
Bit Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TL0 Timer 0 data low byte.
fCORE
C/T0 = 0
0
INTERRUPT
TL0
TH0
TF0
(5 BITS) (8 BITS)
Table 117. Timer 1 High Byte SFR (TH1, Address 0x8D)
Bit Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TH1 Timer 1 data high byte.
C/T0 = 1
P0.6/T0
CONTROL
0
TR0
Table 118. Timer 1 Low Byte SFR (TL1, Address 0x8B)
Bit Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TL1 Timer 1 data low byte.
GATE
INT0
0
Figure 92. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 0
Table 119. Timer 2 High Byte SFR (TH2, Address 0xCD)
Bit Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TH2 Timer 2 data high byte.
In this mode, the timer register is configured as a 13-bit register.
As the count rolls over from all 1s to all 0s, it sets the timer overflow
flag, TF0 (Address 0x88[5]). TF0 can then be used to request an
interrupt. The counted input is enabled to the timer when TR0 = 1
0
Table 120. Timer 2 Low Byte SFR (TL2, Address 0xCC)
Bit Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TL2 Timer 2 data low byte.
INT0
and either Gate0 = 0 or
= 1. Setting Gate0 = 1 allows the
INT0
timer to be controlled by the external input,
, to facilitate
0
pulse width measurements. TR0 is a control bit located in the
Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 control SFR (TCON,
Address 0x88[4]); the Gate0/Gate1 bits are in Timer/Counter 0
and Timer/Counter 1 mode SFR (TMOD, Address 0x89, Bit 3 and
Bit 7, respectively). The 13-bit register consists of all eight bits of
Timer 0 high byte SFR (TH0, Address 0x8C) and the lower five
bits of Timer 0 low byte SFR (TL0, Address 0x8A). The upper
three bits of TL0 SFR are indeterminate and should be ignored.
Setting the run flag (TR0) does not clear the registers.
Table 121. Timer 2 Reload/Capture High Byte SFR
(RCAP2H, Address 0xCB)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TH2
0
Timer 2 reload/capture high byte.
Table 122. Timer 2 Reload/Capture Low Byte SFR (RCAP2L,
Address 0xCA)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0] TL2
0
Timer 2 reload/capture low byte.
Mode 1 (16-Bit Timer/Counter)
TIMER 0 AND TIMER 1
Timer 0 High/Low and Timer 1 High/Low Data Registers
Mode 1 is the same as Mode 0 except that the Mode 1 timer
register runs with all 16 bits. Mode 1 is shown in Figure 93.
fCORE
Each timer consists of two 8-bit SFRs. For Timer 0, they are
Timer 0 high byte (TH0, Address 0x8C) and Timer 0 low byte
(TL0, Address 0x8A). For Time 1, they are Timer 1 high byte
(TH1, Address 0x8D) and Timer 1 low byte (TL1, Address 0x8B).
These SFRs can be used as independent registers or combined
into a single 16-bit register, depending on the timer mode
configuration (see Table 115 to Table 118).
C/T0 = 0
INTERRUPT
TL0
TH0
TF0
(8 BITS) (8 BITS)
C/T0 = 1
P0.6/T0
CONTROL
TR0
Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 Operating Modes
GATE
INT0
This section describes the operating modes for Timer/Counter 0
and Timer/Counter 1. Unless otherwise noted, these modes of
operation are the same for both Timer 0 and Timer 1.
Figure 93. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 1
Rev. 0 | Page 108 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Mode 2 (8-Bit Timer/Counter with Autoreload)
TIMER 2
Timer/Counter 2 Data Registers
Mode 2 configures the timer register as an 8-bit counter (TL0)
with automatic reload, as shown in Figure 94. Overflow from TL0
not only sets TF0 but also reloads TL0 with the contents of TH0,
which is preset by software. The reload leaves TH0 unchanged.
Timer/Counter 2 also has two pairs of 8-bit data registers asso-
ciated with it: Timer 2 high byte SFR (TH2, Address 0xCD),
Timer 2 low byte SFR (TL2, Address 0xCC), Timer 2 reload/
capture high byte SFR (RCAP2H, Address 0xCB), and Timer 2
reload/capture low byte SFR (RCAP2L, Address 0xCA). These
are used both as timer data registers and as timer capture/reload
registers (see Table 119 to Table 122).
fCORE
C/T0 = 0
INTERRUPT
TL0
TF0
(8 BITS)
C/T0 = 1
Timer/Counter 2 Operating Modes
P0.6/T0
CONTROL
The following sections describe the operating modes for
Timer/Counter 2. The operating modes are selected by bits in
the Timer/Counter 2 control SFR (T2CON, Address 0xC8),
as shown in Table 114 and Table 123.
TRO
RELOAD
TH0
GATE
INT0
(8 BITS)
Figure 94. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 2
Table 123. T2CON Operating Modes
RCLK or TCLK
CAP2
TR2
Mode
Mode 3 (Two 8-Bit Timer/Counters)
0
0
1
X
0
1
X
X
1
1
1
0
16-bit autoreload
16-bit capture
Baud rate
Off
Mode 3 has different effects on Timer 0 and Timer 1. Timer 1 in
Mode 3 simply holds its count. The effect is the same as setting
TR1 = 0. Timer 0 in Mode 3 establishes TL0 and TH0 as two
separate counters. This configuration is shown in Figure 95.
16-Bit Autoreload Mode
T0
TL0 uses the Timer 0 control bits, C/ , Gate0 (see Table 112),
INT0
TR0, TF0 (see Table 113), and the
pin. TH0 is locked into
The 16-bit autoreload mode has two options that are selected by
EXEN2 (Bit 3) in the Timer/Counter 2 control SFR (T2CON,
Address 0xC8). If EXEN2 = 0 when Timer 2 rolls over, it not only
sets TF2 but also causes the Timer 2 SFRs to be reloaded with the
16-bit value in both the Timer 2 reload/capture high byte SFR
(RCAP2H, Address 0xCB) and Timer 2 reload/capture low byte
SFR (RCAP2L, Address 0xCA) registers, which are preset by
software. If EXEN2 = 1, Timer 2 performs the same events as
when EXEN2 = 0 but adds a 1-to-0 transition at the external input
pin, T2EX, which triggers the 16-bit reload and sets EXF2.
Autoreload mode is shown in Figure 96.
a timer function (counting machine cycles) and takes over the
use of TR1 and TF1 from Timer 1. Therefore, TH0 controls the
Timer 1 interrupt. Mode 3 is provided for applications requiring
an extra 8-bit timer or counter.
When Timer 0 is in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be turned on and off
by switching it out of and into its own Mode 3, or it can be used
by the serial interface as a baud rate generator. In fact, Timer 1
can be used in any application not requiring an interrupt from
Timer 1 itself.
CORE
CLK/12
fCORE
16-Bit Capture Mode
C/T0 = 0
INTERRUPT
TL0
TF0
The 16-bit capture mode has two options that are selected by
EXEN2 (Bit 3) in the Timer/Counter 2 control SFR (T2CON,
Address 0xC8). If EXEN2 = 0, Timer 2 is a 16-bit timer or counter
that, upon overflowing, sets the Timer 2 overflow bit (TF2, Bit 7).
This bit can be used to generate an interrupt. If EXEN2 = 1, then
Timer 2 performs the same events as when EXEN2 = 0, but it
adds a l-to-0 transition on the T2E external input, causing the
current value in the Timer 2 SFRs, TL2 (Address 0xCC) and TH2
(Address 0xCD) to be captured into the RCAP2L (Address 0xCA)
and RCAP2H (Address 0xCB) SFRs, respectively. In addition, the
transition at T2EX causes the EXF2 bit (Bit 6) in the T2CON SFR
(Address 0xC8) to be set, and EXF2, like TF2, can generate an
interrupt. Capture mode is shown in Figure 97. The baud rate
generator mode is selected by RCLK = 1 and/or TCLK = 1.
(8 BITS)
C/T0 = 1
P0.6/T0
CONTROL
TR0
GATE
INT0
INTERRUPT
TH0
(8 BITS)
fCORE/12
TF1
TR1
Figure 95. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 3
Rev. 0 | Page 109 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
In either case, if Timer 2 is used to generate the baud rate, the TF2
interrupt flag does not occur. Therefore, Timer 2 interrupts do not
occur and do not have to be disabled. In this mode, the EXF2 flag
can, however, still cause interrupts that can be used as a third
external interrupt. Baud rate generation is described as part of the
UART serial port operation in the UART Serial Interface section.
fCORE
C/T2 = 0
TL2
(8 BITS)
TH2
(8 BITS)
C/T2 = 1
P1.4/T2
CONTROL
TR2
RELOAD
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
RCAP2L
RCAP2H
TF2
TIMER
INTERRUPT
P1.3/
T2EX
EXF2
CONTROL
EXEN2
Figure 96. Timer/Counter 2, 16-Bit Autoreload Mode
fCORE
C/T2 = 0
C/T2 = 1
TL2
(8 BITS)
TH2
(8 BITS)
TF2
P1.4/T2
CONTROL
TR2
TIMER
INTERRUPT
CAPTURE
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
RCAP2L
RCAP2H
P1.3/
T2EX
EXF2
CONTROL
EXEN2
Figure 97. Timer/Counter 2, 16-Bit Capture Mode
Rev. 0 | Page 110 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
PLL
The ADE5166/ADE5169 are intended for use with a 32.768 kHz
watch crystal. A PLL locks onto a multiple of this frequency to
provide a stable 4.096 MHz clock for the system. The core can
operate at this frequency or at binary submultiples of it to allow
power savings when maximum core performance is not required.
The default core clock is the PLL clock divided by 4, or 1.024 MHz.
The ADE energy measurement clock is derived from the PLL
clock and is maintained at 4.096 MHz/5 MHz (or 819.2 kHz)
across all CD settings.
The PLL is controlled by the CD[2:0] bits in the power control
SFR (POWCON, Address 0xC5). To protect erroneous changes
to the POWCON SFR, a key is required to modify the register.
First, the key SFR (KYREG, Address 0xC1) is written with the
key, 0xA7, and then a new value is written to the POWCON SFR.
If the PLL loses lock, the MCU is reset and the PLL_FLT bit
(Bit 4) is set in the peripheral configuration SFR (PERIPH,
Address 0xF4). Set the PLLACK bit in the start ADC measurement
SFR (ADCGO, Address 0xD8) to acknowledge the PLL fault,
clearing the PLL_FLT bit.
PLL REGISTERS
Table 124. Power Control SFR (POWCON, Address 0xC5)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
7
Reserved
1
0
Reserved.
6
METER_OFF
Set this bit to 1 to turn off the modulators and energy metering DSP circuitry to reduce power if
metering functions are not needed in PSM0.
5
Reserved
COREOFF
Reserved
CD
0
0
This bit should be kept at 0 for proper operation.
Set this bit to 1 to shut down the core if in the PSM1 operating mode.
Reserved.
4
3
[2:0]
010
Controls the core clock frequency (fCORE). fCORE = 4.096 MHz/2CD
.
CD
Result (fCORE in MHz)
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
4.096
2.048
1.024
0.512
0.256
0.128
0.064
0.032
Writing to the Power Control SFR (POWCON, Address 0xC5)
Note that writing data to the POWCON SFR involves writing 0xA7 into the key SFR (KYREG, Address 0xC1), followed by a write to the
POWCON SFR.
Table 125. Key SFR (KYREG, Address 0xC1)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
[7:0]
KYREG
0
Write 0xA7 to the KYREG SFR before writing to the POWCON SFR to unlock it.
Write 0xEA to the KYREG SFR before writing to the INTPR, HTHSEC, SEC, MIN, or HOUR timekeeping
registers to unlock them (see the RTC Registers section).
Rev. 0 | Page 111 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
REAL-TIME CLOCK (RTC)
The ADE5166/ADE5169 have an embedded RTC (see Figure 98).
The external 32.768 kHz crystal is used as the clock source for
the RTC. Calibration is provided to compensate the nominal
crystal frequency and for variations in the external crystal fre-
quency over temperature. By default, the RTC is active in all the
power saving modes. The RTC counters retain their values
through watchdog resets and external resets and are reset only
during a power-on reset.
The RTC registers can be written using the following 8052
assembly code:
MOV
CALL
…
RTCKey, #0EAh
UpdateRTC
UpdateRTC:
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
RET
KYREG, RTCKey
RTCDAT, #30
RTCPTR, #82h
KYREG, RTCKey
RTCDAT, #05
RTCPTR, #83h
KYREG, RTCKey
RTCDAT, #04
RTCPTR, #84h
RTCKey, #00h
The ADE5166/ADE5169 provide two ways to access the RTC
data: by direct access through SFRs for configuration and by
indirect access through address and data SFRs for the timekeeping
registers and some other configurations. The address and data
SFRs act as pointers to the RTC internal registers.
ACCESS TO RTC SFRs
Access to the RTC SFRs is achieved by reading or writing to the
SFR addresses that are detailed in the Access to Internal RTC
Registers section. Writing to the indirect registers is protected
by a key, as explained in the Writing to Internal RTC Registers
section. Reading is not protected.
Reading Internal Energy Measurement Registers
ACCESS TO INTERNAL RTC REGISTERS
When Bit 7 of the RTCPTR SFR is cleared, the content of the
internal RTC data register designated by the address in RTCPTR
is transferred to the RTCDAT SFR. The RTC cannot be stopped
to read the current time because stopping the RTC introduces
an error in its timekeeping. Therefore, the RTC is read on-the-fly,
and the counter registers must be checked for overflow. This
can be accomplished using the following 8052 assembly code:
Access to the internal RTC measurement registers is achieved by
writing to the RTC pointer address SFR (RTCPTR, Address 0xA3).
The RTCPTR register selects the RTC register to be accessed
and determines if a read or a write is performed (see Table 129).
Writing to Internal RTC Registers
The RTC circuitry runs off a 32.768 kHz clock. The timekeeping
registers, HTHSEC, SEC, MIN, HOUR, DAY, DATE, MONTH,
and YEAR are updated with a 32.768 kHz clock. However, the
TIMECON (Address 0xA1) and TIMECON2 (Address 0xA2)
SFRs and the INTVAL register (Address 0x09) are updated with
a 128 Hz clock. It takes up to two 128 Hz clock cycles from when
the MCU writes the TIMECON, TIMECON2, or INTVAL SFRs
until they are successfully updated in the RTC.
ReadAgain:
MOV
0
RTCPTR #01
; Read HTHSEC using Bank
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
R0, RTCDAT
RTCPTR, #02 ; Read SEC
R1, RTCDAT
RTCPTR, #03 ; Read MIN
R2, RTCDAT
When the RTCW_RB bit of the RTCPTR SFR (Address 0xA3)
is set, the content of the RTCDAT SFR (Address 0xA4) is
transferred to the internal RTC register designated by the
address in the RTCPTR SFR. To protect the RTC timekeeping
registers from runaway code, a key must be written to the
KYREG SFR (Address 0xC1) to obtain write access to any of the
RTC indirect registers. The KYREG should be set to 0xEA to
unlock the timekeeping registers and is reset to zero after a
timekeeping register is written.
RTCPTR, #04 ; Read HOUR
R3, RTCDAT
RTCPTR, #01 ; Read HTHSEC
A, RTCDAT
CJNE
A, 00h, ReadAgain
; 00h is R0 in
Bank 0
Rev. 0 | Page 112 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
XTALG2 XTALG1
AUTOCOMPEN
XTALOS
_
+
32.768kHz
CRYSTAL
TEMPERATURE
ADC
RTCCOMP
(x)2
TEMPCAL
COMPENSATION
CALIBRATION
ITS1 ITS0
CALIBRATED
32.768kHz
8-BIT
PRESCALER
HUNDREDTHS COUNTER
HTHSEC
INTERVAL
TIMEBASE
SELECTION
MUX
ALSEC_EN
ALARM SECOND
ALSEC
EQUAL?
EQUAL?
SECOND COUNTER
SEC
ALMIN_EN
ALARM MINUTE
ALMIN
MINUTE COUNTER
MIN
ALHR_EN
ALARM HOUR
ALHOUR
ITEN
HOUR COUNTER
HOUR
EQUAL?
EQUAL?
ALDAY_EN
ALARM DAY
ALDAY
DAY COUNTER
DAY
ALDAT_EN
8-BIT
ALARM DATE
ALDATE
INTERVAL COUNTER
DAY COUNTER
DATE
EQUAL?
INTVAL
MONTH COUNTER
MONTH
EQUAL?
ALINT_EN
YEAR COUNTER
YEAR
RTC INTERRUPT
ALFLAG
Figure 98. RTC Implementation
RTC SFRs
Table 126. List of RTC SFRs
SFR
Address
0xA1
0xA2
0xA3
0xA4
0xC1
0xF6
Bit Addressable
Description
TIMECON
TIMECON2
RTCPTR
RTCDAT
KYREG
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
RTC configuration (see Table 127).
RTC Configuration 2 (see Table 128).
RTC pointer address (see Table 129).
RTC pointer data (see Table 130).
Key (see Table 133).
RTCCOMP
TEMPCAL
RTC nominal compensation (see Table 131).
RTC temperature compensation (see Table 132). This is a read only register.
0xF7
Rev. 0 | Page 113 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 127. RTC Configuration SFR (TIMECON, Address 0xA1)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
7
Reserved
ALFLAG
N/A
0
Reserved.
6
Alarm flag. This bit is set when the RTC registers match the enabled alarm registers. It can be cleared by
the user to indicate that the alarm has been serviced.
[5:4] ITS1, ITS0
0
0
INTVAL timebase select bits.
ITS1, ITS0
Timebase
1/128 sec
Second
Minute
Hour
00
01
10
11
3
SIT
Interval timer one-time alarm.
SIT
0
Result
The ITFLAG flag is set after INTVAL counts, and then another interval count starts
The ITFLAG flag is set after one time interval
1
2
1
ITFLAG
ITEN
0
0
Interval timer flag. This bit is set when the configured time interval has elapsed. It can be cleared by the
user to indicate that the alarm event has been serviced.
Interval timer enable.
ITEN
Result
0
1
The interval timer is disabled, and the 8-bit interval timer counter is reset
Set this bit to 1 to enable the interval timer
0
Unused
N/A
Unused.
Table 128. RTC Configuration 2 SFR (TIMECON2, Address 0xA2)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:5] Reserved
N/A
0
Reserved.
4
3
2
1
0
ALDAT_EN
ALDAY_EN
ALHR_EN
ALMIN_EN
ALSEC_EN
Alarm date enable. When this bit is set, the data in the AL_DATE register (Address 0x0E) is compared to
the data in the RTC DATE register (Address 0x06). If the two values match and any other enabled RTC
alarms also match, the ALFLAG in the TIMECON SFR (Address 0xA1) is set. If enabled, an RTC interrupt occurs.
Alarm day enable. When this bit is set, the data in the AL_DAY (Address 0x0D) register is compared to the
data in the RTC DAY register (Address 0x05). If the two values match and any other enabled RTC alarms
also match, the ALFLAG in the TIMECON SFR (Address 0xA1) is set. If enabled, an RTC interrupt occurs.
Alarm hour enable. When this bit is set, the data in the AL_HOUR register (Address 0x0C) is compared to
the data in the RTC HOUR register (Address 0x04). If the two values match and any other enabled RTC
alarms also match, the ALFLAG in the TIMECON SFR (Address 0xA1) is set. If enabled, an RTC interrupt occurs.
Alarm minute enable. When set, the data in the AL_MIN register (Address 0x0B) is compared to the data in
the RTC MIN register (Address 0x03). If the two values match and any other enabled RTC alarms also
match, the ALFLAG in the TIMECON SFR (Address 0xA1) is set. If enabled, an RTC interrupt occurs.
0
0
0
0
Alarm second enable. When this bit is set, the data in the AL_SEC register (Address 0x0A) is compared to
the data in the RTC SEC register (Address 0x02). If the two values match and any other enabled RTC alarms
also match, the ALFLAG in the TIMECON SFR (Address 0xA1) is set. If enabled, an RTC interrupt occurs.
Rev. 0 | Page 114 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 129. RTC Pointer Address SFR (RTCPTR, Address 0xA3)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
RTCW_RB
0
Read/write selection.
RTCW_RB
Results
0
The RTC register at RTC_ADDRESS (Bits[4:0]) is read into the RTCDAT SFR
(Address 0xA4).
1
The data in the RTCDAT SFR is written in the RTC register at RTC_ADDRESS
(Bits[4:0]). This operation is completed only if the KYREG SFR (Address 0xC1)
is set to 0xEA, the instruction before writing to the RTCDAT SFR.
[6:5]
[4:0]
Reserved
N/A
0
Reserved.
RTC_ADDRESS
Target address for read/write operation.
Table 130. RTC Pointer Data SFR (RTCDAT, Address 0xA4)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
RTC_DATA
0
Location of data for read/write RTC operation.
Table 131. RTC Nominal Compensation SFR (RTCCOMP, Address 0xF6)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
RTCCOMP
0
The RTCCOMP SFR holds the nominal RTC compensation value at 25°C. Note that this register
is reset after a watchdog reset, an external reset, or a power-on reset (POR).
Table 132. RTC Temperature Compensation SFR (TEMPCAL, Address 0xF7)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
TEMPCAL
0
The TEMPCAL SFR is used to calibrate the RTC over temperature. This allows the external
crystal shift to be compensated over temperature. Note that this register is reset after a
watchdog reset, an external reset, or a power-on reset (POR).
Table 133. Key SFR (KYREG, Address 0xC1)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default Description
[7:0]
KYREG
0
To unlock the POWCON SFR (Address 0xC5) and enable a write operation, 0xA7 should be
written to the KYREG SFR (Address 0xC1). To unlock the HTHSEC, SEC, MIN or HOUR time-
keeping registers or the RTCCAL register and enable a write operation, 0xEA should be written
to KYREG.
Rev. 0 | Page 115 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
RTC REGISTERS
Table 134. RTC Register List
Address
Signed/
Default
RTCPTR[4:0] Mnemonic R/W Length Unsigned Value
Description
0x00
0x01
Reserved
HTHSEC
N/A N/A
N/A
U
N/A
0
Reserved.
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
8
8
8
8
This counter updates every 1/128 second, referenced from the
calibrated 32.768 kHz clock. It overflows from 127 to 00,
incrementing the seconds counter, SEC.
This counter updates every second, referenced from the calibrated
32.768 kHz clock. It overflows from 59 to 00, incrementing the
minutes counter, MIN.
This counter updates every minute, referenced from the calibrated
32.768 kHz clock. It overflows from 59 to 00, incrementing the
hours counter, HOUR.
This counter updates every hour, referenced from the calibrated
32.768 kHz clock. It overflows from 23 to 00, incrementing the DAY
and DATE counters.
0x02
0x03
0x04
SEC
U
U
U
0
0
0
MIN
HOUR
0x05
0x06
DAY
R/W
R/W
8
8
U
U
0
1
This counter updates every day, referenced from the calibrated
32.768 kHz clock. It overflows from 6 to 0.
This counter updates every day, referenced from the calibrated
32.768 kHz clock. It overflows from 28/29/30 or 31 to 01, depending on
the month, incrementing the month counter, MONTH.
DATE
0x07
MONTH
R/W
8
U
1
This counter starts at 1 and updates every month, referenced from
the calibrated 32.768 kHz clock. It overflows from 12 to 01,
incrementing the year counter, YEAR.
0x08
0x09
YEAR
R/W
R/W
8
8
U
U
0
0
This counter updates every year, referenced from the calibrated
32.768 kHz clock.
INTVAL
The interval timer counts according to the timebase established in the
ITS bits of the RTC Configuration SFR (TIMECON, Address 0xA1[5:4]).
When the number of counts is equal to INTVAL, the ITFLAG flag is set
and a pending RTC interrupt is created, if enabled. Note that the inter-
val counter is eight bits, so it could count up to 255 sec, for example.
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
AL_SEC
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
8
8
8
8
8
8
U
U
U
U
U
U
0
0
0
0
0
0
Alarm second register. When this register matches the SEC register
and the ALSEC_EN bit (TIMECON2, Address 0xA2[0]) is set, the
ALFLAG is issued if all other enabled alarms match their corre-
sponding timekeeping register. If enabled, a pending RTC interrupt
is generated.
Alarm minute register. When this register matches the MIN register
and the ALMIN_EN bit (TIMECON2, Address 0xA2[1]) is set, the
ALFLAG is issued if all other enabled alarms match their corre-
sponding timekeeping register. If enabled, a pending RTC interrupt
is generated.
Alarm hour register. When this register matches the HOUR register
and the ALHR_EN bit (TIMECON2, Address 0xA2[2]) is set, the
ALFLAG is issued if all other enabled alarms match their corre-
sponding timekeeping register. If enabled, a pending RTC interrupt
is generated.
Alarm day register. When this register matches the DAY register
and the ALDAY_EN bit (TIMECON2, Address 0xA2[3]) is set, the
ALFLAG is issued if all other enabled alarms match their corre-
sponding timekeeping registers. If enabled, a pending RTC
interrupt is generated.
AL_MIN
AL_HOUR
AL_DAY
AL_DATE
RTC_CAL
Alarm date register. When this register matches the DATE register
and the ALDAT_EN bit (TIMECON2, Address 0xA2[4]) is set, the
ALFLAG is issued if all other enabled alarms match their corre-
sponding timekeeping registers. If enabled, a pending RTC
interrupt is generated.
Configuration of the RTC calibration output (see Table 135).
Rev. 0 | Page 116 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 135. RTC Calibration Configuration Register (RTC_CAL, Address 0x0F)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
CAL_EN_PSM2
0
When this bit is set and the CAL_EN bit is set, the RTC output is present on P0.5/MISO/ZX in PSM2
mode. The RTC output is disabled on all other pins in PSM2.
6
CAL_EN
0
RTC calibration enable output.
CAL_EN
Result
0
1
The RTC calibration output signal is disabled
The RTC calibration output signal is enabled and present on the pins selected by
the RTC_CAL[3:0] bits
[5:4]
FSEL[1:0]
0
RTC calibration output frequency selection.
FSEL[1:0]
Frequency
1 Hz
512 Hz
500 Hz
16 kHz
Calibration window
30.5 seconds
30.5 seconds
0.244 second
0.244 second
00
01
10
11
3
2
1
0
RTC_P2P3
RTC_P1P2
RTC_P0P7
RTC_P0P5
0
0
0
0
When this bit is set and the CAL_EN bit is set, the RTC output is present on the P2.3/SDEN/TxD2 pin.
When this bit is set and the CAL_EN bit is set, the RTC output is present on the P1.2/FP25/ZX pin.
When this bit is set and the CAL_EN bit is set, the RTC output is present on the P0.7/SS/T1/RxD2 pin.
When this bit is set and the CAL_EN bit is set, the RTC output is present on the P0.5/MISO/ZX pin.
RTC CALENDAR
The RTC has a full calendar, taking into account leap years. The rollover of the date to increment the month is implemented according to the
parameters shown in Table 136.
Table 136. Month Rollover
MONTH Register
Rollover Value
Estimated Month
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
31
28 or 29 days (see Table 137)
31
30
31
30
31
31
30
31
30
31
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
Rev. 0 | Page 117 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Interval Timer Alarm
Table 137. Leap Years—Rollover After 29 Days
The RTC can be used as an interval timer. When the interval timer
is enabled by setting the ITEN bit in the RTC configuration SFR
(TIMECON, Address 0xA1[1]), the interval timer clock source
selected by the ITS1 and ITS0 bits (TIMECON, Bits[5:4]) is passed
through to an 8-bit counter. This counter increments on every
interval timer clock pulse until the 8-bit counter is equal to the
value in the alarm interval register. Then an alarm event is gener-
ated, setting the ITFLAG bit (TIMECON, Address 0xA1[2]) and
creating a pending RTC interrupt. If the SIT bit (TIMECON,
Address 0xA1[3]) is clear, the 8-bit counter is cleared and starts
counting again. If the SIT bit is set, the 8-bit counter is held in
reset after the alarm occurs.
Year Register
0d04
0d08
0d12
0d16
0d20
0d24
0d28
0d32
0d36
0d40
0d44
0d48
0d52
0d56
0d60
0d64
0d68
0d72
0d76
0d80
0d84
0d88
0d92
0d96
Estimated Year
2004
2008
2012
2016
2020
2024
2028
2032
2036
2040
2044
2048
2052
2056
2060
2064
2068
2072
2076
2080
2084
2088
2092
2096
Take care when changing the interval timer timebase. The
recommended procedure is as follows:
1. If the INTVAL register is going to be modified, write to the
INTVAL register first. Then wait for one 128 Hz clock cycle
to synchronize with the RTC, 64,000 cycles at a 4.096 MHz
instruction cycle clock.
2. Disable the interval timer by clearing the ITEN bit (Bit 1)
in the TIMECON SFR. Then wait for one 128 Hz clock cycle
to synchronize with the RTC, 64,000 cycles at a 4.096 MHz
instruction cycle clock.
3. Read the TIMECON SFR to ensure that the ITEN bit is
clear. If it is not, wait for another 128 Hz clock cycle.
4. Set the timebase bits, ITS1 and ITS0 (Bits 5:4) in the
TIMECON SFR to configure the interval. Wait for a 128 Hz
clock cycle for this change to take effect.
RTC INTERRUPTS
The RTC alarm and interval timer interrupts are enabled by
setting the ETI bit in the interrupt enable and Priority 2 SFR
(IEIP2, Address 0xA9). When an alarm or interval timer event
occurs, the corresponding flag is set and a pending RTC interrupt
is generated. If the RTC interrupt is enabled, the program vectors
to the RTC interrupt address, and the corresponding RTC flag
can be cleared in software. Moving to the RTC interrupt address
alone does not automatically clear the flag. To successfully
acknowledge the interrupt event, the flag has to be cleared by
software. If the RTC interrupt is disabled when the event occurs,
the pending interrupt remains until the corresponding RTC flag
is cleared. The ALFLAG and ITFLAG flags, therefore, drive the
RTC interrupt and should be managed by the user to keep track
of the RTC events.
Alarm
The RTC can be used with an alarm to wake up periodically. The
alarm registers (AL_SEC, AL_MIN, AL_HOUR, AL_DAY, and
AL_DATE) should be set to the specific time that the alarm event
is required, and the corresponding Alxx_EN bits set in the
TIMECON2 SFR (Address 0xA2). The enabled alarm registers
are then compared to their respective RTC registers (SEC, MIN,
HOUR, DAY, and DATE) and when all enabled alarms match
their corresponding RTC registers, the alarm flag is set and a
pending interrupt is generated. The alarm flag is located in Bit 6
of the TIMECON SFR (Address 0xA1). If enabled, an RTC
interrupt occurs and the program vectors to the RTC interrupt
address.
Note that, if the ADE5166/ADE5169 are awakened by an RTC
event, either the ALFLAG or ITFLAG, then the pending RTC
interrupt must be serviced before the ADE5166/ADE5169 can
go back to sleep again. The ADE5166/ADE5169 keep waking up
until this interrupt has been serviced.
Rev. 0 | Page 118 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
register (RTC_CAL, Address 0x0F). Note that for the 0.244 sec
calibration window, the RTC is clocked 125 times faster than in
the normal mode, resulting in timekeeping registers that represent
seconds/125, minutes/125, and hours/125, instead of seconds,
minutes, and hours. Therefore, this mode should be used for
calibration only.
RTC CRYSTAL COMPENSATION
The RTC provides registers to compensate for the tolerance of
the crystal frequency and its variation over temperature. Up to
248 ppm frequency error can be calibrated out by the RTC
circuitry. The compensation is fully digital and implemented
by adding or subtracting pulses from the crystal clock signal.
Table 138. RTC Calibration Options
The resolution of the RTC nominal compensation SFR
(RTCCOMP, Address 0xF6) is 2 ppm/LSB, or 0.17 sec/day/LSB.
The RTC compensation circuitry adds the RTC temperature com-
pensation SFR (TEMPCAL, Address 0xF7) and the RTC nominal
compensation SFR (RTCCOMP, Address 0xF6) to determine how
much compensation is required. The sum of these two registers is
limited to 248 ppm, or 42.85 sec/day.
Calibration
Window (sec)
fRTCCAL
(Hz)
Option
FSEL[1:0]
Normal Mode 0
Normal Mode 1
Calibration Mode 0
Calibration Mode 1
00
01
10
11
30.5
30.5
0.244
0.244
1
512
500
16000
When no RTC compensation is applied, with RTCCOMP and
TEMPCAL equal to zero, the nominal compensation required
to account for the error in the external crystal can be deter-
mined. In this case, it is not necessary to wait for an entire
calibration window to determine the error in the pulse output.
Calculating at the error in frequency between two consecutive
pulses on the RTC calibration pin is sufficient.
RTC Calibration
The nominal crystal frequency can be calibrated by adjusting
the RTCCOMP SFR so that the clock going into the RTC is
precisely 32.768 kHz at 25°C.
Calibration Flow
An RTC calibration pulse output is on up to four pins configured
by the four LSBs in the RTC calibration configuration register
(RTC_CAL, Address 0x0F). Enable the RTC output by setting
the CAL_EN bit (Bit 6) in the RTC calibration configuration
register (RTC_CAL, Address 0x0F).
The value to write to the RTCCOMP SFR is calculated from the
% error or seconds per day error on the frequency output. Each
LSB of the RTCCOMP SFR represents 2 ppm of correction
where 1 sec/day error is equal to 11.57 ppm.
The RTC calibration is accurate to within 2 ppm over a 30.5 sec
window in all operational modes: PSM0, PSM1, and PSM2. Two
output frequencies are offered for the normal RTC mode: 1 Hz
with FSEL[1:0] = 00 and 512 Hz with FSEL[1:0] = 01 in the RTC
calibration configuration register (RTC_CAL, Address 0x0F).
RTCCOMP = 5000 × (% Error)
1
RTCCOMP =
× (sec/day Error)
2 ×11.57
During calibration, user software writes the current time to the
RTC. Refer to the Access to Internal RTC Registers section for
more information on how to read and write to the RTC time-
keeping registers.
A shorter window of 0.244 sec is offered for fast calibration during
PSM0 or PSM1mode . Two output frequencies are offered for this
RTC calibration output mode: 500 Hz with FSEL[1:0] = 10 and
16 kHz with FSEL[1:0] = 11 in the RTC calibration configuration
Rev. 0 | Page 119 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
UART SERIAL INTERFACE
The ADE5166/ADE5169 UART can be configured in one of
four modes.
and the firmware interface is through the SFRs presented in
Table 139.
Both the serial port receive and transmit registers are accessed
through the serial port buffer SFR (SBUF, Address 0x99).
Writing to SBUF loads the transmit register, and reading SBUF
accesses a physically separate receive register.
•
•
•
•
Shift register with baud rate fixed at fCORE/12
8-bit UART with variable baud rate
9-bit UART with baud rate fixed at fCORE/64 or fCORE/32
9-bit UART with variable baud rate
An enhanced UART mode is offered by using the UART timer
and by providing enhanced frame error, break error, and overwrite
error detection. This mode is enabled by setting the EXTEN bit
in the configuration SFR (CFG, Address 0xAF) (see the UART
Additional Features section). The enhanced serial baud rate control
SFR (SBAUDT, Address 0x9E) and UART timer fractional
divider SFR (SBAUDF, Address 0x9D) are used to configure the
UART timer and to indicate the enhanced UART errors.
Variable baud rates are defined by using an internal timer to
generate any rate between 300 bauds/sec and 115,200 bauds/sec.
The UART serial interface provided in the ADE5166/ADE5169
is a full-duplex serial interface. It is also receive buffered by storing
the first received byte in a receive buffer until the reception of
the second byte is complete. The physical interface to the UART
is provided via the RxD (P1.0/RxD) and TxD (P1.1/TxD) pins,
UART SFRs
Table 139. Serial Port SFRs
SFR
Address
Bit Addressable
Description
SCON
SBUF
SBAUDT
SBAUDF
0x98
0x99
0x9E
0x9D
Yes
No
No
No
Serial communications control (see Table 140).
Serial port buffer (see Table 141).
Enhanced serial baud rate control (see Table 142).
UART timer fractional divider (see Table 143).
Table 140. Serial Communications Control SFR (SCON, Address 0x98)
Bit Bit Address Mnemonic Default Description
[7:6] 0x9F, 0x9E SM0, SM1 00 UART serial mode select bits. These bits select the serial port operating mode.
SM0, SM1
Result (Selected Operating Mode)
00
01
10
11
Mode 0, shift register, fixed baud rate (fCORE/12)
Mode 1, 8-bit UART, variable baud rate
Mode 2, 9-bit UART, fixed baud rate (fCORE/32) or (fCORE/16)
Mode 3, 9-bit UART, variable baud rate
5
0x9D
SM2
0
Multiprocessor communication enable bit. Enables multiprocessor communication in
Mode 2 and Mode 3, and framing error detection in Mode 1.
In Mode 0, SM2 should be cleared.
In Mode 1, if SM2 is set, RI is not activated if a valid stop bit was not received.
If SM2 is cleared, RI is set as soon as the byte of data is received.
In Mode 2 or Mode 3, if SM2 is set, RI is not activated if the received ninth data bit in RB8 is 0. If
SM2 is cleared, RI is set as soon as the byte of data is received.
4
3
2
1
0x9C
0x9B
0x9A
0x99
REN
TB8
RB8
TI
0
0
0
0
Serial port receive enable bit. Set by user software to enable serial port reception.
Cleared by user software to disable serial port reception.
Serial port transmit (Bit 9). The data loaded into TB8 is the ninth data bit transmitted in
Mode 2 and Mode 3.
Serial port receiver (Bit 9). The ninth data bit received in Mode 2 and Mode 3 is latched
into RB8. For Mode 1, the stop bit is latched into RB8.
Serial port transmit interrupt flag. Set by hardware at the end of the eighth bit in Mode 0 or
at the beginning of the stop bit in Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode 3.
TI must be cleared by user software.
0
0x98
RI
0
Serial port receive interrupt flag. Set by hardware at the end of the eighth bit in Mode 0 or
halfway through the stop bit in Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode 3.
RI must be cleared by user software.
Rev. 0 | Page 120 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 141. Serial Port Buffer SFR (SBUF, Address 0x99)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
SBUF
0
Serial port data buffer.
Table 142. Enhanced Serial Baud Rate Control SFR (SBAUDT, Address 0x9E)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default Description
7
OWE
0
Overwrite error. This bit is set when new data is received and RI = 1 (Bit 0 in the SCON SFR, Address
0x98). It indicates that SBUF was not read before the next character was transferred in, causing the
prior SBUF data to be lost. Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
6
5
FE
BE
0
0
Frame error. This bit is set when the received frame does not have a valid stop bit. This bit is read
only and is updated every time a frame is received.
Break error. This bit is set whenever the receive data line (Rx) is low for longer than a full transmission
frame, which is the time required for a start bit, eight data bits, a parity bit, and half a stop bit. This
bit is updated every time a frame is received.
[4:3]
[2:0]
SBTH
DIV
0
0
Extended divider ratio for baud rate setting, as shown in Table 144.
Binary divider (see Table 144).
DIV
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Result
Divide by 1
Divide by 2
Divide by 4
Divide by 8
Divide by 16
Divide by 32
Divide by 64
Divide by 128
Table 143. UART Timer Fractional Divider SFR (SBAUDF, Address 0x9D)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default Description
7
UARTBAUDEN
0
UART baud rate enable. Set to enable UART timer to generate the baud rate.
When set, the SMOD bit (PCON, Address 0x87[7]), the TCLK bit (T2CON, Address0x88[4]), and the
RCLK bit (T2CON, Address 0xC8[5]) are ignored.
Cleared to let the baud rate be generated as per a standard 8052.
6
[5:0]
Not implemented
SBAUDF
Not implemented, write don’t care.
UART timer fractional divider.
0
Rev. 0 | Page 121 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 144. Common Baud Rates Using the UART Timer with a 4.096 MHz PLL Clock
Ideal Baud
115,200
115,200
57,600
57,600
38,400
38,400
38,400
19,200
19,200
19,200
19,200
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
4800
4800
4800
4800
4800
4800
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
300
CD
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SBTH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
DIV
1
0
2
1
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
7
7
6
5
4
3
2
SBAUDT
0x01
0x00
0x02
0x01
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x04
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x05
0x04
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x06
0x05
0x04
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x17
0x0F
0x07
0x06
0x05
0x04
0x03
0x02
SBAUDF
0x87
0x87
0x87
0x87
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
0xAB
% Error
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Rev. 0 | Page 122 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
All of the following conditions must be met at the time the final
shift pulse is generated to receive a character:
UART OPERATION MODES
Mode 0 (Shift Register with Baud Rate Fixed at fCORE/12)
•
If the extended UART is disabled (EXTEN = 0 in the CFG
SFR, Address 0xAF), RI must be 0 to receive a character.
This ensures that the data in the SBUF SFR is not overwritten
if the last received character has not been read.
If frame error checking is enabled by setting SM2 (Bit 5 of
the SCON SFR, Address 0x98), the received stop bit must
be set to receive a character. This ensures that every character
received comes from a valid frame, with both a start bit
and a stop bit.
Mode 0 is selected when the SM0 and SM1 bits in the serial
communications control register SFR (SCON, Address 0x98) are
cleared. In this shift register mode, serial data enters and exits
through the RxD pin. The TxD pin outputs the shift clock. The
baud rate is fixed at fCORE/12. Eight data bits are transmitted or
received.
•
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that writes to the
serial port buffer SFR (SBUF, Address 0x99). The data is shifted
out of the Pin RxD line. The eight bits are transmitted with the
least significant bit (LSB) first.
If any of these conditions is not met, the received frame is irre-
trievably lost, and the receive interrupt flag (Bit RI in the SCON
SFR, Address 0x98[0]) is not set.
Reception is initiated when the serial port receive enable bit
(Bit REN, Address 0x98[4]) is 1, and the serial port receive inter-
rupt bit (Bit RI, Address 0x98[0]) is 0. When RI is cleared, the
data is clocked into the Pin RxD line, and the clock pulses are
output from the Pin TxD line as shown in Figure 99.
If the received frame has met these conditions, the following
events occur:
•
The eight bits in the receive shift register are latched into
the SBUF SFR.
RxD
(DATA OUT)
DATA BIT 0
DATA BIT 1
DATA BIT 6
DATA BIT 7
•
•
The ninth bit (stop bit) is clocked into RB8 in the SCON SFR.
The receiver interrupt flag (RI in the SCON SFR) is set.
TxD
(SHIFT CLOCK)
Figure 99. 8-Bit Shift Register Mode
Mode 2 (9-Bit UART with Baud Fixed at fCORE/64 or fCORE/32)
Mode 1 (8-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate)
Mode 2 is selected by setting SM0 and clearing SM1. In this
mode, the UART operates in 9-bit mode with a fixed baud rate.
The baud rate is fixed at fCORE/64 by default, although setting the
SMOD bit in the program control SFR (PCON, Address 0x87)
doubles the frequency to fCORE/32. Eleven bits are transmitted or
received: a start bit (0), eight data bits, a programmable ninth
bit, and a stop bit (1). The ninth bit is most often used as a parity
bit or as part of a multiprocessor communication protocol,
although it can be used for anything, including a ninth data bit,
if required.
Mode 1 is selected by clearing the SM0 bit (Address 0x98[7]) and
setting the SM1 bit (Address 0x98[6]). Each data byte (LSB first)
is preceded by a start bit (0) and followed by a stop bit (1).
Therefore, each frame consists of 10 bits transmitted on the TxD
pin or received on the RxD pin.
The baud rate is set by a timer overflow rate. Timer 1 or Timer 2
can be used to generate baud rates, or both timers can be used
simultaneously where one generates the transmit rate and the
other generates the receive rate. There is also a dedicated timer
for baud rate generation, the UART timer, which has a fractional
divisor to precisely generate any baud rate (see the UART Timer
Generated Baud Rates section).
To use the ninth data bit as part of a communication protocol for
a multiprocessor network such as RS-485, the ninth bit is set to
indicate that the frame contains the address of the device with
which the master wants to communicate. The devices on the
network are always listening for a packet with the ninth bit set
and are configured such that if the ninth bit is cleared, the frame
is not valid, and a receive interrupt is not generated. If the ninth
bit is set, all devices on the network receive the address and obtain
a receive character interrupt. The devices examine the address and,
if it matches one of the preprogrammed addresses of the device,
that device configures itself to listen to all incoming frames, even
those with the ninth bit cleared. Because the master has initiated
communication with that device, all the following packets with
the ninth bit cleared are intended specifically for that addressed
device until another packet with the ninth bit set is received. If
the address does not match, the device continues to listen for
address packets.
Transmission is initiated by a write to the serial port buffer SFR
(SBUF, Address 0x99). Next, a stop bit (1) is loaded into the ninth
bit position of the internal serial port shift register. The data is
output bit by bit until the stop bit appears on the TxD pin and
the transmit interrupt flag, TI (Address 0x98[1]), is
automatically set, as shown in Figure 100.
STOP BIT
START
BIT
D0 D1 D2
D3
D4
D5 D6
D7
TxD
TI
(SCON.1)
SET INTERRUPT
(FOR EXAMPLE,
READY FOR MORE DATA)
Figure 100. 8-Bit Variable Baud Rate
Reception is initiated when a 1-to-0 transition is detected on
the RxD pin. Assuming that a valid start bit is detected,
character reception continues. The eight data bits are clocked
into the internal serial port shift register.
Rev. 0 | Page 123 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
To transmit, the eight data bits must be written into the serial
port buffer SFR (SBUF, Address 0x99). The ninth bit must be
written to TB8 (Bit 3) in the serial communications control SFR
(SCON, Address 0x98). When transmission is initiated, the eight
data bits from SBUF are loaded into the transmit shift register
(LSB first). The ninth data bit, held in TB8, is loaded into the
ninth bit position of the transmit shift register. The transmission
starts at the next valid baud rate clock. The serial port transmit
interrupt flag (TI, Bit 1 in the SCON SFR) is set as soon as the
transmission completes, when the stop bit appears on TxD.
UART BAUD RATE GENERATION
Mode 0 Baud Rate Generation
The baud rate in Mode 0 is fixed.
f
⎛
⎜
⎞
⎟
CORE
Mode 0 Baud Rate =
12
⎝
⎠
Mode 2 Baud Rate Generation
The baud rate in Mode 2 depends on the value of the SMOD
bit in the program control SFR (PCON, Address 0x87[7]). If
SMOD = 0, the baud rate is 1/32 of the core clock. If SMOD = 1,
the baud rate is 1/16 of the core clock.
All of the following conditions must be met at the time the final
shift pulse is generated to receive a character:
2SMOD
Mode 2 Baud Rate =
× fCORE
•
•
If the extended UART is disabled (EXTEN = 0 in the CFG
SFR), RI in the SCON SFR must be 0 to receive a character.
This ensures that the data in SBUF is not overwritten if the
last received character has not been read.
If multiprocessor communication is enabled by setting
SM2 in the SCON SFR, the received ninth bit must be set to
receive a character. This ensures that only frames with the
ninth bit set, which are frames that contain addresses,
generate a receive interrupt.
32
Mode 1 and Mode 3 Baud Rate Generation
The baud rates in Mode 1 and Mode 3 are determined by the
overflow rate of the timer generating the baud rate, that is,
Timer 1, Timer 2, or the dedicated baud rate generator, UART
timer, which has an integer and a fractional divisor.
Timer 1 Generated Baud Rates
When Timer 1 is used as the baud rate generator, the baud rates
in Mode 1 and Mode 3 are determined by the Timer 1 overflow
rate. The value of SMOD is as follows:
If any of these conditions is not met, the received frame is
irretrievably lost, and the receive interrupt flag (RI in the SCOn
SFR) is not set.
Mode 1 or Mode 3 Baud Rate =
Reception for Mode 2 is similar to that of Mode 1. The eight
data bytes are input at RxD (LSB first) and loaded onto the
receive shift register. If the received frame has met the previous
criteria, the following events occur:
2SMOD
32
× Timer 1 Overflow Rate
The Timer 1 interrupt should be disabled in this application.
The timer itself can be configured for either timer or counter
operation and in any of its three running modes. In the most
typical application, it is configured for timer operation in auto-
reload mode (high nibble of TMOD = 0010 binary, see Table 12).
In that case, the baud rate is given by the following formula:
•
The eight bits in the receive shift register are latched into
the SBUF SFR.
•
•
The ninth data bit is latched into RB8 in the SCON SFR.
The receiver interrupt flag (RI in the SCON SFR) is set.
2SMOD
fCORE
Mode 3 (9-Bit UART with Variable Baud Rate)
Mode 1 or Mode 3 Baud Rate =
×
32
(256 −TH1)
Mode 3 is selected by setting both SM0 and SM1 in the SCON
SFR. In this mode, the 8052 UART serial port operates in 9-bit
mode with a variable baud rate. The baud rate is set by a timer
overflow rate. Timer 1 or Timer 2 can be used to generate baud
rates, or both timers can be used simultaneously where one
generates the transmit rate and the other generates the receive
rate. There is also a dedicated timer for baud rate generation,
the UART timer, which has a fractional divisor to precisely
generate any baud rate (see the UART Timer Generated Baud
Rates section). The operation of the 9-bit UART is the same as
for Mode 2, but the baud rate can be varied.
Timer 2 Generated Baud Rates
Baud rates can also be generated by using Timer 2. Using Timer 2
is similar to using Timer 1 in that the timer must overflow 16 times
before a bit is transmitted or received. Because Timer 2 has a
16-bit autoreload mode, a wider range of baud rates is possible.
1
16
Mode 1 or Mode 3 Baud Rate =
× Timer 2 Overflow Rate
Therefore, when Timer 2 is used to generate baud rates, the
timer increments every two clock cycles rather than every core
machine cycle as before. It increments six times faster than
Timer 1, and, therefore, baud rates six times faster are possible.
In all four modes, transmission is initiated by any instruction
that uses SBUF as a destination register. Reception is initiated in
Mode 0 when RI = 0 and REN = 1 in the SCON SFR. Reception
is initiated in the other modes by the incoming start bit if REN = 1.
Rev. 0 | Page 124 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Because Timer 2 has 16-bit autoreload capability, very low baud
rates are still possible. Timer 2 is selected as the baud rate generator
by setting TCLK and/or RCLK in Timer/Counter 2 control SFR
(T2CON, Address 0xC8). The baud rates for transmit and receive
can be simultaneously different. Setting RCLK and/or TCLK puts
Timer 2 into its baud rate generator mode, as shown in Figure 102.
fCORE
TIMER 1/TIMER 2
Tx CLOCK
FRACTIONAL
DIVIDER
÷(1 + SBAUDF/64)
TIMER 1/TIMER 2
Rx CLOCK
1
0
0
DIV + SBTH
÷2
Rx CLOCK
In this case, the baud rate is given by the following formula:
1
÷32
UARTBAUDEN
Tx CLOCK
Mode 1 or Mode 3 Baud Rate =
UART TIMER
Rx/Tx CLOCK
fCORE
Figure 101. UART Timer, UART Baud Rate
(
16×
65536 − RCAP2H : RCAP2L
[ ( )])
Two SFRs, enhanced serial baud rate control SFR (SBAUDT,
Address 0x9E) and UART timer fractional divider SFR (SBAUDF,
Address 0x9D), are used to control the UART timer. SBAUDT is
the baud rate control SFR; it sets up the integer divider (DIV) and
the extended divider (SBTH) for the UART timer.
UART Timer Generated Baud Rates
The high integer dividers in a UART block mean that high speed
baud rates are not always possible. In addition, generating baud
rates requires the exclusive use of a timer, rendering it unusable
for other applications when the UART is required. To address
this problem, each ADE5166/ADE5169 has a dedicated baud
rate timer (UART timer) specifically for generating highly
accurate baud rates. The UART timer can be used instead of
Timer 1 or Timer 2 for generating very accurate high speed
UART baud rates, including 115,200 bps. This timer also allows
a much wider range of baud rates to be obtained. In fact, every
desired bit rate from 12 bps to 393,216 bps can be generated to
within an error of 0.8%. The UART timer also frees up the other
three timers, allowing them to be used for different applications.
A block diagram of the UART timer is shown in Figure 101.
The appropriate value to write to DIV (Bits[2:0]) and SBTH
(Bits[4:3]) can be calculated using the following formula, where
fCORE is defined in the POWCON SFR (see Table 25). Note that
the DIV value must be rounded down to the nearest integer.
⎛
⎜
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
fCORE
log
16×Baud Rate
DIV + SBTH =
log
(
2
)
TIMER 1
OVERFLOW
2
0
1
SMOD
CONTROL
fCORE
C/T2 = 0
TIMER 2
OVERFLOW
1
1
0
0
TL2
(8 BITS)
TH2
(8 BITS)
RCLK
16
C/T2 = 1
T2 PIN
(P1.4/T2/FP23)
Rx
CLOCK
TR2
TCLK
16
RELOAD
Tx
CLOCK
NOTE: AVAILABILITY OF ADDITIONAL
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
RCAP2H
RCAP2L
TIMER 2
INTERRUPT
T2EX PIN
(P1.3/T2EX/FP24)
EXF 2
P1.4/T2/FP23
CONTROL
EXEN2
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
Figure 102. Timer 2, UART Baud Rates
Rev. 0 | Page 125 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
SBAUDF is the fractional divider ratio required to achieve the
required baud rate. The appropriate value for SBAUDF can be
calculated with the following formula:
however, provide frame error checking for a 9-bit UART. This
enhanced error checking functionality is available through the
frame error bit, FE, in the enhanced serial baud rate control SFR
(SBAUDT, Address 0x9E). The FE bit is set on framing errors
for both 8-bit and 9-bit UARTs.
⎛
⎜
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
fCORE
SBAUDF = 64 ×
−1
DIV +SBTH
16 ×2
× Baud Rate
START
STOP
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Rx
Note that SBAUDF should be rounded to the nearest integer.
After the values for DIV and SBAUDF are calculated, the actual
baud rate can be calculated with the following formula:
RI
FE
EXTEN = 1
fCORE
Acutal Baud Rate =
SBAUDF
⎛
⎞
⎟
⎠
16×2DIV +SBTH × 1+
Figure 103. UART Timing in Mode 1
⎜
64
⎝
For example, to obtain a baud rate of 9600 bps while operating
at a core clock frequency of 4.096 MHz and with the PLL CD
bits equal to 0,
START
STOP
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Rx
RI
4,096,000
16×9600
⎛
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎠
log
FE
EXTEN = 1
DIV + SBTH =
= 4.74 = 4
log
2
( )
Figure 104. UART Timing in Mode 2 and Mode 3
Note that the DIV result is rounded down.
The 8052 standard UART does not provide break error detection.
However, for an 8-bit UART, a break error can be detected when
the received character is 0, a null character, and when there is a
no stop bit because the RB8 bit is low. Break error detection is
not possible for a 9-bit 8052 UART because the stop bit is not
recorded. The ADE5166/ADE5169 enhanced break error
detection is available through the BE bit in the SBAUDT SFR.
4,096,000
⎛
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎠
SBAUDF = 64 ×
−1 = 42.67 = 0x2B
⎟
16×23 ×9600
Thus, the actual baud rate is 9570 bps, resulting in a 0.31% error.
UART ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Enhanced Error Checking
The 8052 standard UART prevents overwrite errors by not
allowing a character to be received when the RI, receive interrupt
flag, is set. However, it does not indicate if a character has been
lost because the RI bit in the SCON SFR is set when the frame is
received. The enhanced UART overwrite error detection provides
this information. When the enhanced 8052 UART is enabled,
a frame is received regardless of the state of the RI flag. If RI = 1
when a new byte is received, the byte in SCON is overwritten,
and the overwrite error flag is set. The overwrite error flag is
cleared when SBUF is read.
The extended UART provides frame error, break error, and over-
write error detection. Framing errors occur when a stop bit is
not present at the end of the frame. A missing stop bit implies
that the data in the frame may not have been received properly.
Break error detection indicates whether the RxD line has been
low for longer than a 9-bit frame. It indicates that the data just
received, a 0 or null character, is not valid because the master has
disconnected. Overwrite error detection indicates when the
received data has not been read fast enough and, as a result,
a byte of data has been lost.
The extended UART is enabled by setting the EXTEN bit in the
configuration SFR (CFG, Address 0xAF).
The 8052 standard UART offers frame-error checking for an 8-bit
UART through the SM2 and RB8 bits in the SCON SFR. Setting the
SM2 bit prevents frames without a stop bit from being received.
The stop bit is latched into the RB8 bit in the serial communica-
tions control SFR (SCON, Address 0x98). This bit can be examined
to determine if a valid frame was received. The 8052 does not,
UART TxD Signal Modulation
There is an internal 38 kHz signal that can be OR’ed with the
UART transmit signal for use in remote control applications
(see the 38 kHz Modulation section).
Rev. 0 | Page 126 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
UART2 SERIAL INTERFACE
The ADE5166/ADE5169 UART2 is an 8-bit or 9-bit UART with
variable baud rate.
Both the serial port receive and transmit registers are accessed
through the SBUF2 SFR (Address 0xEB). Writing to SBUF2
loads the transmit register, and reading SBUF2 accesses a
physically separate receive register.
Variable baud rates are defined by using an internal timer to
generate any rate between 300 bauds/sec and 115,200 bauds/sec.
An enhanced UART mode is offered by using the UART timer
and providing enhanced frame error, break error, and overwrite
error detection. The SBAUD2 SFR (Address 0xEE) is used to
configure the UART2 timer and to indicate the enhanced
UART2 errors.
The UART2 serial interface provided in the ADE5166/ADE5169 is
a full-duplex serial interface. It is also receive buffered by storing
the first received byte in a receive buffer until the reception of
the second byte is complete. The physical interface to the UART
SS
is provided via the RxD2 (P0.7/ /T1/RxD2) pin and the TxD2
SDEN
/P2.3/TxD2) pin, whereas the firmware interface is through
(
the SFRs presented in Table 145.
UART2 SFRs
Table 145. Serial Port 2 SFRs
Bit
SFR
Address
0xE1
0xEB
Addressable Description
SCON2
SBUF2
SBAUD2
No
No
No
Serial communications control (see Table 146).
Serial Port 2 buffer (see Table 147).
Enhance serial baud rate control (see Table 148).
0xEE
Table 146. Serial Communications Control SFR (SCON2, Address 0xE1)
Bit
Mnemonic Default
Description
7
6
5
N/A
EN-T8
OWE2
N/A
0
0
Reserved
9-bit UART, variable baud rate enable bit. When set, the UART2 is in 9-bit mode.
Overwrite error. This bit is set when new data is received and RI = 1 in the SCON SFR. It indicates
that SBUF2 was not read before the next character was transferred in, causing the prior SBUF2
data to be lost. Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
4
3
FE2
BE2
0
0
Frame error. This bit is set when the received frame does not have a valid stop bit. This bit is read
only and updated every time a frame is received.
Break error. This bit is set whenever the receive data line (RxD2) is low for longer than a full
transmission frame, the time required for a start bit, eight data bits, a parity bit, and half a stop
bit. This bit is updated every time a frame is received.
2
1
0
REN2
TI2
0
0
0
Serial Port 2 receive enable bit. Set by user software to enable serial port reception. Cleared by
user software to disable serial port reception.
Serial Port 2 transmit interrupt flag. Set by hardware at the end of the eighth bit, TI2 must be
cleared by user software.
Serial Port 2 receive interrupt flag. Set by hardware at the end of the eighth bit, RI2 must be
cleared by user software.
RI2
Table 147. Serial Port 2 Buffer SFR (SBUF2, Address 0xEB)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
SBUF2
0
Serial Port 2 data buffer.
Table 148. Enhanced Serial Baud Rate Control 2 SFR (SBAUD2, Address 0xEE)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
TB8
0
0
Serial port transmit (Bit 9). The data loaded into TB8 is the ninth data bit transmitted in 9-bit mode.
6
RB9
Serial port receiver (Bit 9). The ninth data bit received in 9-bit mode is latched into RB8. For 8-bit
mode, the stop bit is latched into RB8.
5
SBF2
Fractional divider Boolean: when set, SBAUDF2 = 0x2B when clear, SBAUDF2 = 0x07.
Extended divider ratio for baud rate setting (see Table 144).
[4:3]
SBTH2
0
Rev. 0 | Page 127 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[2:0]
DIV2
0
Binary divider.
DIV2
000
Result
Divide by 1 (see Table 144)
Divide by 2 (see Table 144)
Divide by 4 (see Table 144)
Divide by 8 (see Table 144)
Divide by 16 (see Table 144)
Divide by 32 (see Table 144)
Divide by 164 (see Table 144)
Divide by 128 (see Table 144)
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Table 149. Common Baud Rates Using the UART2 Timer with a 4.096 MHz PLL Clock
Ideal Baud
115,200
115,200
57,600
57,600
38,400
38,400
38,400
19,200
19,200
19,200
19,200
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
4800
4800
4800
4800
4800
4800
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
300
CD
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SBTH2
DIV2
1
0
2
1
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
7
7
6
5
4
3
2
SBAUDT
0x01
0x00
0x02
0x01
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x04
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x05
0x04
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x06
0x05
0x04
0x03
0x02
0x01
0x00
0x17
0x0F
0x07
0x06
0x05
0x04
0x03
0x02
SBF2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SBAUDF2
0x07
0x07
0x07
0x07
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
0x2B
% Error
+ 0.16
+ 0.16
+ 0.16
+ 0.16
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
−0.31
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Rev. 0 | Page 128 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
9-Bit UART 2 with Variable Baud Rate
UART2 OPERATION MODE
Setting EN-T8 in the serial communications control SFR (SCON2,
Address 0xE1[6]) selects the 9-bit mode. In this mode, the UART2
serial port operates in 9-bit mode with a variable baud rate. The
baud rate is set by a dedicated timer for baud rate generation,
the UART2 timer, which has a fractional divisor to precisely
generate any baud rate (see the UART Timer Generated Baud Rates
section). The operation of the 9-bit UART2 is the same as for
the 9-bit mode of the UART.
The UART2 has two operation modes where each data byte
(LSB first) is preceded by a start bit (0), followed by a stop bit
(1). Therefore, each frame consists of 10 bits transmitted on the
TxD2 pin or received on the RxD2 pin.
The baud rate is set by a dedicated timer for baud rate genera-
tion, the UART2 timer, which has a fractional divisor to precisely
generate any baud rate.
Transmission is initiated by a write to the Serial Port 2 SFR
(SBUF2, Address 0xEB). Next, a stop bit (1) is loaded into the
ninth bit position of the serial port shift register. The data is output
bit by bit until the stop bit appears on the TxD2 pin and the
Serial Port 2 transmit interrupt flag, TI2 (Bit 1 of the SCON2
SFR) is automatically set, as shown in Figure 105.
In both modes, transmission is initiated by any instruction that
uses SBUF2 as a destination register. Reception is initiated in
8-bit mode when RI = 0 and REN = 1 in the SCON SFR. Recep-
tion is initiated in the 9-bit mode by the incoming start bit if
REN = 1.
UART2 BAUD RATE GENERATION
STOP BIT
START
BIT
D0 D1 D2
D3
D4
D5 D6
D7
TxD2
The baud rate is determined by the overflow rate of the dedicated
baud rate generator, the UART2 timer, which has an integer and
fractional divisor.
TI2
(SCON2[1])
SET INTERRUPT
(FOR EXAMPLE,
READY FOR MORE DATA)
UART2 Timer Generated Baud Rates
The enhanced Serial Baud Rate Control 2 SFR (SBAUD2,
Address 0xEE) is used to control the UART2 timer. SBAUD2 is
the baud rate control SFR; it sets up the integer divider (DIV2)
and the extended divider (SBTH2) for the UART2 timer.
Figure 105. 8-Bit Variable Baud Rate
Reception is initiated when a 1-to-0 transition is detected on
the RxD2 pin. Assuming that a valid start bit is detected, char-
acter reception continues. The eight data bits are clocked into
the serial port shift register.
The desired value to write to DIV2 (Bits[2:0]) and to SBTH2
(Bits[4:3]) can be calculated using the following formula, where
All of the following conditions must be met at the time the final
shift pulse is generated to receive a character:
f
core is defined in the POWCON SFR. Note that the DIV2 value
must be rounded down to the nearest integer.
•
•
If the extended UART is disabled (EXTEN = 0 in the CFG
SFR), RI (Bit 0 in the SCON SFR) must be 0 to receive a
character. This ensures that the data in the SBUF SFR is not
overwritten if the last received character has not been read.
If frame error checking is enabled by setting SM2 (Bit 5 in
the SCON SFR), the received stop bit must be set to receive
a character. This ensures that every character received comes
from a valid frame, with both a start bit and a stop bit.
⎛
⎜
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
fcore
log
16× Baud Rate
DIV2 + SBTH2 =
log 2
( )
SBAUDF2 is the fractional divider ratio required to achieve the
required baud rate. The appropriate value for SBAUDF2 can be
calculated with the following formula:
⎛
⎜
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
fcore
SBAUDF2 =
64 ×
−1
16 ×2DIV 2+SBTH 2 × Baud Rate
If any of these conditions is not met, the received frame is
irretrievably lost, and the Serial Port 2 receive interrupt flag,
RI2, is not set.
Note that the SBAUDF2 can only take two values, 0x87 or 0xAB,
by clearing or by setting the SBF2 bit (Bit 5), respectively, in the
SBAUD2 SFR. These values were chosen to provide an accurate
baud rate for 300, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, and
115,200 bps. Once DIV2 and SBAUDF2 are calculated, the actual
baud rate can be calculated, using the following formula:
If the received frame meets the preceding conditions, the fol-
lowing events occur:
•
The eight bits in the receive shift register are latched into
SBUF2.
•
The Serial Port 2 receiver interrupt flag (RI2) is set.
fcore
Actual Baud Rate =
SBAUDF2
⎛
⎞
⎟
⎠
Transmission is initiated by any instruction that uses SBUF2 as
a destination register. Reception is initiated by the incoming start
bit if REN2 = 1 in the SCON2 SFR, Address0xE1[2].
16×2DIV 2+SBTH2 × 1+
⎜
64
⎝
Rev. 0 | Page 129 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
For example, to get a baud rate of 9600 while operating at a core
clock frequency of 4.096 MHz, with the PLL CD bits equal to 0,
that the data in the frame may not have been received properly.
Break error detection indicates whether the RxD2 line is low for
longer than a 9-bit frame. It indicates that the data just received,
a 0 or NULL character, is not valid because the master has discon-
nected. Overwrite error detection indicates whether the received
data isn’t read fast enough and, as result, a byte of data is lost.
DIV2 + SBTH2 = log(4,096,000/(16 × 9600))/log2 =
4.74 = 4
Note that the DIV result is rounded down.
SBAUDF2 = 64 × (4,096,000/(16 × 23 × 9600) − 1) =
42.67 = 0x2B
UART2 TxD2 Signal Modulation
There is an internal 38 kHz signal that can be read with the
UART2 transmit signal for use in remote control applications.
Therefore, the actual baud rate is 9570 bps, which gives an error
of 0.31%.
One of the events that can wake the MCU from sleep mode is
UART2 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SS
activity on the RxD2 (P0.7/ /T1/RxD2) pin. See the 3.3 V
Enhanced Error Checking
Peripherals and Wake-Up Events section for more information.
The extended UART2 provides frame error, break error, and
overwrite error detection. Framing errors occur when a stop bit
is not present at the end of the frame. A missing stop bit implies
Rev. 0 | Page 130 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
(P0.7/ /T1/RxD2) pins, while the firmware interface is via the
SS
The ADE5166/ADE5169 integrate a complete hardware serial
peripheral interface on-chip. The SPI is full duplex so that eight
bits of data are synchronously transmitted and simultaneously
received. This SPI implementation is double buffered, allowing
users to read the last byte of received data while a new byte is
shifted in. The next byte to be transmitted can be loaded while
the current byte is shifted out.
SPI Configuration SFR 1 (SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8), the SPI
Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9), the SPI
interrupt status SFR (SPISTAT, Address 0xEA), the SPI/I2C
transmit buffer SFR (SPI2CTx, Address 0x9A), and the SPI/I2C
receive buffer SFR (SPI2CRx, Address 0x9B).
Note that the SPI pins are shared with the I2C pins. Therefore, the
user can enable only one interface at a time. The SCPS bit in the
configuration SFR (CFG, Address 0xAF) selects which peripheral
is active.
The SPI port can be configured for master or slave operation.
The physical interface to the SPI is via the MISO (P0.5/MISO/ZX),
SS
MOSI (P0.4/MOSI/SDATA), SCLK (P0.6/SCLK/T0), and
SPI REGISTERS
Table 150. SPI SFR List
SFR Address
Mnemonic R/W
Length (Bits)
Default
Description
0x9A
0x9B
0xE8
0xE9
SPI2CTx
SPI2CRx
SPIMOD1
SPIMOD2
SPISTAT
W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
8
8
8
8
8
0
0
0x10
0
0
SPI/I2C transmit buffer (see Table 151).
SPI/I2C receive buffer (see Table 152).
SPI Configuration SFR 1 (see Table 153).
SPI Configuration SFR 2 (see Table 154).
SPI interrupt status (see Table 155).
0xEA
Table 151. SPI/I2C Transmit Buffer SFR (SPI2CTx, Address 0x9A)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
SPI2CTx
0
SPI or I2C transmit buffer. When the SPI2CTx SFR is written, its content is transferred to the transmit
FIFO input. When a write is requested, the FIFO output is sent on the SPI or I2C bus.
Table 152. SPI/I2C Receive Buffer SFR (SPI2CRx, Address 0x9B)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
[7:0]
SPI2CRx
0
SPI or I2C receive buffer. When SPI2CRx SFR is read, one byte from the receive FIFO output is
transferred to the SPI2CRx SFR. A new data byte from the SPI or I2C bus is written to the FIFO input.
Rev. 0 | Page 131 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 153. SPI Configuration SFR 1 (SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8)
Bit
Bit Address
Mnemonic Default
Description
[7:6] 0xEF to 0xEE
Reserved
INTMOD
0
0
Reserved.
5
4
0xED
0xEC
SPI interrupt mode.
INTMOD
Result
0
1
SPI interrupt is set when the SPI Rx buffer is full
SPI interrupt is set when the SPI Tx buffer is empty
AUTO_SS
1
Master mode, SS output control (see Figure 106).
AUTO_SS Result
0
The SS pin is held low while this bit is cleared, allowing manual chip select
control using the SS pin
1
Single byte read or write; the SS pin goes low during a single byte
transmission and then returns high
Continuous transfer; the SS pin goes low during the duration of the
multibyte continuous transfer and then returns high
3
2
0xEB
0xEA
SS_EN
0
0
Slave mode, SS input enable.
When this bit is set to Logic 1, the SS pin is defined as the slave select input pin for the
SPI slave interface.
RxOFW
Receive buffer overflow write enable.
RxOFW
Result
0
If the SPI2CRx SFR has not been read when a new data byte is received,
the new byte is discarded
1
If the SPI2CRx SFR has not been read when a new data byte is received,
the new byte overwrites the old data
[1:0] 0xE9 to 0xE8
SPIR
0
Master mode, SPI SCLK frequency.
SPIR
00
01
10
11
Result
fCORE/8 = 512 kHz (if fCORE = 4.096 MHz)
fCORE/16 = 256 kHz (if fCORE = 4.096 MHz)
fCORE/32 = 128 kHz (if fCORE = 4.096 MHz)
fCORE/64 = 64 kHz (if fCORE = 4.096 MHz)
Rev. 0 | Page 132 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 154. SPI Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9)
Bit Mnemonic Default Description
7
SPICONT
0
Master mode, SPI continuous transfer mode enable bit.
SPICONT Result
0
The SPI interface stops after one byte is transferred and SS is deasserted. A new data transfer can
be initiated after a stalled period.
1
The SPI interface continues to transfer data until no valid data is available in the SPI2CTx SFR. SS
remains asserted until the SPI2CTx SFR and the transmit shift registers are empty.
6
5
SPIEN
0
0
SPI interface enable bit.
SPIEN
Result
0
1
The SPI interface is disabled.
The SPI interface is enabled.
SPIODO
SPI open-drain output configuration bit.
SPIODO
Result
0
1
Internal pull-up resistors are connected to the SPI outputs.
The SPI outputs are open drain and need external pull-up resistors. The pull-up voltage should
not exceed the specified operating voltage.
4
3
SPIMS_b
SPICPOL
0
0
SPI master mode enable bit.
SPIMS_b Result
0
1
The SPI interface is defined as a slave.
The SPI interface is defined as a master.
SPI clock polarity configuration bit (see Figure 108).
SPICPOL Result
0
The default state of SCLK is low, and the first SCLK edge is rising. Depending on the SPICPHA bit,
the SPI data output changes state on the falling or rising edge of SCLK while the SPI data input is
sampled on the rising or falling edge of SCLK.
1
The default state of SCLK is high, and the first SCLK edge is falling. Depending on the SPICPHA
bit, the SPI data output changes state on the rising or falling edge of SCLK while the SPI data
input is sampled on the falling or rising edge of SCLK.
2
SPICPHA
0
SPI clock phase configuration bit (see Figure 108).
SPICPHA Result
0
The SPI data output changes state when SS goes low at the second edge of SCLK and then every
two subsequent edges, whereas the SPI data input is sampled at the first SCLK edge and then
every two subsequent edges.
1
The SPI data output changes state at the first edge of SCLK and then every two subsequent
edges, whereas the SPI data input is sampled at the second SCLK edge and then every two
subsequent edges.
1
0
SPILSBF
TIMODE
0
1
Master mode, LSB first configuration bit.
SPILSBF
Result
0
1
The MSB of the SPI outputs is transmitted first.
The LSB of the SPI outputs is transmitted first.
Transfer and interrupt mode of the SPI interface.
TIMODE Result
1
This bit must be set to 1 for proper operation.
Rev. 0 | Page 133 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 155. SPI Interrupt Status SFR (SPISTAT, Address 0xEA)
Bit
Mnemonic Default Description
7
BUSY
0
SPI peripheral busy flag.
BUSY
Result
0
1
The SPI peripheral is idle.
The SPI peripheral is busy transferring data in slave or master mode.
6
5
4
MMERR
0
SPI multimaster error flag.
MMERR
Result
0
1
A multiple master error has not occurred.
If the SS_EN bit (SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8) is set, enabling the slave select input and
asserting the SS pin while the SPI peripheral is transferring data as a master, this flag is
raised to indicate the error. Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
SPIRxOF
SPIRxIRQ
0
0
SPI receive overflow error flag. Reading the SPI2CRx SFR clears this bit.
SPIRxOF
TIMODE Result
0
1
X
1
The SPI2CRx SFR (Address 0x9B) contains valid data.
This bit is set if the SPI2CRx SFR is not read before the end of the next byte
transfer. If the RxOFW bit (SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8) is set and this condition
occurs, SPI2CRx is overwritten.
SPI receive mode interrupt flag. Reading the SPI2CRx SFR clears this bit.
SPIRxIRQ TIMODE Result
0
1
X
0
The SPI2CRx register does not contain new data.
This bit is set when the SPI2CRx register contains new data. If the SPI/I2C interrupt is
enabled, an interrupt is generated when this bit is set. If the SPI2CRx register is
not read before the end of the current byte transfer, the transfer stops and the
SS pin is deasserted.
1
1
The SPI2CRx register contains new data.
3
2
SPIRxBF
SPITxUF
0
0
Status bit for SPI Rx buffer. When set, the Rx FIFO is full. A read of the SPI2CRx clears this flag.
Status bit for SPI Tx buffer. When set, the Tx FIFO is underflowing and data can be written into SPI2CTx
(Address 0x9A). Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
1
SPITxIRQ
0
SPI transmit mode interrupt flag. Writing new data to the SPI2CTx SFR clears this bit.
SPITxIRQ TIMODE Result
0
1
1
X
0
1
The SPI2CTx SFR is full.
The SPI2CTx SFR is empty.
This bit is set when the SPI2CTx SFR is empty. If the SPI/I2C interrupt is enabled,
an interrupt is generated when this bit is set. If new data is not written into the
SPI2CTx SFR before the end of the current byte transfer, the transfer stops, and
the SS pin is deasserted. Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
0
SPITxBF
0
Status bit for the SPI Tx buffer. When set, the SPI Tx buffer is full. Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
SCLK (Serial Clock I/O Pin)
The master serial clock (SCLK) is used to synchronize the data
being transmitted and received through the MOSI and MISO
data lines. The SCLK (P0.6/SCLK/T0) pin is configured as an
output in master mode and as an input in slave mode.
SPI PINS
MISO (Master In, Slave Out Data I/O Pin)
The MISO (P0.5/MISO/ZX) pin is configured as an input line
in master mode and as an output line in slave mode. The MISO
line on the master (data in) should be connected to the MISO
line in the slave device (data out). The data is transferred as
byte-wide (8-bit) serial data, MSB first.
In master mode, the bit rate, polarity, and phase of the clock are
controlled by SPI Configuration SFR 1 (SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8)
and SPI Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9).
MOSI (Master Out, Slave In Pin)
The MOSI (P0.4/MOSI/SDATA) pin is configured as an output
line in master mode and as an input line in slave mode. The MOSI
line on the master (data out) should be connected to the MOSI
line in the slave device (data in). The data is transferred as byte-
wide (8-bit) serial data, MSB first.
In slave mode, the SPI Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2,
Address 0xE9) must be configured with the phase and polarity
of the expected input clock.
In both master and slave modes, the data is transmitted on one
edge of the SCLK signal and sampled on the other. It is important,
therefore, that the SPICPHA and SPICPOL bits be configured
the same for the master and slave devices.
Rev. 0 | Page 134 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Continuous Mode, SPICONT (SPIMOD2[7]) = 1
1. Write to the SPI2CTx SFR.
2. is asserted low, and a write routine is initiated.
3. Wait for the SPITxIRQ interrupt flag to write to SPI2CTx SFR.
4. Transfer continues until the SPI2CTx register and transmit
shift registers are empty.
(Slave Select Pin)
SS
In SPI slave mode, a transfer is initiated by the assertion of
low. The SPI port then transmits and receives 8-bit data until
SS
SS
SS
the data is concluded by the deassertion of according to the
SS
SPICON bit setting. In slave mode, is always an input.
SS
SS
In SPI master mode, the (P0.7/ /T1/RxD2) pin can be used
to control data transfer to a slave device. In the automatic slave
select control mode, the is asserted low to select the slave
device and then raised to deselect the slave device after the
transfer is complete. Automatic slave select control is enabled by
setting the AUTO_SS bit (Bit 4) in the SPI Configuration SFR 1
(SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8).
5. The SPITxIRQ interrupt flag is set when the SPI2CTx
register is empty.
SS
6.
is deasserted high.
SS
7. Write to SPI2CTx SFR to clear the SPITxIRQ interrupt flag.
Figure 106 shows the SPI output for certain automatic chip select
and continuous mode selections. Note that if the continuous mode
is not used, a short delay is inserted between transfers.
SS
In a multimaster system, the can be configured as an input so
that the SPI peripheral can operate as a slave in some situations
and as a master in others. In this case, the slave selects for the
slaves controlled by this SPI peripheral should be generated
with general I/O pins.
SS
SCLK
AUTO_SS = 1
SPICONT = 1
SPI MASTER OPERATING MODES
DIN
DIN1
DIN2
The double-buffered receive and transmit registers can be used to
maximize the throughput of the SPI peripheral by continuously
streaming out data in master mode. The continuous transmit mode
is designed to use the full capacity of the SPI. In this mode, the
master transmits and receives data until the SPI/I2C transmit
buffer SFR (SPI2CTx, Address 0x9A) is empty at the start of a byte
transfer. Continuous mode is enabled by setting the SPICONT bit
(Bit 7) in the SPI Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9).
The SPI peripheral also offers a single byte read/write function.
DOUT
DOUT1
DOUT2
SS
SCLK
AUTO_SS = 1
SPICONT = 0
DIN
DIN1
DIN2
In master mode, the type of transfer is handled automatically,
depending on the configuration of the SPICONT bit in the SPI
Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9). The following
procedures show the sequence of events that should be performed
DOUT
DOUT1
DOUT2
SS
for each master operating mode. Based on the configuration,
some of these events take place automatically.
SS
SCLK
Procedures for Using SPI as a Master
Single Byte Write Mode, SPICONT (SPIMOD2[7]) = 0
AUTO_SS = 0
SPICONT = 0
(MANUAL SS CONTROL)
1. Write to the SPI2CTx SFR.
DIN
DIN1
DIN2
2.
is asserted low, and a write routine is initiated.
SS
3. The SPITxIRQ interrupt flag is set when the SPI2CTx
register is empty.
DOUT
DOUT1
DOUT2
4.
is deasserted high.
SS
Figure 106. Automatic Chip Select and Continuous Mode Output
5. Write to SPI2CTx SFR to clear the SPITxIRQ interrupt flag.
Note that reading the content of the SPI/I2C receive buffer SFR
(SPI2CRx, Address 0x9B) should be done using a 2-cycle
instruction set, such as MOV A or SPI2CRX. Using a 3-cycle
instruction, such as MOV 0x3D or SPI2CRX, does not transfer
the right information into the target register.
Rev. 0 | Page 135 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Address 0x9B) is not read before new data is ready to be loaded
into the SPI/I2C receive buffer SFR (SPI2CRx, Address0x9B),
an overflow condition has occurred. This overflow condition,
indicated by the SPIRxOF flag, forces the new data to be discarded
or overwritten if the RxOFW bit (SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8) is set.
SPI INTERRUPT AND STATUS FLAGS
The SPI interface has several status flags that indicate the status
of the double-buffered receive and transmit registers. Figure 107
shows when the status and interrupt flags are raised. The transmit
interrupt occurs when the transmit shift register is loaded with the
data in the SPI/I2C transmit buffer SFR (SPI2CTx, Address 0x9A)
register. If the SPI master is in transmit operating mode, and the
SPI/I2C transmit buffer SFR (SPI2CTx, Address 0x9A) register
has not been written with new data by the beginning of the next
byte transfer, the transmit operation stops.
SPITx
SPIRx
SPITxIRQ = 1
SPIRxIRQ = 1
TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER
RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER
SPITx (EMPTY)
SPIRx (FULL)
STOPS TRANSFER IF TIMODE = 1
SPIRxOF = 1
TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER
When a new byte of data is received in the SPI/I2C receive buffer
SFR (SPI2CRx, Address 0x9B), the SPI receive interrupt flag is
raised. If the data in the SPI/I2C receive buffer SFR (SPI2CRx,
Figure 107. SPI Receive and Transmit Interrupt and Status Flags
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 1)
SCLK
(SPICPOL = 0)
SS
MISO
MOSI
?
?
MSB BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 LSB
MSB BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 LSB
SPICPHA = 1
SPIRx AND
SPITx FLAGS
WITH INTMOD = 1
SPIRx AND
SPITx FLAGS
WITH INTMOD = 0
MSB BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 LSB
MSB BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 LSB
?
?
MISO
MOSI
SPICPHA = 0
SPIRx AND
SPITx FLAGS
WITH INTMOD = 1
SPIRx AND
SPITx FLAGS
WITH INTMOD = 0
Figure 108. SPI Timing Configurations
Rev. 0 | Page 136 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
I2C-COMPATIBLE INTERFACE
The ADE5166/ADE5169 support a fully licensed I2C interface.
The I2C interface is implemented as a full hardware master.
The bit rate is defined in the I2CMOD SFR as follows:
fCORE
fSCLK
=
16×2I2CR[1:0]
SDATA (P0.4/MOSI/SDATA) is the data I/O pin, and SCLK
(P0.6/SCLK/T0) is the serial clock. These two pins are shared with
the MOSI and SCLK pins of the on-chip SPI interface. Therefore,
the user can enable only one interface or the other on these pins at
any given time. The SCPS bit (Bit 5) in the configuration SFR
(CFG, Address 0xAF) selects which peripheral is active.
SLAVE ADDRESSES
The I2C slave address SFR (I2CADR, Address 0xE9) contains
the slave device ID. The LSB of this register contains a read/write
request. A write to this SFR starts the I2C communication.
I2C REGISTERS
The I2C peripheral interface consists of five SFRs.
The two pins used for data transfer, SDATA and SCLK, are
configured in a wire-AND format that allows arbitration in a
multimaster system.
The transfer sequence of an I2C system consists of a master device
initiating a transfer by generating a start condition while the bus
is idle. The master transmits the address of the slave device and
the direction of the data transfer in the initial address transfer. If
the slave acknowledges, the data transfer is initiated. This continues
until the master issues a stop condition and the bus becomes idle.
•
•
•
•
•
I2CMOD
SPI2CSTAT
I2CADR
SPI2CTx
SPI2CRx
Because the SPI and I2C serial interfaces share the same pins,
they also share the same SFRs, such as the SPI2CTx and SPI2CRx
SFRs. In addition, the I2CMOD, I2CADR, and SPI2CSTAT SFRs
are shared with the SPIMOD1, SPIMOD2, and SPISTAT SFRs,
respectively.
SERIAL CLOCK GENERATION
The I2C master in the system generates the serial clock for a
transfer. The master channel can be configured to operate in
fast mode (256 kHz) or standard mode (32 kHz).
Table 156. I2C SFR List
SFR Address
Mnemonic R/W
Length
Default
Description
0x9A
0x9B
0xE8
0xE9
SPI2CTx
SPI2CRx
I2CMOD
I2CADR
W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
8
8
8
8
8
SPI/I2C transmit buffer (see Table 151).
SPI/I2C receive buffer (see Table 152).
I2C mode (see Table 157).
0
0
0
0
I2C slave address (see Table 158).
I2C interrupt status register (see Table 159).
0xEA
SPI2CSTAT
Table 157. I2C Mode SFR (I2CMOD, Address 0xE8)
Bit
Bit Address Mnemonic Default
Description
7
0xEF
I2CEN
0
I2C enable bit. When this bit is set to Logic 1, the I2C interface is enabled. A write to the
I2CADR SFR (Address 0xE9) starts a communication.
[6:5] 0xEE to 0xED I2CR
0
I2C SCLK frequency.
I2CR
00
01
10
11
Result
fCORE/16 = 256 kHz if fCORE = 4.096 MHz
fCORE/32 = 128 kHz if fCORE = 4.096 MHz
fCORE/64 = 64 kHz if fCORE = 4.096 MHz
fCORE/128= 32 kHz if fCORE = 4.096 MHz
[4:0] 0xEC to 0xE8 I2CRCT
0
Configures the length of the I2C received FIFO buffer. The I2C peripheral stops when
I2CRCT[4:0] + 1 byte have been read, or if an error occurs.
Table 158. I2C Slave Address SFR (I2CADR, Address 0xE9)
Bit
[7:1] I2CSLVADR
I2CR_W
Mnemonic
Default
Description
0
0
Address of the I2C slave being addressed. Writing to this register starts the I2C transmission (read or write).
0
Command bit for read or write. When this bit is set to Logic 1, a read command is transmitted on the
I2C bus. Data from the slave in the SPI2CRx SFR (Address 0x9B) is expected after a command byte.
When this bit is set to Logic 0, a write command is transmitted on the I2C bus. Data to slave is expected
in the SPI2CTx SFR.
Rev. 0 | Page 137 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 159. I2C Interrupt Status Register SFR (SPI2CSTAT, Address 0xEA)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default Description
7
I2CBUSY
0
0
This bit is set to Logic 1 when the I2C interface is used. When set, the Tx FIFO is emptied.
6
I2CNOACK
I2C no acknowledgement transmit interrupt. This bit is set to Logic 1 when the slave device
does not send an acknowledgement. The I2C communication is stopped after this event.
Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
5
I2CRxIRQ
0
0
0
I2C receive interrupt. This bit is set to Logic 1 when the receive FIFO is not empty.
Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
I2C transmit interrupt. This bit is set to Logic 1 when the transmit FIFO is empty.
Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
4
I2CTxIRQ
[3:2]
I2CFIFOSTAT
Status bits for 3- or 4-byte deep I2C FIFO. The FIFO monitored in these two bits is the one currently
used in I2C communication (receive or transmit) because only one FIFO is active at a time.
I2CFIFOSTAT
Result
00
01
10
11
FIFO empty
Reserved
FIFO half full
FIFO full
1
0
I2CACC_ERR
0
0
Set when trying to write and read at the same time. Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
Set when a write was attempted when the I2C transmit FIFO was full. Write a 0 to this bit to clear it.
I2CTxWR_ERR
READ AND WRITE OPERATIONS
1
9
1
9
1
9
SCLK
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SDATA
START BY
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
ACK BY
SLAVE
ACK BY
MASTER
NACK BY
MASTER
STOP BY
MASTER
MASTER
FRAME 1
FRAME 2
DATA BYTE 1 FROM MASTER
FRAME N + 1
SERIAL BUS ADDRESS BYTE
DATA BYTE N FROM SLAVE
Figure 109. I2C Read Operation
1
9
1
9
SCLK
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SDATA
START BY
ACK BY
SLAVE
ACK BY
SLAVE
STOP BY
MASTER
MASTER
FRAME 1
FRAME 2
DATA BYTE 1 FROM MASTER
SERIAL BUS ADDRESS BYTE
Figure 110. I2C Write Operation
Figure 109 and Figure 110 depict I2C read and write operations,
respectively. Note that the LSB of the I2CADR SFR (Address 0xE9)
is used to select whether a read or write operation is performed
on the slave device. During the read operation, the master acknowl-
edges are generated automatically by the I2C peripheral. The
master generated no acknowledge (NACK) before the end of a
read operation is also automatically generated after the I2CRCT
bits in the I2CMOD SFR (Address 0xE8[4:0]) have been read from
the slave. If the I2CADR register is updated during a
Reading the SPI/I2C Receive Buffer SFR (SPI2CRx,
Address 0x9B)
Reading the SPI2CRx SFR should be done with a 2-cycle
instruction, such as
Mov a, spi2crx or Mov R0, spi2crx.
A 3-cycle instruction, such as
Mov 3dh, spi2crx
does not transfer the right data into RAM Address 0x3D.
transmission, instead of generating a stop at the end of the read
or write operation, the master generates a start condition and
continues with the next communication.
Rev. 0 | Page 138 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
be generated after each byte is received or when the Rx FIFO
is full. If the peripheral is reading from a slave address, the com-
munication stops when the number of received bytes equals the
number set in I2CRCT in the I2CMOD SFR (Address 0xE8[4:0]).
An error, such as not receiving an acknowledge, also causes the
communication to terminate.
I2C RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT FIFOS
The I2C peripheral has a 4-byte receive FIFO and a 4-byte
transmit FIFO. The buffers reduce the overhead associated with
using the I2C peripheral. Figure 111 shows the operation of the
I2C receive and transmit FIFOs.
The Tx FIFO can be loaded with four bytes to be transmitted to
the slave at the beginning of a write operation. When the transmit
FIFO is empty, the I2C transmit interrupt flag is set, and the PC
vectors to the I2C interrupt vector if this interrupt is enabled. If
a new byte is not loaded into the Tx FIFO before it is needed in
the transmit shift register, the communication stops. An error,
such as not receiving an acknowledge, also causes the communica-
tion to terminate. In case of an error during a write operation,
the Tx FIFO is flushed.
CODE TO FILL Tx FIFO:
CODE TO READ Rx FIFO:
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
MOV I CTx, TxDATA1
MOV A, I CRx; RESULT: A = RxDATA1
MOV I CTx, TxDATA2
MOV A, I CRx; RESULT: A = RxDATA2
MOV I CTx, TxDATA3
MOV A, I CRx; RESULT: A = RxDATA3
MOV I CTx, TxDATA4
MOV A, I CRx; RESULT: A = RxDATA4
2
2
I CRx
I CTx
TxDATA4
TxDATA3
RxDATA1
RxDATA2
4-BYTE FIFO
4-BYTE FIFO
TxDATA2
TxDATA1
RxDATA3
RxDATA4
The Rx FIFO allows four bytes to be read in from the slave
before the MCU has to read the data. A receive interrupt can
TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER
RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER
Figure 111. I2C FIFO Operation
Rev. 0 | Page 139 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
I/O PORTS
PARALLEL I/O
Weak Internal Pull-Ups Enabled
A pin with weak internal pull-up enabled is used as an input by
writing a 1 to the pin. The pin is pulled high by the internal pull-
ups, and the pin is read using the circuitry shown in Figure 112.
If the pin is driven low externally, it sources current because of
the internal pull-ups.
The ADE5166/ADE5169 use three input/output ports to
exchange data with external devices. In addition to performing
general-purpose I/O, some are capable of driving an LCD or
performing alternate functions for the peripherals available on-
chip. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, the pins associated
with it cannot be used as a general-purpose I/O. The I/O port
can be configured through the SFRs listed in Table 160.
A pin with internal pull-up enabled is used as an output by writing
a 1 or a 0 to the pin to control the level of the output. If a 0 is
written to the pin, it drives a logic low output voltage (VOL) and
is capable of sinking 1.6 mA.
Table 160. I/O Port SFRs
SFR
Address Bit Addressable
Description
Open Drain (Weak Internal Pull-Ups Disabled)
P0
P1
P2
EPCFG
0x80
0x90
0xA0
0x9F
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Port 0 register
Port 1 register
Port 2 Register
Extended port
configuration
When the weak internal pull-up on a pin is disabled, the pin
becomes open drain. Use this open-drain pin as a high impedance
input by writing a 1 to the pin. The pin is read using the circuitry
shown in Figure 112. The open-drain option is preferable for
inputs because it draws less current than the internal pull-ups
that were enabled.
PINMAP0
PINMAP1
PINMAP2
0xB2
0xB3
0xB4
No
No
No
Port 0 weak
pull-up enable
Port 1 weak
pull-up enable
38 kHz Modulation
Every ADE5166/ADE5169 provides a 38 kHz modulation signal.
The 38 kHz modulation is accomplished by internally XOR’ing
the level written to the I/O pin with a 38 kHz square wave. Then,
when a 0 is written to the I/O pin, it is modulated as shown in
Figure 113.
Port 2 weak
pull-up enable
The three bidirectional I/O ports have internal pull-ups that can
be enabled or disabled individually for each pin. The internal
pull-ups are enabled by default. Disabling an internal pull-up
causes a pin to become open drain. Weak internal pull-ups are
configured through the PINMAPx SFRs.
LEVEL WRITTEN
TO MOD38
38kHz MODULATION
SIGNAL
Figure 112 shows a typical bit latch and I/O buffer for an I/O pin.
The bit latch (one bit in the SFR of each port) is represented as a
Type D flip-flop, which clocks in a value from the internal bus
in response to a write-to-latch signal from the CPU. The Q out-
put of the flip-flop is placed on the internal bus in response to a
read latch signal from the CPU. The level of the port pin itself is
placed on the internal bus in response to a read pin signal from
the CPU. Some instructions that read a port activate the read
latch signal, and others activate the read pin signal. See the
Read-Modify-Write Instructions section for details.
38kHz MODULATED
OUTPUT PIN
Figure 113. 38 kHz Modulation
Uses for this 38 kHz modulation include IR modulation of
a UART transmit signal or a low power signal to drive an LED.
The modulation can be enabled or disabled with the MOD38EN
bit (Bit 4) in the CFG SFR (Address 0xAF). The 38 kHz modu-
lation is available on eight pins, selected by the MOD38[7:0] bits in
the extended port configuration SFR (EPCFG, Address 0x9F).
DV
DD
INTERNAL
PULL-UP
ALTERNATE
OUTPUT
FUNCTION
READ
LATCH
CLOSED: PINMAPx.x = 0
OPEN: PINMAPx.x = 1
Px.x
PIN
INTERNAL
BUS
D
Q
Q
WRITE
TO LATCH
CL
LATCH
READ
PIN
ALTERNATE
INPUT
FUNCTION
Figure 112. Port 0 Bit Latch and I/O Buffer
Rev. 0 | Page 140 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
I/O REGISTERS
Table 161. Extended Port Configuration SFR (EPCFG, Address 0x9F)
Bit
Mnemonic
Default
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
MOD38_FP21
MOD38_FP22
MOD38_FP23
MOD38_TxD
MOD38_CF1
MOD38_SSb
MOD38_MISO
MOD38_CF2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P1.6/FP21 pin.
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P1.5/FP22 pin.
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P1.4/T2/FP23 pin.
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P1.1/TxD pin.
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P0.2/CF1/RTCCAL pin.
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P0.7/SS/T1/RxD2 pin.
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P0.5/MISO/ZX pin.
This bit enables 38 kHz modulation on the P0.3/CF2 pin.
1
0
Table 162. Port 0 Weak Pull-Up Enable SFR (PINMAP0, Address 0xB2)
Bit
Mnemonic
PINMAP0.7
PINMAP0.6
PINMAP0.5
PINMAP0.4
PINMAP0.3
PINMAP0.2
PINMAP0.1
PINMAP0.0
Default
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The weak pull-up on P0.7 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P0.6 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P0.5 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P0.4 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P0.3 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P0.2 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P0.1 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P0.0 is disabled when this bit is set.
Table 163. Port 1 Weak Pull-Up Enable SFR (PINMAP1, Address 0xB3)
Bit
Mnemonic
PINMAP1.7
PINMAP1.6
PINMAP1.5
PINMAP1.4
PINMAP1.3
PINMAP1.2
PINMAP1.1
PINMAP1.0
Default
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The weak pull-up on P1.7 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P1.6 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P1.5 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P1.4 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P1.3 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P1.2 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P1.1 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P1.0 is disabled when this bit is set.
Table 164. Port 2 Weak Pull-Up Enable SFR (PINMAP2, Address 0xB4)
Bit
[7:6]
5
Mnemonic
Default
Description
Reserved
PINMAP2.5
Reserved
PINMAP2.3
PINMAP2.2
PINMAP2.1
PINMAP2.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved. Should be left cleared.
The weak pull-up on RESET is disabled when this bit is set.
Reserved. Should be left cleared.
4
3
2
1
Reserved. Should be left cleared.
The weak pull-up on P2.2 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P2.1 is disabled when this bit is set.
The weak pull-up on P2.0 is disabled when this bit is set.
0
Rev. 0 | Page 141 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 165. Port 0 SFR (P0, Address 0x80)
Bit
Bit Address
Mnemonic
Default
Description1
7
0x87
T1
T0
ZX
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
This bit reflects the state of the P0.7/SS/T1/RxD2 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P0.6/SCLK/T0 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P0.5/MISO/ZX pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P0.4/MOSI/SDATA pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P0.3/CF2 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P0.2/CF1/RTCCAL pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P0.1/FP19/RTCCAL pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the BCTRL/INT1/P0.0 pin. It can be written to or read.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x86
0x85
0x84
0x83
0x82
0x81
0x80
CF2
CF1
INT1
1 When an alternate function is chosen for a pin of this port, the bit controlling this pin should always be set.
Table 166. Port 1 SFR (P1, Address 0x90)
Bit
Bit Address
Mnemonic
Default
Description1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x97
0x96
0x95
0x94
0x93
0x92
0x91
0x90
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
This bit reflects the state of the P1.7/FP20 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P1.6/FP21 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P1.5/FP22 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P1.4/T2/FP23 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P1.3/T2EX/FP24 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P1.2/FP25/ZX pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P1.1/TxD pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P1.0/RxD pin. It can be written to or read.
T2
T2EX
ZX1
TxD
RxD
1 When an alternate function is chosen for a pin of this port, the bit controlling this pin should always be set.
Table 167. Port 2 SFR (P2, Address 0xA0)
Bit
[7:4]
3
Bit Address
0x97 to 0x94
0x93
Mnemonic
Default
Description1
0x1F
These bits are unused and should remain set.
P2.3
P2.2
P2.1
P2.0
1
1
1
1
This bit reflects the state of the SDEN/P2.3/TxD2 pin. It can be written only.
This bit reflects the state of the P2.2/FP16 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P2.1/FP17 pin. It can be written to or read.
This bit reflects the state of the P2.0/FP18 pin. It can be written to or read.
2
0x92
1
0x91
0
0x90
1 When an alternate function is chosen for a pin of this port, the bit controlling this pin should always be set.
Rev. 0 | Page 142 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Table 168. Port 0 Alternate Functions
Pin
No.
Alternate Function
Alternate Function Enable
P0.0
BCTRL external battery control input
INT1 external interrupt
Set INT1PRG = X01 in the interrupt pins configuration SFR (INTPR, Address 0xFF[3:1]).
Set EX1 in the interrupt enable SFR (IE, Address 0xA8).
INT1 wake-up from PSM2 operating mode
FP19 LCD segment pin
Set INT1PRG = 11x in the interrupt pins configuration SFR (INTPR, Address 0xFF[3:1]).
Set FP19EN in the LCD Segment Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED).
P0.1
P0.2
CF1 ADE calibration frequency output
Clear the DISCF1 bit in the ADE energy measurement internal MODE1 register
(Address 0x0B).
P0.3
P0.4
CF2 ADE calibration frequency output
MOSI SPI data line
Clear the DISCF2 bit in the ADE energy measurement internal MODE1 register
(Address 0x0B).
Set the SCPS bit in the configuration SFR (CFG, Address 0xAF), and set the SPIEN bit
in SPI Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9).
SDATA I2C data line
Clear the SCPS bit in the configuration SFR (CFG, Address 0xAF), and set the I2CEN
bit in the I2C mode SFR (I2CMOD, Address 0xE8).
P0.5
P0.6
MISO SPI data line
Set the SCPS bit in the configuration SFR (CFG, Address 0xAF), and set the SPIEN bit
in SPI Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9).
Set the ZX2 bit in the MODE3 energy measurement SFR (MODE3, Address 0x2B)
Zero Crossing Detection 2
SCLK serial clock for I2C or SPI
Set the I2CEN bit in the I2C mode SFR (I2CMOD, Address 0xE8) or the SPIEN bit in SPI
Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9) to enable the I2C or SPI interface.
T0 Timer 0 input
Set the C/T0 bit in the Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 mode SFR (TMOD,
Address 0x89) to enable T0 as an external event counter.
P0.7
SS SPI slave select input for SPI in slave mode
Set the SS_EN bit in SPI Configuration SFR 1 (SPIMOD1, Address 0xE8).
SS SPI slave select output for SPI in master mode Set the SPIMS_b bit in SPI Configuration SFR 2 (SPIMOD2, Address 0xE9).
T1 Timer 1 input
Set the C/T1 bit in the Timer/Counter 0 and Timer/Counter 1 mode SFR (TMOD,
Address 0x89) to enable T1 as an external event counter.
RxD2 receiver data input for UART2
RxD2 edge wake-up from PSM2 operating
mode
Set the REN2 bit in the serial communications control SFR (SCON2, Address 0xE1).
Set RXPROG[1:0] = 11 in the peripheral configuration SFR (PERIPH, Address 0xF4).
Table 169. Port 1 Alternate Functions
Pin
No.
Alternate Function
Alternate Function Enable
P1.0
RxD receiver data input for UART
Set the REN bit in the serial communications control register SFR (SCON, Address
0x98).
P1.1
P1.2
TxD transmitter data output for UART
FP25 LCD segment pin
Zero-Crossing Detection 1
FP24 LCD segment pin
T2EX Timer 2 control input
FP23 LCD segment pin
T2 Timer 2 input
This pin becomes TxD as soon as data is written into SBUF.
Set FP25EN in the LCD segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97).
Set the ZX1 bit in the MODE3 energy measurement SFR (MODE3, Address 0x2B)
Set FP24EN in the LCD segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97).
Set EXEN2 in the Timer/Counter 2 control SFR (T2CON, Address 0xC8).
P1.3
P1.4
Set FP23EN in the LCD segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97).
Set the C/T2 bit in the Timer/Counter 2 control SFR (T2CON, Address 0xC8) to
enable T2 as an external event counter.
P1.5
P1.6
P1.7
FP22 LCD segment pin
FP21 LCD segment pin
FP20 LCD segment pin
Set FP22EN in the LCD segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97).
Set FP21EN in the LCD segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97).
Set FP20EN in the LCD segment enable SFR (LCDSEGE, Address 0x97).
Table 170. Port 2 Alternate Functions
Pin
No.
Alternate Function
FP18 LCD segment pin
FP17 LCD segment pin
FP16 LCD segment pin
SDEN serial download pin sampled on reset;
P2.3 is an output only; TxD2 is the transmitter
data output for UART2
Alternate Function Enable
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2
P2.3
Set FP18EN in the LCD Segment Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED).
Set FP17EN in the LCD Segment Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED).
Set FP16EN in the LCD Segment Enable 2 SFR (LCDSEGE2, Address 0xED).
Enabled by default. This pin becomes TxD2 as soon as data is written into SBUF2.
Rev. 0 | Page 143 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
Port 1 pins also have various secondary functions, as described
in Table 169. The alternate functions of Port 1 pins can be activated
only if the corresponding bit latch in the Port 1 SFR contains a 1.
Otherwise, the port pin remains at 0.
PORT 0
Port 0 is controlled directly through the bit-addressable Port 0
SFR (P0, Address 0x80). The weak internal pull-ups for Port 0
are configured through the Port 0 weak pull-up enable SFR
(PINMAP0, Address 0xB2); they are enabled by default. The
weak internal pull-up is disabled by writing a 1 to PINMAP0.x.
PORT 2
Port 2 is a 4-bit bidirectional port controlled directly through
the bit-addressable Port 2 SFR (P2, Address 0xA0). Note that
P2.3 can be used as an output only. Consequently, any read
operation, such as a CPL P2.3, cannot be executed on this I/O.
The weak internal pull-ups for Port 2 are configured through
the Port 2 weak pull-up enable SFR (PINMAP2, Address 0xB4);
they are enabled by default. The weak internal pull-up is
disabled by writing a 1 to PINMAP2.x.
Port 0 pins also have various secondary functions, as described
in Table 168. The alternate functions of Port 0 pins can be activated
only if the corresponding bit latch in the Port 0 SFR contains a 1.
Otherwise, the port pin remains at 0.
PORT 1
Port 1 is an 8-bit bidirectional port controlled directly through
the bit-addressable Port 1 SFR (P1, Address 0x90). The weak
internal pull-ups for Port 1 are configured through the Port 1
weak pull-up enable SFR (PINMAP1, Address 0xB3); they are
enabled by default. The weak internal pull-up is disabled by
writing a 1 to PINMAP1.x.
Port 2 pins also have various secondary functions as described
in Table 170. The alternate functions of Port 2 pins can be
activated only if the corresponding bit latch in the Port 2 SFR
contains a 1. Otherwise, the port pin remains at 0.
Rev. 0 | Page 144 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
DETERMINING THE VERSION OF THE ADE5166/ADE5169
Each ADE5166/ADE5169 holds in its internal flash registers a
value that defines its version. This value helps to determine if users
have the latest version of the part.
This value can be accessed as follows:
1. Launch HyperTerminal with a 9600 baud rate.
2. Put the part in serial download mode by first holding
SDEN
to logic low, then resetting the part.
SDEN
3. Hold the
pin.
RESET
4. Press and release the
pin.
A string should appear on the HyperTerminal containing the
part name and version number.
Rev. 0 | Page 145 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
OUTLINE DIMENSIONS
12.20
12.00 SQ
11.80
0.75
0.60
0.45
1.60
MAX
64
49
1
48
PIN 1
10.20
10.00 SQ
9.80
TOP VIEW
(PINS DOWN)
1.45
1.40
1.35
0.20
0.09
7°
3.5°
0°
0.08
COPLANARITY
16
33
0.15
0.05
SEATING
17
32
PLANE
VIEW A
0.27
0.22
0.17
0.50
BSC
LEAD PITCH
VIEW A
ROTATED 90° CCW
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MS-026-BCD
Figure 114. 64-Lead Low Profile Quad Flat Package [LQFP]
(ST-64-2)
Dimensions shown in millimeters
ORDERING GUIDE
di/dt
Sensor
Antitamper Interface VAR (kB)
Flash Temperature
Package
Option
ST-64-2
ST-64-2
ST-64-2
ST-64-2
Model1
Range
Package Description
64-Lead LQFP
64-Lead LQFP, 13”Tape & Reel
64-Lead LQFP
64-Lead LQFP,13”Tape & Reel
ADE Programmer
ADE5166ASTZF622
ADE5166ASTZF62-RL2
ADE5169ASTZF622
ADE5169ASTZF62-RL2
ADE8052Z-PRG1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
62
62
62
62
−40°C to +85°C
−40°C to +85°C
−40°C to +85°C
−40°C to +85°C
ADE8052Z- DWDL1
ADE8052Z-EMUL1
EVAL- ADE5169F62EBZ2
ADE Downloader
ADE Emulator
Evaluation Board
1 All models have W + VA + rms, 5 V LCD, and RTC.
2 Z = RoHS Compliant Part.
Rev. 0 | Page 146 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
NOTES
Rev. 0 | Page 147 of 148
ADE5166/ADE5169
NOTES
Purchase of licensed I2C components of Analog Devices or one of its sublicensed Associated Companies conveys a license for the purchaser under the Philips I2C Patent
Rights to use these components in an I2C system, provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips.
©2008 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
D07411-0-10/08(0)
Rev. 0 | Page 148 of 148
相关型号：
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明